CANON IMAGECLASS MF746CDW (01) PDF MANUAL

CANON IMAGECLASS MF746CDW (01) PDF SUMMARY:

What functions are available on the Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw / MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

The following functions are available on the Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw / MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw:

Function	MF746Cdw	MF745Cdw	MF743Cdw	MF741Cdw	MF644Cdw	MF642Cdw	MF641Cw
Copy	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓
Fax	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	–	–
Print	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓
Scan	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓
Feeder / Platen glass cover	Feeder (2-sided scanning)	Feeder (2-sided scanning)	Feeder (2-sided scanning)	Feeder (1-sided scanning)	Feeder (2-sided scanning)	Feeder (1-sided scanning)	Platen glass cover
2-sided printing	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓	✓
Wireless LAN	✓	✓	✓	–	–	–	–
NFC	✓	✓	✓	✓	–	–	–
Application Library	✓	✓	–	–	–	–	–

What is the default System Manager ID on the Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw and MF745Cdw?

The default System Manager ID on the Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw and MF745Cdw is 7654321.

What is the default System Manager ID on the Canon imageCLASS MF743Cdw, MF741Cdw, MF644Cdw, MF642Cdw, and MF641Cw?

The default System Manager ID is not specified for the Canon imageCLASS MF743Cdw, MF741Cdw, MF644Cdw, MF642Cdw, and MF641Cw.

What is the default System Manager PIN on the Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw and MF745Cdw?

The default System Manager PIN on the Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw and MF745Cdw is 7654321.

What is the default System Manager PIN on the Canon imageCLASS MF743Cdw, MF741Cdw, MF644Cdw, MF642Cdw, and MF641Cw?

The default System Manager PIN is not specified for the Canon imageCLASS MF743Cdw, MF741Cdw, MF644Cdw, MF642Cdw, and MF641Cw.

What optional items are available for the Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw / MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

The following optional items are available for the Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw / MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw:

• Cassette Feeding Module-AF
• Copy Card Reader-F
• Barcode Printing Kit
• Send PDF Security Feature Set

What are the steps required to set up a Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw / MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

The machine should be set up by following these steps in order:

1. Setting Up Using the Setup Guide
2. Setting Up the Network Environment
3. Installing Drivers
4. Configuring Initial Settings for Fax Functions
5. Configuring Scan Settings

What are some tips for setting up the Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw / MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

• Setting from the Remote UI: When the network environment settings are complete, you can efficiently set the machine from a computer using Remote UI.
• Importing data from another machine to save time: As long as the model is the same, you can save setting data registered on another Canon printer/multifunction machine to a computer (export) and load the setting data to this machine (import).

What are the security measures to prevent unauthorized access from the external network on the Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw / MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

The following security measures should be taken to prevent unauthorized access from the external network:

• Assigning a Private IP Address
• Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
• Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication
• Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine

What are the ranges for private IP addresses?

Private IP addresses are found in one of the following ranges:

• From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
• From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
• From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

What should be done if a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine?

If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a firewall that prevents access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.

What is a Firewall?

A firewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/intrusions to a local area network. You can use a firewall on your network environment to block access from the external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specified IP address of the external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP address filter.

How is a PIN used to manage information stored in a multifunction machine?

If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printers/multifunction machines enable you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.

What are some examples of setting a PIN to manage information stored in a multifunction machine?

• Setting PIN to Each Function:
  • Setting PIN for Using Remote UI
  • Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings
  • Address Book PIN

What steps should be followed when setting up a Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw / MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw using the Setup Guide?

When the machine is turned on for the first time, the Setup Guide starts up to assist you to configure the initial settings of the machine by following the on-screen guidance. In the Setup Guide, the setting screens are displayed in the following order:

1. Setting the Display Language and the Country or Region
2. Setting the Date and Time
3. Setting the Access Security Measures
4. Performing the Color Adjustment
5. Configuring Automatic Cleaning of the Fixing Assembly
6. Setting the Wireless LAN

How is the Display Language and the Country or Region set using the Setup Guide?

1. Select a language.
2. Select <Yes>.
3. Select a country or region.

How is the Date and Time set using the Setup Guide?

1. Select a time zone.

2. Enter the date and time, and select <Apply>.

   • Tap the entry field, and enter the date and time.

What is Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)?

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.

How are the Access Security Measures set using the Setup Guide for the Canon imageCLASS MF746Cdw and MF745Cdw?

1. Select <Yes>.

   • If you select <No>, the settings required for using the Remote UI are not configured, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 4.

2. Select <Yes>.

   • If you select <No>, the System Manager ID and PIN are not changed from the default settings, and the Setup Guide proceeds to number 4 in this step.

3. Specify the System Manager ID and PIN.

   • Specify the <System Manager ID> <System Manager PIN>.
   • Enter numbers for each item, and select <Apply>.
   • The Confirm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to confirm.

4. Select <Yes>.

   • If you select <No>, a Remote UI Access PIN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 4.

5. Specify the Remote UI Access PIN.

   • Enter a PIN, and select <Apply>.
   • The Confirm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to confirm.
   • Do not forget your PIN.
   • You cannot register a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as “00” or “0000000.”

What is important to remember when specifying the System Manager ID and PIN?

• Do not forget your PIN.
• You cannot register an ID or PIN that consists only of zeros, such as “00” or “0000000.”

How are the Access Security Measures set using the Setup Guide for the Canon imageCLASS MF743Cdw, MF741Cdw, MF644Cdw, MF642Cdw, and MF641Cw?

1. Select <Yes> <Yes>.

   • If you select <No> in any of the screens, the settings required for using the Remote UI are not configured, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 4.

2. Specify the Remote UI Access PIN.

   • Enter a PIN, and select <Apply>.
   • The Confirm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to confirm.
   • Do not forget your PIN.
   • You cannot register a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as “00” or “0000000.”

What is important to remember when specifying the Remote UI Access PIN?

• Do not forget your PIN.
• You cannot register a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as “00” or “0000000.”

How is the Color Adjustment performed using the Setup Guide?

1. Select <Yes>.

   • If you select <No>, color adjustment is not performed, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 5.

2. Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK>.

3. Confirm the procedure, and select <Start>.

   • An adjustment image is printed.

4. Open the feeder after the screen displayed during printing is closed.

5. Place the adjustment image on the platen glass.

   • Place the adjustment image with the print side facing down and the black stripe toward the back side of the machine.

6. Gently close the feeder.

7. Select <Start Scanning>.

   • Adjustment starts.
   • When adjustment is complete, remove the adjustment image from the platen glass.

What should be done with the adjustment image after adjustment is complete?

The adjustment image should be removed from the platen glass.

How is the Automatic Cleaning of the Fixing Assembly configured using the Setup Guide?

1. Check the message displayed on the screen, and select <Yes>.

   • If you select <No>, automatic cleaning is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 6.
   • You can set automatic cleaning of the fixing assembly later.

2. Select <On>.

   • If you select <Off>, automatic cleaning is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 6.

3. Set available paper sources to <On>.

   • When cleaning is performed, paper is fed from the paper source for which you set <On>.

4. Select <Apply>.

What paper sizes and types can be used for cleaning the fixing assembly?

The following paper sizes and types can be used for cleaning the fixing assembly:

• Paper sizes: A4/Letter
• Paper types: Plain 1 to 3/Recycled 1 or 2

How is the Wireless LAN set using the Setup Guide?

1. Select <Yes>.

   • If you select <No>, wireless LAN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 7.

2. Select <OK>.

When the machine is turned on for the first time, what starts up to assist you to configure the initial settings of the machine by following the on-screen guidance?

The Setup Guide starts up to assist you to configure the initial settings of the machine by following the on-screen guidance.

What is an IP address?

An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network.

What are the two types of IP addresses?

The two types of IP addresses are:

• “global IP address”: used for the communication connecting to the Internet
• “private IP address”: used for the communication within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company

If a global IP address is assigned, what is the security risk?

If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/ multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage due to unauthorized access from external network increases.

If a private IP address is assigned, what is the security risk?

If a private IP address is assigned, your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local area network, such as a LAN in the company.

What should you do with the adjustment image when adjustment is complete?

Remove the adjustment image from the platen glass.

What happens if you select <No> in step 6 of the Setup Guide?

If you select <No>, wireless LAN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 7.

What happens if you select <No> on any of the screens in step 3 of the Setup Guide for the MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw / MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

The settings required for using the Remote UI are not configured, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 4.

What happens if you select <No> in step 1 of the Setup Guide for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw?

The settings required for using the Remote UI are not configured, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 4.

How do you enter the date and time when setting the Date and Time using the Setup Guide?

Tap the entry field, and enter the date and time.

What is the System Manager ID?

It is the ID of the system manager account.

How can you achieve good copy quality?

You can adjust the gradation to achieve good copy quality.

What should you place the adjustment image on?

Place the adjustment image on the platen glass.

What happens if you select <No> in step 4 of the Setup Guide?

If you select <No>, color adjustment is not performed, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 5.

What should you do with the black stripe on the adjustment image when placing it on the platen glass?

Place the adjustment image with the print side facing down and the black stripe toward the back side of the machine.

What happens if you select <No> in step 5 of the Setup Guide?

Automatic cleaning is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 6.

What is the fixing assembly?

It is a part of the printer that fuses the toner to the paper.

What happens if you select <Off> in step 2 when configuring Automatic Cleaning of the Fixing Assembly using the Setup Guide?

Automatic cleaning is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 6.

What happens when cleaning is performed?

Paper is fed from the paper source for which you set <On>.

Turning ON the Machine

How is the machine turned on?

1. Press the ON button.

   • The ON lamp lights up and the machine starts up. It takes about 30 seconds until the screen is ready.
   • When the machine is turned on for the first time, the Setup Guide starts up to assist you in configuring the settings. Setting Up Using the Setup Guide

2. Check that there are no error messages displayed on the screen.

   • If an error message is displayed, take the appropriate action. Troubleshooting (FAQ)

Turning OFF the Machine

How is the machine turned off?

1. Press the ON button.

2. Check that there are no error messages displayed on the screen.

   • If an error message is displayed, take the appropriate action. Troubleshooting (FAQ)

3. Press the ON button again.

   • The ON lamp flashes and the machine starts to shut down.
   • When the ON lamp goes out, the machine is completely off.

4. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

What should you do before unplugging the power cord from the wall outlet?

Make sure the ON lamp is off.

Turning OFF the Machine by Remote Operation

How is the machine turned off by remote operation?

IMPORTANT

• This function is available when the [Turn OFF by Remote Operation] setting on the operation panel is [ON].

1. Open the web browser on your computer.

2. Enter “http://(machine’s IP address or host name)” in the address bar.

   • For the machine’s IP address or host name, see Viewing Network Settings.

3. Click [Turn OFF].

NOTE

• You can also click the [Turn OFF] button on the Remote UI top page.

What is important to know about turning off the machine by remote operation?

This function is available when the [Turn OFF by Remote Operation] setting on the operation panel is [ON].

Powering OFF at a Fixed Time

How is the machine powered off at a fixed time?

You can configure the machine to automatically power off at fixed times.

IMPORTANT

• This function is available when the [Auto Power Off] setting on the operation panel is [ON].

NOTE

• If the machine does not automatically power off, check the [Auto Power Off Time] settings.

What is important to know about powering off the machine at a fixed time?

• This function is available when the [Auto Power Off] setting on the operation panel is [ON].
• If the machine does not automatically power off, check the [Auto Power Off Time] settings.

Restarting the Machine

Why should you restart the machine?

If the machine does not operate properly, restarting the machine may resolve the problem.

CAUTION

• Data being processed may be lost when you restart the machine.

How is the machine restarted?

1. Press the ON button.

2. Check that there are no error messages displayed on the screen.

   • If an error message is displayed, take the appropriate action.

3. Press the ON button again.

   • The ON lamp flashes and the machine starts to shut down.
   • When the ON lamp goes out, the machine is completely off.

4. Wait for at least 10 seconds after the ON lamp goes out, then press the ON button.

NOTE

• You can also restart the machine using Remote UI.

  1. Open the web browser on your computer.

  2. Enter “http://(machine’s IP address or host name)” in the address bar.

     • For the machine’s IP address or host name, see “Viewing Network Settings.”

  3. When the top page is displayed, click [Restart].

• You cannot restart the machine when an error message is displayed on the screen. Take appropriate action according to the error message, then restart the machine. Troubleshooting (FAQ)

What is important to remember when restarting the machine?

• Data being processed may be lost when you restart the machine.
• You cannot restart the machine when an error message is displayed on the screen. Take appropriate action according to the error message, then restart the machine.

Using the Operation Panel

What are the basic screens that appear on the operation panel?

The following basic screens appear on the operation panel:

• Home Screen
• <Status Monitor> Screen
• Message Display

Home Screen

What is the Home Screen?

The Home Screen is the starting point for basic operations, such as copying or scanning. If the machine remains idle for a while after being turned on, the screen automatically switches to the Home Screen.

What are the main items on the Home Screen?

The main items on the Home Screen are:

• Shortcut icons
• Function buttons
• Status icons

How are shortcut icons used?

You can use shortcut icons to quickly access frequently used settings.

How are function buttons used?

You can press a function button to switch to the basic features screen for the corresponding function.

How are status icons used?

The status icons indicate the current status of the machine.

What are the Home Screen items that are not frequently used?

The following Home Screen items that are not frequently used are hidden by default:

• Shortcut icons: [Secure Print], [Application Library]
• Function buttons: [Fax], [Store/Access Files]
• Status icons: [USB Memory]

How can the hidden items be displayed?

You can change the setting of [Hidden Items] to display the hidden items.

<Status Monitor> Screen

What is the <Status Monitor> Screen?

The <Status Monitor> Screen displays the status of the machine and consumables.

How can you switch to the <Status Monitor> Screen?

Press the [Status Monitor/Cancel] key to switch to the <Status Monitor> Screen.

Message Display

What are messages?

Messages are displayed to inform you of the machine’s status, warnings, or errors.

Where are messages displayed?

Messages are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

What are the different types of messages?

The following types of messages may be displayed:

• Information: Indicates the current status.
• Caution: Indicates something that needs attention.
• Error: Indicates that an error has occurred.

What should you do if an error message is displayed?

Take the appropriate action described in the message.

Basic Operation

Entering Text

How is text entered on the operation panel?

1. Tap the entry field for which you want to enter text.
2. Select the input mode.
3. Enter characters.
4. Select [#] to switch between uppercase letters, lowercase letters, numbers, and symbols.
5. Select [OK].

NOTE

• You can enter up to 64 characters.
• Available input modes and characters vary depending on the selected language.
• You can also use the [[Clear]] key to delete the last character you entered, or the [[C]] key to delete all entered characters.

Logging in to the Machine

How is the machine logged in to?

When Department ID Management is enabled, you can select a Department ID to which you belong to use the machine.

1. Select your Department ID.
2. Enter the password for the Department ID, and select [OK].

NOTE

• If a wrong password is entered three consecutive times, you will no longer be able to log in. Contact your administrator.

What should you do if a wrong password is entered three consecutive times?

Contact your administrator.

Placing Originals

How are originals placed on the machine?

You can place originals on the platen glass or in the feeder.

Placing Originals on the Platen Glass

When should originals be placed on the platen glass?

Place originals on the platen glass when scanning or copying thick documents, originals that are bound, or small originals such as business cards.

How are originals placed on the platen glass?

1. Open the feeder.
2. Place the original face down on the platen glass, aligning it with the alignment mark.
3. Gently close the feeder.

NOTE

• Do not open or close the feeder forcefully.

Placing Originals in the Feeder

When should originals be placed in the feeder?

Place originals in the feeder when copying or scanning multiple originals, or originals that are printed on thin paper.

How are originals placed in the feeder?

1. Adjust the paper guides to the width of the originals.

2. Fan the originals to prevent them from sticking together.

3. Align the originals with the paper guides and load them face up in the feeder.

   • The machine can automatically detect the page size.

NOTE

• Up to 50 sheets of plain paper can be loaded in the feeder at a time.

Loading Paper

How is paper loaded in the machine?

You can load paper in the paper drawer or in the multi-purpose tray.

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer

How is paper loaded in the paper drawer?

1. Open the paper drawer.

2. Pull out the paper tray toward you until it stops.

3. Slide the paper guides (A) to align with the paper size.

   • If loading legal-sized paper, pull out the sub tray (B).

4. Load paper into the paper tray until the paper stack reaches the load limit mark, then adjust the paper guides (A) to fit the paper stack.

   • When adjusting the paper guides (A), make sure that they are firmly secured in the slots.

5. Gently push the paper tray back in until it stops.

6. Close the paper drawer.

7. Confirm the message that is displayed on the screen, and select [Yes].

NOTE

• If the paper size and type set on the operation panel and the actual size and type loaded in the paper drawer are different, the machine may not operate properly.

What should you do if the paper size and type set on the operation panel and the actual size and type loaded in the paper drawer are different?

The machine may not operate properly.

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray

How is paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray?

1. Open the multi-purpose tray.
2. Pull out the paper support.
3. Slide the paper guides to align with the paper size.
4. Load paper against the paper guides in the multi-purpose tray.
5. Gently push the multi-purpose tray back in until it stops.
6. Confirm the message that is displayed on the screen, and select the size and type of loaded paper.

NOTE

• To prevent paper jams, do not load paper above the load limit mark.

What should you do to prevent paper jams?

Do not load paper above the load limit mark.

Loading Envelopes

How are envelopes loaded in the machine?

You can load envelopes in the multi-purpose tray.

1. Open the multi-purpose tray.

2. Pull out the paper support.

3. Slide the paper guides to align with the envelope size.

4. Load envelopes against the paper guides in the multi-purpose tray with the flap facing up and the printing side facing you.

   • Load up to 10 envelopes at a time.

5. Gently push the multi-purpose tray back in until it stops.

6. Confirm the message that is displayed on the screen, and select [Envelopes] for the size and type of loaded paper.

NOTE

• To prevent paper jams, load only the specified number of envelopes and make sure that they are not curled or folded.
• When loading envelopes, press them firmly against the paper guides.
• If envelopes are not fed properly, load one envelope at a time.

What should you do to prevent paper jams when loading envelopes?

Load only the specified number of envelopes and make sure that they are not curled or folded.

Loading Preprinted Paper

How is preprinted paper loaded in the machine?

You can load preprinted paper in the paper drawer or the multi-purpose tray.

1. Load the paper in the paper drawer or the multi-purpose tray.

2. When loading the paper in the paper drawer:

   1. Confirm the message that is displayed on the screen, and select [Yes].
   2. Select [Change Settings], and specify the orientation of the preprinted image.

3. When loading the paper in the multi-purpose tray:

   1. Confirm the message that is displayed on the screen, and select the size and type of loaded paper.
   2. Specify the orientation of the preprinted image.

NOTE

• Preprinted paper refers to paper on which a logo, form, or other image is already printed.
• The orientation settings affect how the preprinted image will appear on the back side when printing on both sides of the sheet.

What is preprinted paper?

Preprinted paper refers to paper on which a logo, form, or other image is already printed.

Specifying Paper Size and Type

How is the paper size and type specified?

You can specify the paper size and type in the paper drawer or the multi-purpose tray.

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer

How is the paper size and type specified in the paper drawer?

1. Open the paper drawer.
2. Pull out the paper tray toward you until it stops.
3. Set the lever (A) to the paper size to be registered.
4. Set the lever (B) to the paper type to be registered.
5. Gently push the paper tray back in until it stops.
6. Close the paper drawer.

NOTE

• Make sure that the paper size and type registered for the paper drawer are correct. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray

How is the paper size and type specified in the multi-purpose tray?

You can specify the paper size and type each time you load paper in the multi-purpose tray.

1. Load paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray
2. Confirm the message that is displayed on the screen, and select the size and type of loaded paper.

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray

How are default paper settings registered for the multi-purpose tray?

You can register the paper size and type to be selected by default when you load paper in the multi-purpose tray.

NOTE

• If you change the default settings, the previous settings will be overwritten.

Registering a Custom Paper Size

How is a custom paper size registered?

You can register a custom paper size if the required paper size is not included in the paper size list.

1. Select [Custom Size].
2. Select [Add].
3. Specify the width, height, and unit, and select [OK].

NOTE

• You can register up to 10 custom paper sizes.

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed

How are the paper sizes displayed limited?

You can limit the paper sizes that are displayed to prevent incorrect sizes from being selected.

Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function

How is an appropriate paper source automatically selected for each function?

The machine automatically selects the paper source based on the size and type of the paper required for the selected function and the paper size and type set for each paper source.

NOTE

• The paper source may not be selected automatically depending on the settings of the function to be used. In this case, select the paper source manually.

What should you do if the paper source is not selected automatically?

Select the paper source manually.

Customizing the Display

How is the display customized?

You can customize the display settings to suit your preferences.

Customizing the Home Screen

How is the Home Screen customized?

You can change the display order of shortcut icons and function buttons, or hide those that are not used frequently.

NOTE

• Changes in settings are reflected immediately.

Registering Frequently Used Settings

How are frequently used settings registered?

You can register frequently used settings to shortcut icons on the Home Screen or in the Address Book.

Changing the Default Settings for Functions

How are the default settings for functions changed?

You can change the default settings for each function.

Setting Sounds

How are sounds set?

You can select the type of sounds to be produced when operating the machine.

NOTE

• The selected sounds will be produced only when [Silent Mode] is set to [OFF].

Entering Sleep Mode

How does the machine enter Sleep Mode?

The machine automatically enters Sleep Mode when it has not been operated for a certain period of time.

Registering Destinations

How are destinations registered?

You can register destinations in the Address Book, or specify destinations directly by entering the fax number, e-mail address, or folder path.

NOTE

• You can register destinations using Remote UI.

Registering Destinations in the Address Book

How do I configure the settings for toner replenishment service?

You can configure the settings for toner replenishment service, which automatically delivers new toner cartridges before the existing ones run out. Note that this service requires prior registration with select retailers and is only available in certain countries. To configure settings:

1. Select <Next>.
2. Select <Accept>.
   • Selecting <Do Not Accept> skips the configuration and moves to step 8 of the Setup Guide.
3. Select <OK>.
   • If connecting to the server fails, try configuring again through <Connect to Server/Verify Connection with Server> in <Toner Delivery Settings> on the Home screen.

What is the Application Library?

The Application Library is a one-touch button on the Home screen. It provides descriptions of each function.

How do I finish the Setup Guide?

Select <End> to finish the Setup Guide. The Home screen will appear when the Setup Guide is complete.

How do I set the date and time on the machine?

The machine uses the date and time as a reference for functions that specify time, so it is important to set them accurately.

How do I set the time zone?

1. Select <Menu> on the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Zone>.
3. Select the time zone.

What is UTC?

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard for regulating clocks and time globally. Time differences exist based on the country or area where the machine is used. Setting the correct UTC time zone is necessary for internet communications.

How do I set the current date and time?

1. Select <Menu> on the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Current Date/Time Settings>.
3. Tap the entry field and enter the date and time.
4. Select <Apply>.

What should I note when setting the current date and time?

• Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. Changing the <Time Zone> setting later will also change the current date and time.
• The display format of the date and time can be changed.

How do I set the Daylight Saving Time?

If daylight saving time is enabled, you can specify the start and end dates for it.

1. Select <Menu> on the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight Saving Time Settings>.
3. Select <Off> or <On> in <Daylight Saving Time>.
   • When <On> is selected, select <Start Date> and <End Date>, and set the month and day for each item by specifying “what day of which week.”
4. Select <Apply>.

What should I consider when setting up the network environment?

When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless LAN, you need to set a unique IP address for the selected network. You should select “wired” or “wireless” based on your communication environment and networking devices. For specific IP address settings, contact your internet service provider or network administrator.

What are some important considerations for setting up the network environment?

• If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, personal information might be leaked to a third party.
• The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs simultaneously.
• The machine does not include a LAN cable or router, so have them prepared as needed.
• Consult the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact their manufacturer for further information.

What steps should I take before connecting the machine to a network?

Check your computer settings.

• Ensure your computer is correctly connected to the network. Refer to the instruction manuals for your devices or contact the device manufacturers for more information.
• Confirm that the network settings are complete on your computer. If the network is not properly set up, the machine will not be usable on the network, even if you complete the remaining steps.
• Depending on the network, you might need to adjust settings for the communication method or Ethernet type. Contact your internet service provider or network administrator for further details.
• Check the MAC address of the machine.

What steps should I take to connect to an IEEE 802.1X network?

See “Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings”.

How do I select wired or wireless LAN?

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN.

How do I connect to a wired or wireless LAN?

Proceed to the instructions corresponding to your chosen setting in step 2.

How do I set the IP address?

The machine is initially set to obtain an IP address automatically. If you wish to use a specific IP address, change this setting.

How do I select wired LAN or wireless LAN?

After choosing whether to connect the machine to the computer using wired or wireless LAN, make your selection on the operation panel.

1. Select <Menu> on the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3. Select <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>.
4. Select <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>.

Note that if you switch between <Wired LAN> and <Wireless LAN>, you must uninstall and reinstall the drivers on your computer. See the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website for more information.

How do I connect to a wired LAN?

1. Connect a LAN cable.
   • Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to a router.
   • Push the connector in until it clicks into place.
2. Wait for several minutes.
   • The IP address is set automatically.
   • You can also set the IP address manually.

How do I connect to a wireless LAN?

Wireless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer wirelessly. If your router has Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), network configuration is automatic and easy. If your devices do not support automatic configuration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in detail, you need to set up the connection manually.

What are some risks and security considerations for wireless LAN connections?

• Risk of information leak: Use wireless LAN connections at your own discretion and risk. Connecting to an unsecured network could lead to personal information being leaked to a third party, as radio waves used in wireless communication can travel beyond walls.
• Wireless LAN security: The wireless LAN function supports WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK. Refer to the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact the manufacturer for details on the wireless security compatibility of your wireless router.

What devices are required for a wireless LAN connection?

The machine does not include a wireless router, so have one ready if necessary.

How do I set up a connection using WPS?

WPS offers two modes: push button mode and PIN code mode.

• Push Button Mode: If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode, you can set up a connection easily.
  • Locate the WPS mark on your router’s packaging and ensure your networking device has a WPS button.
• PIN Code Mode: Some WPS routers do not support push button mode. If your networking device’s packaging or instructions mention WPS PIN code mode, set up the connection by entering the PIN code.
  • Note that if your router is set to use WEP authentication, you might not be able to set up a connection using WPS.

How do I set up a connection manually?

When setting up a wireless connection manually, you can either select a wireless router or enter the required information manually. Ensure you have the necessary setup information, such as the SSID and network key, regardless of the method.

• Selecting a Wireless Router: Choose this option if you need to set up the connection manually but want to simplify the process.
• Manually Entering the Setup Information: If you want to specify security settings like authentication and encryption in detail, manually enter the SSID and network key to establish the connection.

How do I set up a connection using WPS push button mode?

You can easily set up a connection using the WPS button if your wireless router supports WPS push button mode. Note that the operation of the wireless router may vary depending on the device.

1. Select <Menu> on the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.
   • Enter the correct ID and PIN if the login screen appears.
3. Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
   • Select <Yes> if the “Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?” message appears.
4. Read the message displayed and select <OK>.
5. Select <WPS Push Button Mode>.
6. Select <Yes>.
7. Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.
   • The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 6.
   • The duration for pressing and holding the button may vary depending on the networking device; refer to the device’s instruction manuals.
8. Wait until the message <Connected.> appears.
9. Select <Close>.
   • Wait for a few minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

What should I do if an error message appears during setup?

Select <Close> and return to step 5.

What determines the signal strength?

The machine connects to the device with the strongest signal when multiple wireless routers are available. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

Can I set the IP address manually?

Yes, you can set the IP address manually.

What does the Wi-Fi icon indicate?

The Wi-Fi icon appears on the Home screen or the Basic Features screen of each function when the machine is connected to the wireless LAN.

How can I reduce power consumption?

You can configure the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on the signals from the wireless router.

What happens if the machine’s IP address changes?

In a DHCP environment, the machine’s IP address may change automatically. However, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and computer are on the same subnet.

How do I set up a connection using WPS PIN code mode?

If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register it to the networking device. Note that the operation of the wireless router may vary depending on the device. Refer to the instruction manuals of your networking device.

How do I set up a connection using WPS PIN code mode from a computer?

1. Access your wireless router from a computer and go to the screen for entering a WPS PIN code.
   • Refer to the instruction manuals for your networking device for more information.

How do I set up a connection using WPS PIN code mode from the operation panel?

1. Select <Menu> on the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.
   • Enter the correct ID and PIN if the login screen appears.
3. Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
   • Select <Yes> if the “Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?” message appears.
4. Read the message and select <OK>.
5. Select <WPS PIN Code Mode>.
6. Select <Yes>.
   • The PIN code will be generated and displayed.

How do I register the PIN code to the wireless router?

1. Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router on the setup screen from step 1.

What should I note when registering the PIN code?

• The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 7.
• Select <Close> and return to step 6 if an error message appears during setup.

How do I finish setting up the connection using WPS PIN code mode?

1. Wait until the message <Connected.> appears.
2. Select <Close>.
   • Wait a few minutes until the IP address and other settings are configured automatically.

What should I consider regarding signal strength when using WPS PIN code mode?

The machine connects to the router with the strongest signal if multiple options are available. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

Can I set the IP address manually when using WPS PIN code mode?

Yes, you can manually set the IP address.

What does the Wi-Fi icon indicate when using WPS PIN code mode?

The Wi-Fi icon is displayed on the Home screen or Basic Features screen when connected to the wireless LAN.

How can I reduce power consumption when using WPS PIN code mode?

You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on the signals from the wireless router.

What happens if the machine’s IP address changes when using WPS PIN code mode?

In a DHCP environment, the machine’s IP address might change automatically. However, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and computer share the same subnet.

How do I set up a connection by selecting a wireless router?

This method allows you to search for available wireless routers (or access points) and select one from the machine’s display. You will need to enter a WEP key or PSK for the network key. Before proceeding, check and note the necessary setup information, including the SSID and network key.

What are the security settings for this method?

If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a router, the WEP authentication method defaults to <Open System>, and the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). To choose <Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, set up the connection using <Enter Manually>.

How do I set up the connection by selecting a wireless router?

1. Select <Menu> on the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3. Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
   • Select <Yes> if prompted to enable the wireless LAN.
4. Read the message and select <OK>.
5. Select <SSID Settings>.
6. Select <Select Access Point>.
   • The machine will start searching for available routers.
7. Select a wireless LAN router.
   • Select the router with the matching SSID you noted earlier and select <Next> <OK>.
8. Enter the network key you wrote down.
   • Enter the network key and select <Apply>.
9. Select <Yes>.
10. Wait until the <Connected.> message is displayed.
11. Select <Close>.
    • Wait for a few minutes as the IP address and other settings are configured automatically.

What should I do if a message indicates that no access point can be found?

Check the network settings. Refer to the “Troubleshooting (FAQ)” section on the online manual website for additional information.

How can I view details of the security settings?

Select the wireless LAN router and then select <Details>. To return to the previous screen, select <Back>.

What should I do if my wireless router is not found?

Verify that the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. Consult the “Troubleshooting (FAQ)” section on the online manual website for further troubleshooting steps.

What should I do if an error message appears during setup?

Select <Close>, double-check the network key, and return to step 5.

What should I consider about signal strength when selecting a wireless router?

The machine prioritizes connecting to the router with the strongest signal if multiple options are available. The signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

Can I set the IP address manually when selecting a wireless router?

Yes, you have the option to set the IP address manually.

What does the Wi-Fi icon indicate when selecting a wireless router?

When the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon will appear on the Home screen or Basic Features screen.

How can I reduce power consumption when selecting a wireless router?

You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on the signals from the wireless router to conserve power.

What happens if the machine’s IP address changes when selecting a wireless router?

If the machine is in a DHCP environment, its IP address may change automatically. However, the connection remains active as long as the machine and computer belong to the same subnet.

How do I set up a connection by specifying detailed settings?

This method involves manually entering all the required information for the wireless LAN connection if you want to specify the security settings in detail or if the other procedures fail to establish the connection. Before starting, ensure you have noted down the necessary information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security protocols.

How do I set up the connection by specifying detailed settings?

1. Select <Menu> on the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3. Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
   • Select <Yes> if prompted to enable the wireless LAN.
4. Read the message and select <OK>.
5. Select <SSID Settings> <Enter Manually>.
6. Enter the SSID you wrote down.
   • Enter the SSID and select <Apply>.
7. Specify the security settings based on the information you noted down.
   • Choose <None> if you do not need to specify security settings.

How do I configure the security settings using WEP?

1. Select <WEP>.
2. Choose an authentication method:
   • <Open System>: Sets open system authentication, also known as “open authentication.”
   • <Shared Key>: Uses the WEP key as a password.
3. Select the WEP key you want to edit (1 to 4) and select <Edit>.
   • You can register up to four WEP keys.
4. Enter the network key you wrote down and select <Apply>.
5. Select the WEP key you edited and select <Register>.

What happens when <Open System> is selected for WEP authentication?

If shared key authentication is set on the router, the machine may encounter an authentication error when connecting to the wireless LAN. In this case, the machine automatically switches to <Shared Key> and attempts to reconnect.

How do I configure the security settings using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK?

1. Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.
2. Choose an encryption method:
   • <Auto>: The machine will automatically select either AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the wireless router’s setting.
   • <AES-CCMP>: Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.
3. Enter the network key you wrote down and select <Apply>.
4. Select <Yes>.

What should I do if an error message appears during setup?

Select <Close>, verify the specified settings, and return to step 5.

How do I complete the setup process after specifying detailed settings?

1. Wait until the message <Connected.> is displayed.
2. Select <Close>.
   • Wait a few minutes while the IP address and other items are set automatically.

What should I consider about signal strength when specifying detailed settings?

The machine connects to the router with the strongest signal when multiple routers are available for connection. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

Can I set the IP address manually when specifying detailed settings?

Yes, you can manually set the IP address.

What does the Wi-Fi icon indicate when specifying detailed settings?

The Wi-Fi icon is displayed on the Home screen or the Basic Features screen when the machine is connected to the wireless LAN.

How can I reduce power consumption when specifying detailed settings?

You can configure the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals from the wireless router to conserve power.

What happens if the machine’s IP address changes when specifying detailed settings?

In a DHCP environment, the machine’s IP address may change automatically, but the connection remains active as long as the machine and computer belong to the same subnet.

How do I check the SSID and network key?

When setting up a wireless connection manually, you need the SSID and network key of your wireless router. This information may be found on your networking devices. Check your devices and note down the information before setting up the connection. For detailed instructions, refer to the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer.

What is SSID?

SSID is a name used to identify a specific wireless LAN. Other terms used for SSID include “access point name” and “network name.”

What is Network Key?

Network Key is a keyword or password that encrypts data or authenticates a network. Alternative terms for network key include “encryption key,” “WEP key,” “WPA/WPA2 passphrase,” and “preshared key (PSK).”

What are Wireless Security Protocols (Authentication/Encryption)?

When manually setting up a wireless connection using detailed settings, you need to specify security settings. Check the following information:

• Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)
• Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)
• Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

How do I set the IPv4 address?

The machine’s IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are firmly inserted into the ports. You can test the network connection if necessary.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.

• If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

3. Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.
4. Configure IP address settings.

<Auto Acquire> Select to automatically assign an IP address via DHCP protocol. When <On> is displayed, automatic addressing is enabled.

<Manually Acquire> Select to configure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this option, the automatic acquirement must be set to <Off>.

<Check Settings> Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.

How do I automatically assign an IP address?

1. Select <Auto Acquire>.
2. Select <On> in <Auto Acquire>, and select <Select Protocol>.
3. Select <DHCP>.
4. Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.

• If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.

5. Select <Apply>.

• IP addresses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.

If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address:

• Select <Off>. If you select <DHCP> when these services are unavailable, the machine will waste time and communications resources searching the network for these services.

How do I manually enter an IP address?

1. Select <Auto Acquire>, and select <Off> in <Auto Acquire> <Apply> <OK>.
2. Select <Manually Acquire>.
3. Enter <IP Address>, <Subnet Mask>, and <Gateway Address>, and select <Apply>.
4. Select <OK>.
5. Restart the machine.

How can I check whether the IPv4 address settings are correct?

• Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer. If a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel.
• When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver: When the MFNP port is used, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet; therefore, you do not need to add a new port. When the standard TCP/IP port is used, you need to add a new port.
• If you do not know which port is used, see “Checking the Printer Port”.

How do I test the network connection?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.

• If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

3. Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <PING Command>.
4. Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and select <Apply>.
   • If a proper connection has been established, <Received response from the host.> is displayed.

How do I set IPv6 addresses?

The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be configured via the Remote UI. Before setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings. You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses. Note that the scan function that uses the scanner driver or MF Scan Utility is not available in an IPv6 environment.

The machine can use the following multiple IPv6 addresses:

Type	Description
Link-local address	An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the machine is enabled.
Manual address	An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prefix length and default router address.
Stateless address	An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network prefix that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the machine is restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address	An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [IPv6 Settings].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Select the [Use IPv6] check box and configure the required settings.
6. Click [OK].
7. Restart the machine.

[Use IPv6] Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.

[Stateless Address 1] Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.

[Use Manual Address] When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prefix length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.

[IP Address] Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with “ff” (or multicast address) cannot be entered.

[Prefix Length] Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.

[Default Router Address] Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with “ff” (or multicast address) cannot be entered.

[Use DHCPv6] Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.

How can I check whether the IPv6 settings are correct?

• Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the machine.

How do I select settings from the operation panel?

• IPv6 settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
• When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver: You need to add a new port.

What should I know about viewing network settings?

• The IP address is not correctly configured if it is displayed as “0.0.0.0”.
• Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP address is correctly configured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine starts communicating.
• You can print a list of the current network settings.

How do I view IPv4 settings?

<Status Monitor> <Network Information> <IPv4> Select the setting to view Check the settings.

How do I view IPv6 settings?

<Status Monitor> <Network Information> <IPv6> Select the setting to view Check the settings.

How do I view the MAC address for wired LAN?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.

• If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

3. Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
   • The MAC address is displayed.

How do I view the MAC address and information for wireless LAN?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.

• If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

3. Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
4. Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5. Select <Connection Information>.
6. Select the setting to view.

How do I view security information?

• To view WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information, select <Security Settings>.

How do I view information from the <Status Monitor> screen?

• <Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from <Status Monitor>.
• <Status Monitor> <Network Information> <Network Connection Type> Select the setting to view.

How do I configure settings for communication with a computer?

Specify the protocol and port when operating the machine from a computer via the network. Before configuring the machine for printing or faxing from a computer, perform the basic setup procedures.

• Protocols explained here are rules for delivering document data between a computer and the machine, and can be selected according to intended purposes or the network environment.
• Ports are gateways for passing data between network devices. If a communication failure occurs in the network connection, the port settings may be the cause of the problem.

How do I configure printing protocols and WSD functions?

Configure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Click [Network Settings].
4. Configure printing protocols.

How do I configure LPD or RAW?

1. Select [LPD Settings] or [RAW Settings] [Edit].
2. Configure the settings as necessary.
3. Click [OK].

[Use LPD Printing] Select the check box to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.

[Use RAW Printing] Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.

[RX Timeout] Set a value as the restart wait time for data reception. If data reception does not resume within the set time, printing is canceled.

How do I configure WSD?

1. Select [WSD Settings] [Edit].
2. Configure the settings as necessary.
3. Click [OK].

[Use WSD Printing] Select the check box to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.

[Use WSD Browsing] Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.

[Use WSD Scanning] WSD scanning enables you to scan documents to a computer without installing the scanner driver. Select the check box to scan documents via WSD. When not using WSD scanning, clear the check box.

[Use Computer Scanning] Select the check box to use WSD scanning by operating the machine with the operation panel. This check box can only be selected when the [Use WSD Scanning] check box is selected. To perform scanning, select <Scan> in the Home screen and specify a WSD-connected computer as a scan destination.

[Use Multicast Discovery] Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are flowing on the network.

How do I restart the machine after configuring printing protocols and WSD functions?

5. Restart the machine.

How do I select LPD, RAW, and WSD settings from the operation panel?

• LPD, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.

How do I set up WSD network devices?

• The WSD network devices can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions.

How do I change the port number?

• The same port number used for the machine and a computer must be used for printing protocol.

How do I configure printer ports?

Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an incorrect port number or port type may have been specified. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the document data cannot reach the machine. To fix this type of problem, configure the printer port settings on the computer.

• To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

1. Open the printer folder.
2. Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3. Click the [Ports] tab and configure the required settings.

How do I add a port?

If you have changed the IP address of the machine or you have selected an incorrect port while installing drivers from the Windows printer folder, add a new port. There are two types of port: “MFNP Port” and “Standard TCP/IP Port.” Select the port type according to your environment.

MFNP Port (only for IPv4 environment) This is a port that allows the IP address of the machine to be detected automatically. Even if the IP address of the machine is changed, the connection is maintained, provided that the machine and the computer are in the same subnet. You do not need to add a new port every time the IP address is changed. If you are using the machine in an IPv4 environment, you should normally select this type of port.

• You can add an MFNP port only when you installed the driver from the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, or when you downloaded and installed the printer driver or the fax driver from the Canon website.

Standard TCP/IP Port This is a standard Windows port. When you use this type of port, you need to add a new port every time that the IP address of the machine is changed. Select this type of port when you are using the machine in an IPv6 environment and when you cannot add an MFNP port.

How do I add an MFNP port?

1. Click [Add Port].
2. Select [Canon MFNP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3. Select [Auto Detect] and select the machine when it is detected, and then click [Next].
4. Click [Add] [Finish].
5. Click [Close].

If the machine is not detected:

• Click [Refresh]. If the problem persists, select [IP address] or [MAC address], enter the IP address or MAC address of the machine and then click [Next].

How do I add a standard TCP/IP port?

1. Click [Add Port].
2. Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3. Click [Next].
4. Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the machine, and click [Next].

• The [Port Name] is entered automatically. If necessary, you can change it.
• When the next screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the screen.
• When you select the [Device Type], select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Standard].

5. Click [Finish].
6. Click [Close].

How do I change the port type or number?

If the printing protocol (LPD or RAW) has been changed on the machine side or the port number has been changed, the corresponding settings on the computer must also be configured. This operation is not needed for WSD ports.

How do I change the MFNP port?

1. Click [Configure Port].
2. Under [Protocol Type], select [RAW] or [LPR], and change the [Port Number].
3. Click [OK].

How do I change the standard TCP/IP port?

1. Click [Configure Port].
2. Under [Protocol], select [Raw] or [LPR].

• If you selected [Raw], change the [Port Number].
• If you selected [LPR], enter “lp” in [Queue Name].

3. Click [OK].
4. Click [Close].

How do I set up a print server?

With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also makes it possible to install the drivers on each computer over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers on each computer by using the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server, configure the settings for sharing the printer.

• To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
• You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.
• When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.
• “Canon Driver Information Assist Service” must be added during the printer driver installation to carry out Department ID Management when using a print server.

1. Open the printer folder.
2. Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3. Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the machine.

• Click the [Change Sharing Options] button if displayed.

4. Install additional drivers as necessary.

• This operation is required if you want to install the drivers in other computers running a different bit architecture via the print server.

5. Click [OK].

How do I install additional drivers?

1. Click [Additional Drivers].
2. Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].

• Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.

3. Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder that contains the drivers, and then click [OK].
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to install additional drivers.

Print Server

Print Server	Select the check box for:
32-bit operating systems	[x64]
64-bit operating systems	[x86] under [Processor]

• If you do not know whether your Windows operating system is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see “Checking the Bit Architecture”.
• If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] [us_eng] [x64] [Driver] folders on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
• If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] [us_eng] [32BIT] [Driver] folders on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.

How do I install the drivers on a computer via the print server?

1. Locate the shared printer in the print server.
2. Double-click the shared printer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.

How do you configure Ethernet settings?

Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set the communication mode and the Ethernet type. In general, the machine can be used without changing the defaults, but you can change these settings to suit your network environment.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3. Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
4. Select whether to configure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.
   • If auto-detection is enabled, the machine detects and automatically sets the Ethernet communication mode and the type that can be used.

To configure Ethernet settings automatically:

1. Select <On> in <Auto Detect>.

To configure Ethernet settings manually:

1. Select <Off> in <Auto Detect>.
2. <Communication Mode>: select the communication mode.
   • <Half Duplex> Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a networking device using half duplex.
   • <Full Duplex> Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.
3. <Ethernet Type>: select the Ethernet type.
4. Select <Apply>.
5. Select <OK>.
6. Restart the machine.

How do you change the maximum transmission unit (MTU)?

In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3. Select <TCP/IP Settings> <MTU Size>.
4. Select the MTU.
5. Select <OK>.
6. Restart the machine.

How do you set a wait time for connecting to a network?

When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to define the role of each switch port. However, communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the network.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3. Select <Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>.
4. Enter the waiting time required to start communication with the network, and select <Apply>.

How do you configure DNS?

DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP address. Configure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for configuring DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Click [Network Settings].
4. Configure DNS settings.

To configure IPv4 DNS:

1. Select [IPv4 Settings] [Edit].
2. Configure IPv4 DNS settings.

What are the DHCP option settings for IPv4?

• [Acquire Host Name] Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.
• [DNS Dynamic Update] Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP server.
• [Acquire DNS Server Address] Select the check box to enable Option 6 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
• [Acquire Domain Name] Select the check box to enable Option 15 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
• [Acquire WINS Server Address] Select the check box to enable Option 44 to obtain a WINS server address from the DHCP server.
• [Acquire SMTP Server Address] Select the check box to enable Option 69 to obtain an SMTP server address from the DHCP server.
• [Acquire POP Server Address] Select the check box to enable Option 70 to obtain a POP3 server address from the DHCP server.

What are the DNS settings for IPv4?

• [Primary DNS Server Address] Enter the IP address of a DNS server.
• [Secondary DNS Server Address] Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.
• [Host Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS server.
• [Domain Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as “example.com.”
• [DNS Dynamic Update] Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine’s IP address is changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic Update Interval] text box.

What are the mDNS settings for IPv4?

• [Use mDNS] Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.

To configure IPv6 DNS:

1. Select [IPv6 Settings] [Edit].
2. Configure IPv6 DNS settings.
   • The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to configure the settings.

What are the DHCP option settings for IPv6?

• [Acquire DNS Server Address] Select the check box to enable Option 23 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
• [Acquire Domain Name] Select the check box to enable Option 24 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.

What are the DNS settings for IPv6?

• [Primary DNS Server Address] Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with “ff” (or multicast address) cannot be entered.
• [Secondary DNS Server Address] Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with “ff” (or multicast address) cannot be entered.
• [Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4] Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
• [Host Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS server.
• [Domain Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as “example.com.”
• [DNS Dynamic Update] Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine’s IP address is changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic Update Interval] text box.

What are the mDNS settings for IPv6?

• [Use mDNS] Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.
• [Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4] Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.

After configuring DNS settings for IPv4 or IPv6:

1. Click [OK].
2. Restart the machine.

How do you configure SMB?

Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as files and printers, with more than one device in a network. The machine uses SMB to store scanned documents into a shared folder. Depending on your network, you may have to set the NetBIOS name and workgroup name.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [SMB Settings].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Specify the required settings.
   • [NetBIOS Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for the NetBIOS name of the machine.
   • [Workgroup Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the workgroup that the machine belongs to.
     • NetBIOS names or workgroup names that start with an asterisk (*) cannot be registered to a WINS server.
6. Click [OK].
7. Restart the machine.

What is a NetBIOS Name?

In a Windows network that uses NetBIOS, NetBIOS names are used for identifying network-connected computers as well as for file sharing and other network services. Most computers use the computer name as the NetBIOS name.

What is a Workgroup Name?

Workgroup name is a name for grouping multiple computers so that basic network functions, such as file sharing, become available in a Windows network. Specify the workgroup name to identify the group that the machine belongs to.

How do you configure WINS?

Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that associates a NetBIOS name (a computer or printer name in an SMB network) with an IP address. To enable WINS, the WINS server must be specified.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [WINS Settings].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, and specify the required settings.
   • [WINS Resolution] Select the check box to use WINS for name resolution. When not using WINS, clear the check box.
   • [WINS Server Address] Enter the IP address of the WINS server.
     • If the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address overrides the IP address entered in the [WINS Server Address] text box.
6. Click [OK].
7. Restart the machine.

How do you register LDAP servers?

If an LDAP server is implemented in the network, you can search the server for fax numbers or e-mail addresses, and then specify them as destinations or register them in the Address Book. Note also that if send function authentication is enabled, you must register the server used for authentication. You can register a maximum of five LDAP servers each for searching and for authentication to the machine. Register LDAP servers via the Remote UI.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Click [LDAP Server Settings].
4. Click [Register New Server] for [LDAP Server (For Search)] or [LDAP Server (For Authentication)].
   • LDAP server registration needs to be performed separately either for searching or for authentication. To use an LDAP server for searching for fax and e-mail destinations, register it for searching, and to use it for authenticating the sending of e-mail or faxes, register it for authenticating.
5. Register the LDAP server.

To edit registered server information:

• Click a text link under [Server Name] for the edit screen.

To delete registered server information:

• Click [Delete] on the right of the server name you want to delete click [OK].

To register the server used for searches: Register the server for searching for fax or e-mail destinations.

What do you enter for the settings when registering a server used for searches?

• [Server Name] Enter the name to be assigned to the LDAP server.
• [Server Address] Enter the IP address of the LDAP server or enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the server (example: ldap.example.com).
• [Position to Start Search] Specify the node in the directory information tree (DIT) that you want to start the search from. Leaving the text box blank sets the machine to start the search from an arbitrary node selected automatically.
  • When specifying the node, enter “DC=,” followed by a host name (a dot-delimited character string in the Active Directory domain name), and separate each of the entries with a comma. If the domain name is “john.example.com,” for example, enter “DC=john,DC=example,DC=com.”
• [Use TLS] Select the check box to encrypt communication with the LDAP server using TLS.
  • This is enabled only when [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected in [Login Information].
• [Port Number] Enter the port number used for communicating with the LDAP server.
• [Search Timeout] Specify how long the machine searches.
• [Login Information] Select [Do Not Use], [Use], or [Use (Security Authentication)] depending on the type of authentication implemented by the LDAP server. When [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected, the user name and password must be specified.
  • [Do Not Use] Select not to authenticate the machine using the login information.
  • [Use] Select to authenticate the machine using the login information.
  • [Use (Security Authentication)] Select to use data obtained by Kerberos, a network authentication protocol, for the authentication password. If this setting is selected, the clock of the machine needs to be synchronized with that of the LDAP server.
• [Display Authentication Screen When Searching] Select the check box to require the user to enter the user name and password when a search is requested. If the [Use Same Authentication Information as When Send Operation Started] check box is selected, the user name and password used for authentication when sending faxes or scans are also used here. If the check box is cleared, authentication is carried out using the information entered in [User Name] and [Password].
• [Use Same Authentication Information as When Send Operation Started] Set whether the authentication information when the fax or scan function was used is also used when searching. This check box is normally displayed selected; however, it is only valid when the [Display Authentication Screen When Searching] check box is selected.
• [User Name] Enter the user name of the machine that was registered to the LDAP server.
  • When [Use] is selected for [Login Information], enter the user name in the form “(domain name)\(user name)” (example: domain1\user1).
  • When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected, enter the user name only (example: user1).
• [Set/Change Password] To specify or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in the [Password] text box.
• [Domain Name] When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter alphanumeric characters for the directory tree name in Active Directory (example: example.com).
• [Confirm TLS Certificate for LDAP Server Access] Select the check box to verify the certificate when encrypting communication with the LDAP server using TLS. Also, select the [Add CN to Verification Items] check box as necessary.

To register the authentication server: If the use of the fax and scan functions is restricted, register the server used for authentication.

What do you enter for the settings when registering an authentication server?

• [Server Name] Enter the name to be assigned to the LDAP server.
• [Server Address] Enter the IP address of the LDAP server or enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the server (example: ldap.example.com).
• [Position to Start Search] Specify the node in the directory information tree (DIT) that you want to start the search from. Leaving the text box blank sets the machine to start the search from an arbitrary node selected automatically.
  • When specifying the node, enter “DC=,” followed by a host name (a dot-delimited character string in the Active Directory domain name), and separate each of the entries with a comma. If the domain name is “john.example.com,” for example, enter “DC=john,DC=example,DC=com.”
• [Use TLS] Select the check box to encrypt communication with the LDAP server using TLS.
  • This is enabled only when [Use] is selected in [Login Information].
• [Port Number] Enter the port number used for communicating with the LDAP server.
• [Authentication/Attribute Acquisition Timeout] Specify how long authentication and attribute acquisition can continue.
• [User Name Attribute] Enter the attribute name, to be compared with a user name entered during authentication, consisting of alphanumeric characters (Example: “sAMAccountName”).
  • Not required if [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected in [Login Information].
• [E-Mail Address Attribute] Enter the attribute name, to be used for obtaining an e-mail address from the authentication server, consisting of alphanumeric characters (Example: “mail”).
• [Login Information] Select [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] depending on the type of authentication implemented by the LDAP server.
  • [Use] Select to authenticate the machine using the System Manager ID.
  • [Use (Security Authentication)] Select to use data obtained by Kerberos, a network authentication protocol, for the authentication password. If this setting is selected, the clock of the machine needs to be synchronized with that of the LDAP server.
• [Use System Manager ID] If [Use] is selected in [Login Information], this specifies whether authentication using the system manager ID is used. To use the system manager ID, select the check box and specify the user name and password used for authentication. If you deselect the check box, logins are anonymous (no user name).
• [User Name] Enter the user name of the machine that was registered to the LDAP server in the form “(domain name)\(user name)” (example: domain1\user1).
• [Set/Change Password] To specify or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in the [Password] text box.
• [Domain Name] When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter alphanumeric characters for the directory tree name in Active Directory (example: example.com).
• [Confirm TLS Certificate for LDAP Server Access] Select the check box to verify the certificate when encrypting communication with the LDAP server using TLS. Also, select the [Add CN to Verification Items] check box as necessary.

After registering the authentication server:

1. Click [OK].

How do you monitor and control the machine with SNMP?

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI. You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your network environment and the purpose of use.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Specify SNMPv1 settings.
   • If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.
   • [Use SNMPv1] Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box is selected.
   • [Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2] Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear the check box.
   • [Community Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.
   • [MIB Access Permission] For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
     • [Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
     • [Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
   • [Use Dedicated Community] Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software, such as imageWARE Enterprise Management Console. Select the check box to use Dedicated Community, and specify [MIB Access Permission]. If you do not need to use Dedicated Community, clear the check box.
6. Specify SNMPv3 settings.
   • If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.

What is SNMPv1?

SNMPv1 uses information called “community” to define the scope of SNMP communication. Because this information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.

What is SNMPv3?

With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features. Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before configuring SNMPv3.

If you select [Use SNMPv3], what settings can you specify?

If you select the [Use SNMPv3] check box, you can enable SNMPv3 and specify SNMPv3 settings.

How do you enable/disable user settings?

Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings, clear the corresponding check box.

What characters can be used to enter a username?

Alphanumeric characters.

What are the options for MIB Access Permission?

Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

What does selecting [Read/Write] permit?

Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.

What does selecting [Read Only] permit?

Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

What are the options for Security Settings?

[Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/ Encryption Off].

When do you select the Authentication Algorithm?

If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] in [Security Settings], select the appropriate authentication algorithm for your network environment.

When do you select the Encryption Algorithm?

If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] in [Security Settings], select the appropriate encryption algorithm for your network environment.

How do you set or change a password?

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For confirmation, enter the same password in the [Confirm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.

What is SNMP used for?

With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.

How do you enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP?

Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP. To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.

What happens if SNMPv1 is disabled?

If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine information via the printer driver.

How do you enable or disable the SNMP settings?

You can enable or disable the SNMP settings from <Menu>. <SNMP Settings>.

What is the recommendation when enabling both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3?

If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to [Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.

What is PASV?

PASV is an FTP communication mode used for file transfer. To connect to an FTP server through a firewall, you must use PASV mode. First check that the PASV mode is set on the FTP server.

What determines whether or not to use PASV mode for FTP?

Whether PASV mode is used for FTP depends on your network environment and the settings on the FTP server to which data is being sent.

What is SNTP?

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the network. If SNTP is used, the time server is checked at the specified intervals; therefore, the correct time can always be maintained.

What time is the clock adjusted to when using SNTP?

The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before configuring SNTP.

How are SNTP settings specified?

SNTP settings can be specified via the Remote UI.

What SNTP servers are supported?

The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.

How do you configure the SNTP settings?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [SNTP Settings].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.
6. Click [OK].
7. Restart the machine.

What does selecting the [Use SNTP] checkbox do?

Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.

What should be entered for [NTP Server Name]?

Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host name (or FQDN) consisting of alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).

What should be specified for [Polling Interval]?

Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.

How do you test communication with the NTP/SNTP server?

You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings]. If a proper connection has been established, the result is displayed. Note that this operation does not adjust the system clock.

How can you facilitate the collection and management of various information about networked devices?

You can facilitate the collection and management of various information about networked devices by implementing device management software, such as imageWARE Enterprise Management Console*, into the network. Information such as device settings and error logs is retrieved and distributed via the server computer. If the machine is connected to such a network, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console searches the network for the machine by using protocols such as Service Location Protocol (SLP) to gather information from the machine, such as power supply status information. SLP settings can be specified via the Remote UI. This section also describes the procedure to configure settings for communication between the machine and plug-ins for imageWARE Enterprise Management Console.

What are the requirements to use imageWARE Enterprise Management Console plug-ins?

• You need to enable the settings of the dedicated port and the SNMP settings. As for the SNMP settings, set [MIB Access Permission] to [Read/Write] for both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3.

How do you configure SLP Communication with Device Management Software?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Click [Network Settings].
4. Specify SLP settings.

How do you specify multicast device discovery?

1. Select [Multicast Discovery Settings] [Edit].
2. Select the [Respond to Discovery] check box and specify the required settings.
3. Click [OK].

What does selecting the [Respond to Discovery] checkbox do?

Select the check box to set the machine to respond to device management software multicast discovery packets and enable monitoring by device management software.

What should be entered for [Scope Name]?

To include the machine into a specific scope, enter alphanumeric characters for the scope name.

How do you notify a device management software of the power status of the machine?

1. Select [Sleep Mode Notification Settings] [Edit].
2. Select the [Notify] check box and specify the required settings.
3. Click [OK].

What does selecting the [Notify] checkbox do?

Select the check box to notify a device management software of the power status of the machine. When [Notify] is selected, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep mode and reduce the total power consumption.

What should be changed for [Port Number]?

Change the port number for this function according to the network environment.

What should be specified for [Number of Routers to Traverse]?

Specify how many routers the notification packets can pass through.

What should be specified for [Notification Interval]?

Specify how often the machine notifies a device management software of its power status.

How do you configure Settings for Communication between the Machine and Plug-ins?

You can specify the settings to enable communication between the machine and imageWARE Enterprise Management Console plug-ins. Use of plug-ins allows you to manage the machine’s settings from imageWARE Enterprise Management Console.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Device Settings Management> <On>

What preparations should be made before installing drivers and associated software?

1. Install the optional devices on the main unit in advance.
2. If the machine is supplied with a CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, insert the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
3. You can download drivers and software you are going to use from the Canon website (https://global.canon).

What should you do when new versions of drivers and software become available?

When new versions of drivers and software become available, they will be uploaded to the Canon website. You can download them as necessary after checking their system requirements.

How do you proceed with the installation of drivers and associated software?

For more information about the installation procedure, see the manuals for the drivers and software you are going to use.

When is the installation of drivers impossible?

Installation of drivers is impossible if sending and receiving of the IP address are not permitted in [Firewall Settings].

What happens if sending and receiving of the IP address of the computer on which drivers are installed become disabled by [Firewall Settings]?

It is no longer possible to perform printing or send faxes from that computer.

What steps should be followed to configure initial settings for Fax Functions?

Follow steps 1 to 4 described below to configure the fax settings. First, determine which receive mode best suits your intended use, and then follow the on-screen instructions to configure the settings.

What are the steps to configure initial settings for Fax Functions?

Step 1 Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use

Step 2 Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name

Step 3 Selecting the Receive Mode

Step 4 Connecting the Telephone Line

What are the Receive Modes and their intended use?

Intended use	Receive mode
Use fax only/Never use telephone	<Auto> This setting is for when you want to use the machine exclusively for receiving faxes, and you do not want to use the telephone.
Mostly use telephone/Almost never use fax	<Manual> Connect your telephone to the machine. This setting is for when you mostly want to use the telephone. You can receive incoming faxes manually.
Use both fax and telephone Use answering machine	<Answering Machine> Connect your answering machine. Callers can record a message if they call while you are away from the telephone. The machine automatically receives incoming faxes.
Use standard telephone	<Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)> Connect your telephone. The machine automatically receives incoming faxes, and the telephone rings for incoming calls.
If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service	<DRPD> is also available for the receiving mode.

How do you register the fax number and unit name of your machine?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Function Settings> <Common> <Fax Setup Guide>.
3. Select <Set Up Now>.
4. Select <Next>.
5. Enter the fax number, and select <Apply>.
6. Select <Next>.
7. Enter the unit name (such as a user name or company name), and select <Apply>.

How do you select the receive mode?

1. Select <Next>.
2. Select the receive mode.
   • Select <Yes> or <No> to select the receive mode for the operations you intend to carry out.
   • If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone company, <DRPD> is also available for the receiving mode.

How do you set the receive mode to <Auto>?

Select <No>.

How do you set the receive mode to <Answering Machine>?

Select <Yes> <Yes>.

How do you set the receive mode to <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>?

Select <Yes> <No> <Yes>.

How do you set the receive mode to <Manual>?

Select <Yes> <No> <No>.

How do you connect the telephone line to the machine?

1. Connect the telephone line to the machine.
   • Connect the included telephone cable to the telephone line jack on the machine ( ) and the telephone line jack on the wall.
   • If you are using a telephone or answering machine, connect it to the external telephone jack ( ).
   • If you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set up the telephone to receive faxes manually.
2. Select <End> after the telephone line has been connected.
3. Select <Yes>.

What do you do if the machine does not automatically set the type of telephone line?

Follow the procedure below to set the type of telephone line. If you are not sure of the type of phone line you are using, contact your local telephone company.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Set Line> <Select Line Type> Select the type of telephone line

What do you need to do to send scanned originals directly by e-mail or I-Fax or save them to shared folders or FTP server?

To send scanned originals directly by e-mail or I-Fax or save them to shared folders or FTP server, you need to configure the network. The Send Function Setting Tool, an application that is included with the machine, will assist you with the required setup. Set the necessary configuration depending on your purpose and network environment.

What is the procedure for setting to send e-mail/send and receive I-Fax?

Before configuring the machine for scanning to e-mail, check the setup flow shown below. Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected. Make sure that you have the following information:

• The IP address of the machine.
• An e-mail address to be registered as a destination.
• Information about the e-mail server, including the SMTP server name, port numbers, whether authentication is required, and the user name and password for authentication.

Make sure that the computer meets the system requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool (sending e-mail).

• Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.

Set the machine configuration.

• Configuring Basic E-Mail Settings
• Configuring I-Fax Receiving Settings
• Configuring Detailed E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings (Authentication, Encryption, etc.)

To use the machine as a scanner, what must be done?

To use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of software to a computer. In Windows, when connecting this machine to a computer via a wireless or wired LAN, you need to register this machine in “MF Network Scanner Selector” using the following procedure. This procedure is not required if the machine and your computer are connected via USB.

What is the procedure for registering the machine in “MF Network Scanner Selector”?

1. Click in the system tray.
2. Select the check box for the machine, and click [OK].

How do you configure Basic E-Mail settings?

1. Start the Send Function Setting Tool.

   • Using a Web browser: Enter “http://<the IP address of the machine>/sendsupport_login.html” in the address field of a Web browser, and press the [ENTER] key.
   • Using the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM:
     1. Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
     2. Click [Start Software Programs].
     3. Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].
     4. Click [Next].
     5. Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].
     6. Confirm the settings and click [OK].

2. Click [Start].

   • If the login screen is displayed, enter the appropriate ID and PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and then click [Logon].

3. Click [Send to E-mail Settings].

   • If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book, and click [OK].

4. Specify the required settings.

5. Click [Next].

6. Confirm the settings and click [Register].

7. Restart the machine.

What are the settings for [Registration]?

[Favorites Number]

[Name for Favorites Number]

What does [Favorites Number] do?

With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register an e-mail address into <Favorites> in the Address Book. Select a number from the drop-down list.

What does [Name for Favorites Number] do?

Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in the Address Book.

What are the [Send Destination Settings]?

[Destination E-mail Address]

What should be entered for [Destination E-mail Address]?

Enter the e-mail address that you want to send your scanned originals to.

What are the [SMTP Server Settings]?

[SMTP Server]

[SMTP Authentication]

What should be entered for [SMTP Server]?

Enter the SMTP server name.

What should be selected for [SMTP Authentication]?

Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the authentication settings of the SMTP server. When [Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [User Name] text box and password in the [Password] text box.

What are the Authentication methods for sending e-mails?

To prevent e-mail transmissions by unauthorized users, the machine supports SMTP authentication (SMTP AUTH) and POP before SMTP.

How is POP before SMTP authentication configured?

POP before SMTP authentication can only be configured by using the Remote UI.

What additional settings may be required depending on the network you are using?

• To enable TLS for e-mailing, see Configuring E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings.
• To change port numbers, see Changing Port Numbers.

How do you configure E-Mail/I-Fax Communication Settings?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [TX Settings] [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Specify the required settings.

What should be entered for [SMTP Server]?

Enter alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name (or IP address) for sending e-mail and I-Faxes.

What should be entered for [E-Mail Address]?

Enter alphanumeric characters for the e-mail address that you want to use for the machine.

What should be entered for [POP Server]?

Enter alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name or IP address for sending e-mail and I-Faxes.

What should be entered for [User Name]?

Enter alphanumeric characters as the user name for the specified e-mail account when a POP3 server is used.

How do you set or change a password when a POP3 server is used?

To set or change the password when a POP3 server is used, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in [Password].

How do you specify settings required for I-Fax reception?

[POP RX]

[POP Interval]

What does selecting the [POP RX] checkbox do?

Select the check box to receive I-Faxes.

What does [POP Interval] do?

This sets the interval (in minutes) used for automatically connecting to the POP3 server. If there are any I-Fax documents on the server, they are automatically received and printed.

How do you disable automatic reception?

Set [POP Interval] to . When \ is set, you receive I-Faxes manually.

How does POP before SMTP authentication work?

POP before SMTP authentication prevents unauthorized users from using e-mail and I-Faxes by performing user authentication on the POP3 server.

What should be selected for [Use POP Authentication Before Sending]?

To use the POP3 server for authentication before you send e-mail or I-Faxes, select the check box.

What does selecting [Use APOP Authentication] do?

Select the check box to use APOP to encrypt the password during the authentication process.

How does SMTP authentication work?

If you configure SMTP authentication (SMTP AUTH), user identification by user name and password is performed at the time of sending e-mail or I-Fax.

To enable authentication on the SMTP server, what should I do?

To enable authentication on the SMTP server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in the [User Name] text box.

How do I specify or change the password?

To specify or change the password, enter alphanumeric characters in the [Password] text box.

How can I configure encryption of communication with an SMTP or POP3 server?

You can configure encryption of communication with an SMTP or POP3 server by using TLS.

How do I use TLS for encrypting communication with the SMTP server?

Select the check box for [Use TLS for SMTP]. Select the check box for [Verify Certificate] or [Add CN to Verification Items] depending on your needs.

How do I use TLS to encrypt communication with the POP3 server?

Select the check box to encrypt communication with the POP3 server using TLS. Select the [Verify Certificate] and [Add CN to Verification Items] check boxes as required.

After configuring encrypted communication, what is the next step?

Click [OK].

After clicking [OK], what is the next step?

Restart the machine.

What should I do if I need to change the SMTP or POP3 port setting?

Contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

What should I do before configuring the machine for scanning to shared folders?

Before configuring the machine for scanning to shared folders, check the setup flow:

• Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.
• Make sure that you have the following information:

What information do I need to configure the machine for scanning to shared folders?

• The IP address of the machine.
• The name of the computer where the shared folder is located.
• Path to and the name of the shared folder (If access restrictions are set to the folder, the user name and password information is also needed).
• For instructions on how to create a new shared folder, see “Send Setting Guide.”

What should I make sure of before configuring the machine for scanning to shared folders?

Make sure that the computer meets the system requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool. Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.

How do I set the machine configuration?

Set the machine configuration by setting a shared folder as a save location.

What is “Scan to SMB”?

The feature of scanning to shared folders is also called “Scan to SMB” because the feature uses Server Message Block (SMB), a Windows-specific technology. SMB is a protocol for sharing resources, such as files and printers, with more than one device in a network.

How do I configure the machine for saving my scanned documents into a shared folder in the network via SMB?

To configure the machine for saving your scanned documents into a shared folder in the network via SMB, specify the location of the shared folder from a computer in advance. This section describes how to specify the save location by using the Send Function Setting Tool.

How else can I specify the location of the shared folder as save destination?

You can also use the Remote UI to specify the location of the shared folder as save destination by registering the folder to the Address Book.

How do I start the Send Function Setting Tool using a web browser?

Enter “http://<the IP address of the machine>/sendsupport_login.html” in the address field of a Web browser, and press the [ENTER] key.

How do I start the Send Function Setting Tool using the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM?

1. Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
2. Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
3. Click [Start Software Programs].
4. Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].
5. Click [Next].

If the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen is not displayed, what should I do?

See Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen.

If [AutoPlay] is displayed, what should I do?

Click [Run MInst.exe].

If I want to view “Send Setting Guide”, what should I do?

Click [How to Set].

If the screen that cancels the Windows firewall is displayed, what should I do?

Click [Yes].

After starting the Send Function Setting Tool, what is the next step?

Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].

If the machine is not displayed in [Device List], what should I do?

• Click [Search Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the machine, and then click [OK].

After selecting the machine from [Device List], what is the next step?

Confirm the settings and click [OK].

After confirming the settings, what is the next step?

Click [Start].

If the login screen is displayed, what should I do?

Enter the appropriate ID and PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and then click [Logon].

After clicking [Start], what is the next step?

Click [Store to Shared Folder Settings].

If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, what should I do?

Enter the PIN for the Address Book, and click [OK].

After clicking [Store to Shared Folder Settings], what is the next step?

Specify the required settings.

How do I register a shared folder for saving scanned documents into <Favorites> in the Address Book using the Send Function Setting Tool ?

Select a number from the drop-down list in the [Favorites Number] field.

What should I enter in the [Name for Favorites Number] text box?

Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in the Address Book.

What is displayed in the [Protocol] field?

The protocol that is used for sending scanned documents to a shared folder is displayed.

What should I enter in the [Computer Name of Store Destination] text box?

Enter the name or the IP address of the computer where the shared folder is located.

What should I enter in the [Shared Folder Name on Store Destination Computer] text box?

Enter the name of (or path to) the shared folder. For example, if the shared folder is a subfolder named “share” and is contained in the [Public] folder in drive C (path: C:\users\public\share), enter “users\public\share.”

How do I set the access restrictions for the shared folder?

Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the access restrictions set to the shared folder. When [Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [Registered User Name] text box and password in the [Password to Access] text box.

After specifying the required settings, what is the next step?

Click [Next].

After clicking [Next], what is the next step?

Confirm the settings and click [Register].

After clicking [Register], what is the next step?

Restart the machine.

What should I do before configuring the machine for scanning to FTP Server?

Check the setup flow:

• Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.
• Make sure that you have the following information:

What information do I need to configure the machine for scanning to FTP Server?

• The IP address of the machine.
• FTP server name.
• Path to the FTP server and folder name.
• User name, password (only if set).

Who should I contact if the path, folder name, user name, password, etc. for the FTP server are unknown?

Contact your Network Administrator.

How do I change the FTP port number?

See Changing Port Numbers.

When do I need to use PASV mode?

If a firewall is installed between the machine and the FTP server, you must set PASV mode.

What should I make sure of before configuring the machine for scanning to FTP Server?

Make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.

How do I register the FTP server address?

See Registering Destinations from Remote UI.

What does the “Parts and Their Functions” section describe?

This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys on the operation panel and how to view the display. Read this section for tips on how to use the machine properly.

How do I automatically feed originals into the machine for scanning?

Use the feeder. When two or more sheets of original are loaded in the feeder, originals can be scanned continuously.

What is the purpose of the platen glass cover?

It secures the originals placed on the platen glass.

What can I connect to the USB port for USB device connection?

Use this port to connect a third-party USB memory device or USB keyboard. Connecting a USB memory device allows you to print data from the memory device or store scanned originals on the memory device.

When should I open the paper stopper?

Open the paper stopper when you want to prevent paper from falling out of the output tray.

What is the purpose of the speaker?

It emits sounds produced by the machine, such as fax tones and warning tones.

When should I hold the lift handles?

Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine.

What does the operation panel consist of?

The operation panel consists of keys such as Home key, Stop key, a display, and status indicators.

What can I do from the operation panel?

You can perform all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel.

Where is printed paper output to?

Printed paper is output to the output tray.

What is the purpose of the power switch?

It turns the power ON or OFF.

How do I restart the machine?

To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.

When should I open the front cover?

Open the front cover when replacing toner cartridges.

What type of paper should I load into the paper drawer?

Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer.

When should I load paper into the multi-purpose tray?

Load the paper into the multi-purpose tray when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from that which is loaded in the paper drawer.

What should I do when scanning books, originals of heavy or thin paper and other originals that cannot be scanned using the feeder?

Place them on the platen glass.

What is the purpose of the ventilation slots?

Air inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine.

What should I avoid doing with the ventilation slots?

Note that placing objects in front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.

When should I open the rear cover?

Open the rear cover when clearing paper jams.

What does the rating label show?

The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine.

What should I connect to the power socket?

Connect the power cord.

What can I connect to the USB port for USB device connection?

Use this port to connect devices such as a third-party USB keyboard.

When should I connect a USB cable to the USB port for computer connection?

Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.

When should I connect a LAN cable to the LAN port?

Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc.

What should I connect to the external telephone jack (MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF644Cdw)?

Connect your telephone or answering machine.

When should I connect a telephone cable to the telephone line jack (MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF644Cdw)?

Connect a telephone cable when connecting the machine to a telephone line.

Where should I install the toner cartridges?

Install the toner cartridges in the toner cartridge tray. Load the Y (yellow), M (magenta), C (cyan), and K (black) toner cartridges in the slots from the rear to the front respectively.

When should I open the feeder cover?

Open when clearing paper jams.

How do I adjust the slide guides?

Adjust these guides to match the width of the original.

What is the function of the original supply tray?

It automatically feeds originals into the machine for scanning. When two or more sheets of original are loaded in the feeder, originals can be scanned continuously.

Where are scanned originals output to?

Scanned originals are output to the original output tray.

What should I avoid doing with the original output area?

Do not place any objects in the original output area. Doing so may cause damage to the originals.

How do I obtain proper print results?

Regularly clean the feeder and platen glass.

How do I adjust the paper guides?

Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the machine.

How do I release the lock on the paper guides for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

Press the lock release lever that is indicated with an arrow in the illustration to release the lock and slide the paper guides.

When should I pull out the paper tray?

Pull out the paper tray when loading paper.

What does the “Basic Operations” section describe?

This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.

What does the “Turning ON the Machine” section describe?

This section describes how to turn the machine ON and OFF.

What does the “Using the Operation Panel” section describe?

This section describes how to use the display for tasks such as selecting items and adjusting settings. Also, it describes how to enter characters and numbers.

What does the “Logging in to the Machine” section describe?

This section describes how to log in when a login screen is displayed.

What does the “Placing Originals” section describe?

This section describes how to place originals on the platen glass and in the feeder.

What does the “Loading Paper” section describe?

This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray.

What does the “Customizing the Display” section describe?

This section describes how to rearrange buttons or create shortcut buttons in order to make it easier to use screens shown in the display.

What does the “Changing the Default Settings for Functions” section describe?

This section describes how to change the setting that is displayed initially when a function is selected.

What does the “Setting Sounds” section describe?

This section describes how to adjust the volume of various machine sounds, such as those produced when fax sending is complete or when an error occurs.

What does the “Entering Sleep Mode” section describe?

This section describes how to set the sleep mode.

What does the “Registering Destinations” section describe?

This section describes how to register destinations for sending faxes or scanned documents.

What does the “Using a USB Memory Device” section describe?

This section describes the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove the USB memory device.

How do you adjust the paper guides to ensure that paper is fed straight into the machine?

Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the machine. Press the lock release levers that are indicated with arrows in the illustrations to release the locks and slide the paper guides.

When loading Legal size paper, what do you need to do to the paper drawer?

When loading Legal size paper, the paper drawer needs to be extended. Press the lock release lever to release the lock and extend the length of the paper drawer.

What should you do when the extended paper drawer is inserted, and its front side is not flush with the machine?

Place the legal dust cover over the open part of the paper drawer.

What can you do to adjust the angle of the operation panel?

The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted to an angle that is most comfortable for viewing the panel.

What can you view on the display?

You can view the progress of the machine and error statuses. The display is also a touch panel, so you can specify settings by touching the screen directly.

What does the Sound Volume key do?

Press to adjust volume.

What does the Energy Saver key do?

Press to put the machine into the sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in the sleep mode. Press the key again to exit sleep mode.

What does the Data indicator do?

Blinks while an operation is being performed, such as data transmission or printing. Lights up when there are documents waiting to be processed.

What does the Error indicator do?

Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.

What does the Home key do?

Press to display the Home screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as copy and scan.

What does the Stop key do?

Press to cancel printing and other operations.

What is the NFC (Near Field Communication) mark used for (MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw)?

You can also use functions such as printing by waving a mobile device with Canon PRINT Business installed over this mark.

How do you adjust the angle of the operation panel when it is difficult to view the touch panel display?

Adjust the angle of the operation panel.

How do you turn ON the machine?

1. Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into a power outlet.
2. Press the power switch.

What screen appears after the machine is turned ON?

The Start screen appears.

Can you select the screen that is displayed first after the machine is turned ON?

Yes, you can select the screen.

How do you turn OFF the machine?

Press the power switch.

How long should you wait to unplug the power cord after turning OFF the machine?

Do not unplug the power cord until the display turns off.

How long should you wait after the machine is turned OFF to restart the machine?

Wait for at least 10 seconds after the machine is turned OFF.

Can you turn OFF the machine from a computer?

Yes, you can turn OFF the machine from a computer.

Can you specify the time for each day of the week and configure a setting to automatically turn OFF the machine?

Yes, you can specify the time for each day of the week and configure a setting to automatically turn OFF the machine.

How do you turn OFF the machine from a computer on the same network without going to where the machine is installed?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Device Management] [Remote Shutdown].
4. Check [Device Status] to make sure that no functions are being processed, and click [Execute].
5. Click [OK].

How do you restart the machine by remote operation?

You can restart the machine by clicking [Restart Device] on the [Settings/Registration] screen of the Remote UI.

Can you make a setting so that the power is automatically turned OFF at a specified time on each day of the week?

Yes, you can make a setting so that the power is automatically turned OFF at a specified time on each day of the week. This allows you to avoid useless power consumption that may occur due to failure to turn OFF the power. By default, this function is disabled.

How do you set the time for the power to automatically turn OFF at a specified time on each day of the week?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Timer Settings] [Edit].
4. Select the check box for [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer], and set the time to turn OFF the power.
5. Click [OK].

What does selecting the check box for [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer] allow you to do?

Selecting the check box allows you to set the time to turn OFF the power on each day of the week.

What should you do for any day of the week if you want to disable the auto shutdown function?

Leaving the time field blank means that the auto shutdown function is disabled for that day.

What happens if the power is not turned OFF automatically at the specified time?

If the power cannot be turned OFF automatically at the specified time, a retry will be performed up to ten times at intervals of one minute. If the power cannot be turned OFF even after ten retries, auto shutdown will be impossible for that day.

Under what circumstances might the power not be turned OFF automatically at the specified time?

• When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking
• When the menu screen or Check Counter screen is displayed
• When settings data is being imported/exported
• When the firmware is being updated

When might you need to restart the machine to make changes effective?

Depending on the setting items that have been changed, you may need to make the changes effective by restarting the machine.

How do you restart the machine by an operation on the main unit?

1. Press the power switch.
2. Wait at least 10 seconds after the shutdown, then press the power switch again.

What indicates that the machine has shut down?

When the machine shuts down, the display or Energy Saver key of the operation panel turns off.

How do you restart the machine by remote operation?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Click [Restart Device] in the menu on the left side of the screen.
4. Check [Device Status] to make sure that no functions are being processed, and click [Execute].
5. Click [OK].

What happens after you click [OK] to restart the machine by remote operation?

A restart process begins. Communication remains disconnected until the main unit has restarted.

What can you use the display and keys of the operation panel for?

You can use the display and keys of the operation panel to configure machine settings or operate functions.

What does the display show?

The Home screen or settings screen appears on the display, allowing you to initiate functions such as copy and scan. You can also use the display to check information such as error messages and the machine’s operation status. The screen is also a touch panel, so you can perform operations by touching the screen directly.

How can you invert the light and dark parts of the display?

Select [Invert Screen Colors].

How can you adjust the brightness of the display?

Select [Brightness].

What is the Home screen?

The Home screen or settings screen appears on the display, allowing you to initiate functions such as copy and scan. You can also use the display to check information such as error messages and the machine’s operation status.

What does the Home screen allow you to do?

The Home screen allows you to initiate functions such as copy and scan. You can also use the display to check information such as error messages and the machine’s operation status.

What is the function of the display?

The display is a touch panel, so you can perform operations by touching the screen directly.

How can you customize the Home screen?

You can customize the Home screen by rearranging frequently used buttons for easier access to the respective functions.

How can you view the descriptions of functions or how to operate?

On some screens, the <?> button allows you to view the descriptions of functions or how to operate.

When is the Home screen displayed?

The Home screen is displayed when the power is turned ON or by pressing on the operation panel.

What is the purpose of the Home screen?

Use this screen to specify settings for and register functions.

How do you change pages on the Home screen?

Use the Change page button to view another page in the Home screen. You can also flick sideways to change pages.

What does the [Check Counter] button do?

Displays the totals for black and white and color printouts separately.

What does the [Log Out] button do?

Use this button to log out from the machine.

What does the [Status Monitor] button do?

Press to check the printing status, to view the usage history, or to view the network settings such as the IP address of the machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as the remaining amount of paper and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges, or whether any errors that occurred.

When is the Wi-Fi icon displayed?

Displayed when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.

What is displayed under “User name/ID”?

The name or ID of the logged in user is displayed.

What does the [Copy] button do?

Use this button to start copying.

What does the [Fax] button do?

Use this button to send a fax from the machine.

What does the [Scan] button do?

Scans an original and converts it into an electronic file. You can save scanned files on your computer or send them via e-mail.

What does the [Memory Media Print] button do?

Prints files stored in a USB memory device.

What can you do with the Application Library buttons?

You can use these buttons to perform convenient functions by a one-touch operation.

What does the [Secure Print] button do?

Use this function to print a secure document.

What can you do with the [Menu] button?

[Function Settings], [Preferences], and many other machine settings start from this button.

What can you do with the [Address Book] button?

Use this to register or edit the destinations for e-mails and faxes. You can also display a registered destination when sending an e-mail or fax.

What does the [Paper Settings] button do?

This button is used for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray.

What does the [Mobile Portal] button do?

Use this to establish a connection to a mobile device.

What does the [Home Screen Settings] button allow you to do?

Allows you to change the order that Home screen buttons are displayed in.

What does the [Update Firmware] button allow you to do?

Allows you to update the firmware via the Internet.

What does the [ID Card Copy] button do?

Use this function to copy the front and back sides of a driver’s license or other card onto the same side of one sheet of paper.

What does the [Passport Copy] button allow you to do?

Allows you to copy multiple passports onto one sheet.

What does the [Operation Guide] button do?

Press to view operation guidance and error causes/solutions.

What does the [Toner Delivery Settings] button do?

You can configure settings for toner replenishment service. Use of the toner replenishment service requires prior registration with select retailers.

What is the function of the Shortcut buttons?

Display “Favorite Settings” that are registered to Copy, Fax, and Scan.

What happens when you select [Status Monitor]?

When you select [Status Monitor], a screen appears in which you can check the progress of documents as well as the status of the machine and network setting information.

What does the [Error Information/Notification] button display?

Displays the details of any errors that occurred.

What does the [Device Information] button display?

Displays the status of the machine.

What does the [Paper Information] button display?

Displays whether paper is loaded in each paper source.

What does the [Cartridge Information] button display?

Displays the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the toner runs out.

What does the [Check Counter] button display?

Displays the separate totals for black and white and color printouts.

What does the [Secure Print Memory Usage] button display?

Displays the amount of memory currently used for storing secured document data.

What does the [Version Information] button display?

Displays firmware version information.

What does the [Serial Number] button display?

Displays the serial number of the machine.

What does the section on “Status and logs of copied, printed, and sent/received documents” display?

Displays the current status of the selected item.

What does the [Network Information] button display?

Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of wireless LAN communications.

What does “IP Address” display?

Displays the IPv4 address of the machine.

Can you specify whether to display the IP address on the [Status Monitor] screen?

You can specify whether to display the IP address on the [Status Monitor] screen by setting [Display IP Address].

What does the [Rmv. Mem. Media] button do?

Used to safely remove a USB memory device. This is only displayed when a USB memory device is connected to the machine.

When are messages displayed on the screen?

Messages are displayed on the screen in situations such as when paper runs out or when the expiration of the toner cartridge lifetime is reached.

What happens when an error occurs?

In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed.

What should you do if instructions are displayed on how to respond to an error?

Follow the on-screen instructions to solve the problem.

What is the display?

The display is a touch panel, allowing you to operate directly on the screen.

What actions should you avoid when using the display?

• Pressing forcefully
• Pressing with pointed objects (fingernails, ballpoint pen, pencil, etc.)
• Operating with wet/soiled hands
• Operating the display while an object is placed on it

What should you do before using the touch panel display?

Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.

What does tapping the screen do?

Touch the screen lightly and quickly. Use for selecting or finalizing items.

What does flicking the screen do?

Flick with the finger on the display. The effect of flicking varies depending on the screen. For instance, flicking in the Home screen moves you one page in the direction of the flick.

How do you select items on the screen?

Tap an item name or button to make a selection.

How do you cancel the selection if an item is mistakenly touched?

Slide your finger away then release it from the screen to cancel the selection.

How do you return to the previous screen?

Tap to return to the previous screen.

What does the scroll bar indicate?

The scroll bar appears on the screen when there is still information that is undisplayed.

How do you scroll the screen?

If the scroll bar is displayed, flick the screen to scroll in the direction of the flick.

Note that the scroll bar only appears while the screen is being touched.

How do you change the setting value?

Tap <+>/<-> to adjust the setting on the scale. You can also adjust a setting by flicking the slider left or right.

How do you change a variety of display-related settings, such as the display language?

Refer to <Display Settings>.

How do you change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specified length of time?

Refer to <Function After Auto Reset>.

How do you change various settings about the operability such as screen brightness?

Refer to <Accessibility>.

How do you enter text or a number?

When entering text or a number, use the keyboard displayed on the screen. The numeric keys are displayed on the screen to enter only numbers.

How do you switch the type of character that is entered?

Tap <a> or <1/#> to switch the type of character that is entered.

How do you enter upper case characters?

Tap to enter upper case characters.

How do you delete text?

One character is deleted each time is tapped. Holding down allows you to delete successive characters.

How do you move the cursor (entering a space)?

Tap or to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and tap .

What happens when you are supposed to enter only a numeric value?

When you are supposed to enter only a numeric value, the numeric keys are displayed on the screen.

How do you enter the numeric value?

Tap numeric keys to enter the numeric value.

What do the values in ( ) displayed in the entry box indicate?

The values in ( ) displayed the entry box are the enterable value range.

What do you do when buttons other than the numeric keys are displayed?

When <+>/<-> or / are displayed, you can tap the buttons to increase or decrease the numeric value or move the cursor.

How do you enter characters using a USB keyboard?

You can connect a keyboard to the USB port for USB devices on the Front Side or Back Side and enter text from the keyboard. Even while the keyboard is connected, you can enter text from the operation panel.

Can all the keys on the USB keyboard be used?

Some keys on the USB keyboard, such as the [Backspace], [Home] and [End] keys, cannot be used. When keys that cannot be used are pressed, nothing is entered or changed.

How do you delete text using the USB keyboard?

To delete text, press the [Delete] key.

What is the function of the [RETURN/ENTER] key on the USB keyboard?

Pressing the [RETURN/ENTER] key completes text entry in the same way as selecting <Apply>.

Can you specify the type of keyboard layout?

You can specify the type of keyboard layout (US layout or UK layout). Refer to <English Keyboard Layout>.

How do you disconnect the USB keyboard from the machine?

You can disconnect the USB keyboard from the machine at any time. No special operation is required to disconnect it.

Are there any limitations on entering characters?

Depending on the display language, you may not be able to enter some characters correctly.

Does the USB keyboard operate correctly with all machine types?

The USB keyboard may not operate correctly depending on its type.

When do you have to log in to the machine?

If Department ID Management is enabled or System Manager IDs are enabled, you must log in before using the machine. You also need to log in if use of the fax and scan functions is restricted.

Where can you find information about Department ID Management Login and logging in to Authorized Send?

Refer to Department ID Management Login and Logging in to Authorized Send.

How do you log in using Department ID Management when the login screen appears?

When the login screen appears, use the procedure below to enter the Department ID and PIN.

• When <Insert the card.> is displayed, see Copy Card Reader-F.

1. Enter the ID.
   1. Select <Department ID> or <System Manager ID>.
   2. Enter the ID.
   • If no PIN is registered, proceed to step 3.
2. Enter the PIN.
   1. Select <PIN>.
   2. Enter the PIN.
3. Select <Log In>. ➠The login screen will be changed to the Home screen.
   • After you finish using the machine, select <Log Out> to display the login screen.

When does the Authorized Send login screen appear?

If the Send function authorization setting ( LDAP Server Authentication ) is enabled, the Authorized Send login screen appears when the fax or scan function is used.

How do you log in to Authorized Send?

1. Enter your user name.
   1. Select <User Name>.
   2. Enter your user name.
   • On how to enter text, see Entering Text.
2. Enter the password.
   1. Select <Password>.
   2. Enter the password.
3. Select <Server Name>, and select the server for your authentication.
   • Select the LDAP server where your user name and password are registered.
4. Select <Log In>. ➠The login screen switches to the fax or scan function Home screen.
   • After you finish using the machine, select <Log Out> to display the login screen.

What happens if the <Select Logout Type> screen appears?

If you are logged in to both Authorized Send and Department ID Management, a dialog box appears in which you can select the items you want to log out of. In the case where you want to log out of Authorized Send (fax or scan function) while remaining logged in to Department ID Management, select <Log Out from Authenticated Sending>. In any other cases, select <Log Out from All Authenticated Functions>.

Where can you find information on setting the Department ID Management and setting the System Manager ID and PIN?

Refer to Setting the Department ID Management and Setting the System Manager ID and PIN.

Where do you place originals?

Place originals on the platen glass or in the feeder. Use the platen glass when scanning thick or bound documents such as books. You can load two or more sheets of originals in the feeder so that they can be scanned continuously. For information on loadable sizes, etc., see Main Unit or Feeder .

What are the instructions for placing originals on the platen glass and in the feeder?

Refer to Placing Originals on the Platen Glass and Placing Originals in the Feeder.

What should the condition of originals be before being used?

Use originals that are completely dry.

What should you make sure of when placing originals?

When placing originals, make sure that any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the originals has completely dried.

What types of originals should not be placed in the feeder?

To avoid paper jams:

• Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder as this may cause paper jams:
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Carbon paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Coated paper
  • Torn paper
  • Onion skin or thin paper
  • Stapled or clipped originals
  • Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
  • Transparencies

Where is it recommended to place originals for accurate scanning and why?

To scan originals more accurately:

• Originals placed in the feeder are scanned while being fed into the machine. On the other hand, originals placed on the platen glass remain in a fixed position while they are scanned. To ensure more accurate scanning results, placing originals on the platen glass is recommended.

Where do you place tracing paper or transparencies for scanning?

To scan tracing paper or transparencies:

• To scan transparent originals (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), place them on the platen glass.

How do you place originals on the platen glass?

1. Open the feeder or the platen glass cover.
2. Place the original face down on the platen glass.
   • Align the corner of the original with the top-left corner of the platen glass.
   • To scan transparent originals (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), cover them with plain white paper.
3. Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover. ➠The machine is ready to scan the document.

What should you do when scanning is complete?

When scanning is complete:

• Remove the original from the platen glass.

How do you place originals in the feeder?

1. Open the original supply tray.
2. Spread the slide guides apart.
   • Slide the slide guides outward until they are slightly farther apart than the actual original width.
3. Fan the original stack and align the edges.
   • Fan the original stack in small batches, and align the edges by lightly tapping the stack on a flat surface a few times.
4. Place the original(s) face up in the feeder.
   • Place the original(s) in the landscape orientation.
   • Make sure that the original stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ).
   • Do not load originals of various sizes at the same time.
   • If originals are loaded so that they exceed the load limit line, scanning may stop or a paper jam may occur.
5. Align the slide guides against the edges of the original.
   • Slide the slide guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the original. ➠The machine is ready to scan the original.
   • Align the slide guides securely against the edges of the original. Slide guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.

What should you do while originals are being scanned and after scanning is complete?

While originals are being scanned:

• Do not add or remove originals.

When scanning is complete:

• Remove the scanned originals from beneath the feeder to prevent paper jams.

Where can paper be loaded?

You can load the paper into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Load the paper you usually use into the paper drawer. The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the multi-purpose tray when you temporarily use a size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer. See Available Paper for available paper sizes and types.

What are the precautions for paper and how should paper printed with the machine be stored?

Refer to Precautions for Paper and Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine.

What are the procedures for loading paper, envelopes, and preprinted paper?

Refer to Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer, Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray, Loading Envelopes, and Loading Preprinted Paper.

How do you configure the settings for the loaded paper?

Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Type.

What types of paper should not be used and why?

Do not use the following types of paper:

• A paper jam or printing error may occur.
  • Wrinkled or creased paper
  • Curled or rolled paper
  • Torn paper
  • Damp paper
  • Very thin paper
  • Thin coarse paper
  • Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
  • Back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
  • Highly textured paper
  • Glossy paper

What are the notes on use of paper?

• Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which the machine is installed. Using paper that has been stored under different temperature or humidity conditions may cause paper jams or result in poor print quality.

What are the paper handling and storage recommendations?

• It is recommended that you use paper as soon as possible after unwrapping. Paper remaining unused should be covered with the original wrapping paper and stored on a flat surface.
• Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.
• Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.
• Do not store the paper vertically or do not stack too much paper.
• Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes in temperature or humidity.

What may happen when printing on paper that has absorbed moisture?

• Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output area. There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from fixing toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room temperatures).

How should paper printed with the machine be stored?

When handling/storing the paper printed with the machine, take the following precautions.

◼How to Store the Printed Paper

• Store on a flat surface.
• Do not store together with articles made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) such as clear folders. Toner may melt, resulting in the paper’s sticking to PVC articles.
• Take care that the paper does not get folded or creased. Toner may peel off.
• To store over a long period of time (two years or longer), store in binders or equivalent.
• When the paper is stored over a long period of time, it may become discolored and thus the print may seem to have undergone a change of color.
• Do not store in a place where the temperature is high.

◼Precautions When Applying Adhesive

• Always use insoluble adhesive.
• Before applying adhesive, perform a test using a printout no longer required.
• When putting adhesive-applied paper sheets one over another, make sure that the adhesive is completely dried out.

Where can you find information on registering a custom paper size?

Refer to Registering a Custom Paper Size.

Where should you load the paper you usually use?

Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer.

When do you load paper in the multi-purpose tray?

When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray.

Where can you find information on loading paper in the multi-purpose tray?

Refer to Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray.

What are the instructions for loading regular size paper and custom size paper?

Refer to Loading Regular Size Paper and Loading Custom Size Paper.

How should you load A5 size paper?

When using A5 size paper, see Loading Custom Size Paper and load it in the landscape orientation. When loading paper in the portrait orientation, follow the steps shown in Loading Regular Size Paper.

What is the procedure for loading regular size paper?

To load paper whose size is found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use the following procedure.

Where can you find information on loading paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings?

Refer to Loading Custom Size Paper.

How do you load regular size paper?

1. Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.
2. Adjust the positions of the paper guides to the paper size you want to use.
   • While pressing the lock release lever, move the paper guide to align the projection to the appropriate paper size marking.

What should you do when loading Legal size paper?

When loading Legal size paper:

• Press the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.

3. Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the paper guide on the front side of the paper drawer.
   • Load the paper with the print side face up.
   • Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
   • Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper. Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can cause paper jams.
   • When loading paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper.
4. Insert the paper drawer into the machine.
   • When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a confirmation screen is displayed. Refer to <Notify to Check Paper Settings>.

What should you do when loading Legal size paper?

When loading Legal size paper:

• When the extended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not flush with the machine. Place the legal dust cover over the open part of the paper drawer.

What should you do when changing the paper size or type?

• The factory default settings for paper size and type are <LTR> and <Plain 2>, respectively. If you load a different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change the settings, the machine cannot print properly.

How do you print on the back side of printed paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)?

• You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray (Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray), with the side to print face up (previously printed side face down).
  • When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
  • You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
  • You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
  • If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>. Refer to <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
  • If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

How do you load custom size paper?

To load custom size paper or other paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use the following procedure.

1. Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.
2. Spread the paper guides apart.
   • Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.

What should you do when loading longer paper than A4 size?

When loading longer paper than A4 size:

• Press the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.

3. Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the rear side of the paper drawer.
   • Load the paper with the print side face up.
   • Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
   • Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper. Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can cause paper jams.
   • When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper.
4. Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
   • Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.
   • Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper. Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
5. Insert the paper drawer into the machine.
   • When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a confirmation screen is displayed. Refer to <Notify to Check Paper Settings>.

What should you do when loading longer paper than A4 size?

When loading longer paper than A4 size:

• When the extended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not flush with the machine. Place the legal dust cover over the open part of the paper drawer.

What should you do when changing the paper size or type?

• The factory default settings for paper size and type are <LTR> and <Plain 2>, respectively. If you load a different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change the settings, the machine cannot print properly.

How do you print on the back side of printed paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)?

• You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ), with the side to print face up (previously printed side face down).
  • When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
  • You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
  • You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
  • If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>. Refer to <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.
  • If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

Where can you find information about available paper?

Refer to Available Paper.

When do you load paper in the multi-purpose tray?

When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray.

Where should you load the paper you usually use?

Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer.

Where can you find information on loading paper in the paper drawer?

Refer to Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer.

What must you do for the machine to print even if paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray?

For MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw:

• Make sure to insert the paper drawer. The machine only prints when the paper drawer is inserted, even if paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. An error message is displayed if you attempt to print without inserting the paper drawer.

What should you do when loading A5 size paper?

When loading A5 size paper:

• When setting the paper size, make sure the current paper orientation. Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray.

How do you open the cover of the multi-purpose tray?

1. Open the cover.
   • Hold the both sides of the cover to open it.
2. Pull out the paper tray.

How do you load paper in the multi-purpose tray?

3. Spread the paper guides apart.
   • Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.
4. Insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray until the paper stops.
   • Load the paper with the print side face up.
   • Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges of the paper stack.
   • Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper. Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can cause paper jams.

Where can you find information on setting the System Manager ID and PIN and setting the Department ID Management?

Refer to Setting the System Manager ID and PIN and Setting the Department ID Management.

How do I align the paper guides?

Slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper. Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.

Can I print on the back side of printed paper?

Yes, you can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, with the side to print face up (previously printed side face down).

What are the conditions when printing on the back side of printed paper using the multi-purpose tray?

When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print. You can use only the paper printed with this machine. You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on. If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.

What should I do if I am using A5 size paper?

If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

Does the machine print when the paper drawer is inserted?

Yes, the machine only prints when the paper drawer is inserted, even if paper is loaded in the manual feed slot. An error message is displayed if you attempt to print without inserting the paper drawer.

How many sheets of paper can be loaded at a time?

Only one sheet of paper can be loaded each time you print.

How do I spread the paper guides apart?

Slide the paper guides outward.

How do I insert the paper and align the paper guides against the width of the paper?

Load the paper with the print side face up. Insert the paper 3/8" to 3/4" (10 mm to 20 mm) into the manual feed slot, and then slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.

How do I insert the paper slowly into the manual feed slot?

Insert the paper slowly into the manual feed slot until it reaches the back of the slot. The paper is pulled slightly into the machine after it reaches the back of the slot.

What are some important things to remember when inserting paper?

To ensure that the paper is loaded squarely, hold it with both hands until the pull-in operation is complete. When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes or Loading Preprinted Paper.

What is the process for printing on the back side of printed paper using the manual feed slot?

You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the paper drawer or manual feed slot, with the side to print face up (previously printed side face down). You can use only the paper printed with this machine. You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on. If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>. If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

What are some important things to remember when loading envelopes?

Make sure to flatten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes and which side is face up.

How do I load envelopes?

This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you need to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading envelopes in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer or Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray.

What is the procedure to prepare envelopes before loading them?

On the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw, only one envelope at a time can be loaded in the manual feed slot. Follow steps 1 to 3 in the procedure below to prepare the envelope for loading.

How do I prepare an envelope for loading?

1. Close the flap of each envelope.
2. Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed tightly.
3. Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten any curls.
4. Align the edges of the envelopes on a flat surface.

How do I load envelopes in the paper drawer?

Load the envelopes Monarch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the long edges on either side), with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes. Load the envelopes so that the edge with the flap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.

How do I load envelopes in the multi-purpose tray?

Load the envelopes Monarch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes. Load the envelopes so that the edge with the flap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.

What are some important things to remember when using paper that has been preprinted with a logo?

When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading. Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.

What is the process for making 1-sided printouts on paper with logos?

This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a description of the general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer or Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray.

How do I load paper with logos to make 1-sided printouts?

Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.

How do I load paper with logos to make 2-sided printouts?

Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the first page of the document) face down.

How does the <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting work?

When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>, the facing that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face down) can also be used for 1-sided printing. This setting is especially useful if you frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided printing.

What are the paper size and type settings?

You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper. If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.

How do I specify paper size and type in the paper drawer?

1. Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2. Select the target paper drawer. When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
3. Select the paper size. If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.

What do I do when loading custom size paper?

1. Select <Custom>.
2. Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side. Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using <+>/<->, with / to move the cursor between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions. If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with one touch.
3. Select <Apply>.

What do I do when loading A5 size paper?

In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.

How do I specify the paper type?

Select the paper type.

How do I specify paper size and type in the multi-purpose tray?

The screen shown here is displayed when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Follow the on-screen instructions to specify settings that match the size and type of the loaded paper.

What if the screen is not displayed when paper is loaded?

If you always load the same paper in the multi-purpose tray, you can skip the paper setting operations by registering the paper size and type as the default setting. When the default setting is registered, however, the screen shown above is not displayed. To display the screen, select <Specify When Loading Paper>.

How do I select the paper size?

Select the paper size. If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.

What do I do when loading custom size paper?

1. Select <Custom>.
2. Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side. Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using <+>/<->, with / to move the cursor between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions. If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with one touch.
3. Select <Apply>.

What do I do when loading A5 size paper?

In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.

How do I select the paper type?

Select the paper type.

How do I register default paper settings for the multi-purpose tray?

You can register default paper settings for the multi-purpose tray. Registering default settings can save yourself the effort of having to specify the settings each time you load the same paper into the multi-purpose tray. After the default paper setting is registered, the paper setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded, and the same setting is always used. If you load a different paper size or type without changing the paper settings, the machine may not print properly. To avoid this problem, select <Specify When Loading Paper> in step 3, and then load the paper.

How do I register default paper settings for the multi-purpose tray?

1. Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2. Select multi-purpose tray.
3. Select the paper size. If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.

How do I register a custom paper size?

1. Select <Custom>.
2. Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side. Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using <+>/<->, with / to move the cursor between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions. If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons <S1> to <S3>, you can call them up with one touch.
3. Select <Apply>.

What do I do when loading A5 size paper?

In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.

How do I select the paper type?

Select the paper type.

How do I register a custom paper size?

You can register up to three frequently used custom paper sizes.

How do I register a custom paper size?

1. Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Register Custom Paper>.
3. Select the registration number.

How do I delete a setting?

Select the registered number, and then select <Delete> <Yes>.

How do I specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side?

Select <X> or <Y>, and enter the length of each side using <+>/<->, with / to move the cursor between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions.

How do I change the display name of a registration number?

Select <Name>, enter the display name, and then select <Apply>.

How do I apply the changes?

Select <Apply>.

How do I set the registered custom size?

The paper sizes that are registered in the procedure above can be called when <Custom> is selected on the paper size selection screen for the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.

How do I limit the paper sizes displayed?

You can ensure that only frequently used paper sizes are shown in the screen for selecting the paper size setting.

How do I limit the paper sizes displayed?

1. Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>.
3. Select the paper source you want to limit the paper sizes to be displayed for. When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
4. Clear the check boxes for paper sizes you do not want displayed. Ensure that only the check boxes for frequently used paper sizes are selected. Paper sizes that are not selected can be viewed by selecting <Other Sizes> in the paper size setting selection screen.
5. Select <Apply>.

How do I automatically select an appropriate paper source for each function?

Enable or disable the automatic paper source selection feature for each paper source. If this feature is set to <On>, the machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with paper of the appropriate size for each print job. Also, when the paper in the selected paper source runs out, this feature enables continuous printing by switching from that paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size.

How do I automatically select an appropriate paper source for each function?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Function Settings> <Common> <Paper Feed Settings>.
3. Select <Paper Source Auto Selection>.
4. Select the target function. When the target function is report/list printing or memory media print, select <Other>.
5. For each paper source to which you want to apply the automatic paper source selection feature, select <On>. When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed. Always specify <On> for at least one of the paper drawers. If you select <Off> for all the drawers, then you cannot finish the setting procedure.
6. Select <Apply>.

How do I customize the display?

In order to make the Home screen easier to use, you can customize it. In addition, you can work more efficiently by registering your favorite settings to the Basic Features screen for each function.

How do I customize the home screen?

You can rearrange buttons that are displayed in the Home screen. In addition, you can customize the Home screen to make it easier to select functions by adding shortcut buttons.

How do I register “Favorite Settings”?

To make it possible to quickly call up the same settings for Copy, Fax, and Scan, you can register them as your favorite settings. You can add registered setting combinations to the Home screen as shortcut buttons.

How can I customize the Home Screen?

You can add/delete shortcut buttons displayed in the Home screen according to your application or a preferred arrangement. You can also change the order that they are displayed in.

How do I add buttons to the Home Screen?

You can add shortcut buttons to the Home screen for frequently used functions such as <Copy>, <Fax>, and <Scan>. For example, you can carry out tasks more quickly and efficiently by assigning a sequence of settings (e.g. “Scan both sides of an original, save it as a highly compressed PDF file and send it via e-mail”) to a single button. The settings to be added as a shortcut button must be registered beforehand as Favorite Settings.

1. Select <Home Screen Settings> in the Home screen.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
2. Select <Select Button to Display>.
3. Select the function with the Favorite Settings you want to add as a button.
4. Select the check box for all settings to be displayed in the Home screen and select <Apply>.
5. Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
   • A button for the newly selected settings is added to the Home screen.
   • If the Home screen is full and no more settings can be registered, delete registered buttons and spaces in <Home Screen Settings>.

How do I remove registered buttons from the Home Screen?

Clear the check box for the name of the button you want to remove and then select <Apply>. Once you remove a registered button, a space appears where the button was displayed in the Home screen. If necessary, delete the space.

How do I change the arrangement of buttons on the Home Screen?

To make the buttons easier to use, you can rearrange the buttons however you like. For instance, you can put the most frequently used functions first, or arrange the function buttons together with shortcut buttons for Favorite Settings. You can also insert a blank (space) instead of a button to make it easier to view the Home screen.

1. Select <Home Screen Settings> in the Home screen.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
2. Select <Set Display Order>.
3. Select the button to move.
   • The selected button is highlighted. Tap the selected button again to deselect it.
4. Select <Move Left> or <Move Right>.
   • The button moves as many times as you tapped.
   • A long touch on <Move Left> or <Move Right> moves the selected button continuously.
5. Select <Apply>.

How do I insert a blank on the Home Screen?

When <Insert Blank> is selected, a blank is inserted on the left side of the selected button. If the button at the end is selected, a blank is inserted even if <Move Right> is selected.

How do I delete a blank on the Home Screen?

Select the blank to be deleted, and select <Del. Blank>.

How do I register frequently used settings?

If you register your frequently used settings as “favorite settings,” you can quickly call up the same settings every time you make copies, send a fax, or scan. In addition, if you register complicated settings as “favorite settings,” you can quickly call them up for ease of operation. You can also assign registered setting combinations to a shortcut button displayed in the Home screen. You can also register a fax or scan destination in the frequently used settings, however, it cannot be changed once it is registered. To change a registered destination, delete the settings and then register them again.

How do I register settings?

1. Select <Copy> in the Home screen.
2. Change the values for the settings you want to register.
3. Select <Other Settings> <Favorite Settings>.
4. Select unregistered settings, and select <Register>.
   • To change the content of a registered setting, select that setting and select <Edit>.
5. Check the details of the settings to be registered, and select <Register>.
   • To change the value of a setting to be registered, select the setting.
   • To rename the setting, select <Name>.
6. Select whether to register the settings as a shortcut button.
   • If you select <Yes>, a message appears. Check the message and then select <OK>. The registered setting combination is added to the Home screen as a shortcut button.
   • If the Home screen is full and the shortcut button cannot be added, use <Home Screen Settings> to delete registered buttons or blanks.
   • Registered settings are retained even when the machine is turned OFF.
   • If you want to delete a registered setting, select <Copy> <Other Settings> <Favorite Settings> select the settings, and select <Delete> <Yes>.

How do I recall registered settings?

Simply select the setting combination that suits your purpose from the favorite settings. <Copy> <Other Settings> <Favorite Settings> Select the setting combination to be recalled, and select <Apply>. Once you have recalled the setting combination, you can also change the copy settings as needed.

How do I change the default settings for functions?

The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you select <Reset>. If you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to specify the same settings every time you perform an action.

What are the changeable setting items for Copy?

For information about changeable setting items, see <Change Default Settings (Copy)>. Use the following steps to change the default settings for copy: <Menu> <Function Settings> <Copy> <Change Default Settings (Copy)> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>.

What are the changeable setting items for FAX?

For information about changeable setting items, see <Fax Settings>. Use the following steps to change the default settings for fax: <Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Change Default Settings (Fax)> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>.

What are the changeable setting items for Memory Media Print?

For information about changeable setting items, see <Access Stored Files Settings>. Use the following steps to change the default settings for memory media print: <Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Access Stored Files Settings> <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>.

What are the changeable setting items for USB Memory?

For information about changeable setting items, see <USB Memory Settings>. Use the following steps to change the default settings for USB memory: <Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Common Settings> <Scan and Store Settings> <USB Memory Settings> <Change Default Settings (USB Memory)> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>.

What are the changeable setting items for E-Mail?

For information about changeable setting items, see <E-Mail Settings>. Use the following steps to change the default settings for E-Mail: <Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <E-Mail Settings> <Change Default Settings (E-Mail)> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>.

What are the changeable setting items for I-Fax?

For information about changeable setting items, see <I-Fax Settings>. Use the following steps to change the default settings for I-Fax: <Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <I-Fax Settings> <Change Default Settings (I-Fax)> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>.

What are the changeable setting items for Shared Folder/FTP Server?

For information about changeable setting items, see <File Settings>. Use the following steps to change the default settings for Shared Folder/FTP Server: <Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Scan and Send Settings> <File Settings> <Change Default Settings (File)> Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>.

How can I restore the default settings?

If you select <Initialize> on each setting screen, you can restore the default settings.

How do I set sounds?

The machine produces sounds in a variety of situations, such as when fax sending is complete or when a paper jam or error occurs. You can set the volume of each of these sounds individually.

How do I adjust the <Fax Volume>?

1. Press the ( ) key.
2. Adjust the volume, and select <Apply>.
   • To mute the sound, move the cursor all the way to the left.

How do I adjust the <Other Volume Set.>?

1. Press the ( ) key.
   • For the model without fax functionality, proceed to step 3.
2. Select <Other Volume Set.>.
3. Select a setting.
4. Adjust the volume, and select <Apply>.
   • To mute the sound, move the cursor all the way to the left.
5. Select <Apply> <Apply>.

What are the different settings for <Other Volume Set.>?

Setting	Description	Action
<Ring Tone>	Sound produced when an incoming fax is received	Go to step 4.
<TX Done Tone>	Sound produced when fax sending is complete	Go to step 4.
<RX Done Tone>	Sound produced when fax receiving is complete	Go to step 4.
<Scanning Done Tone>	Sound produced when fax original scanning is complete	Go to step 4.
<Entry Tone>	Confirmation sound each time a key on the operation panel or button on the display is pressed	Select <On> (produce a tone) or <Off> (not produce a tone), and then go to step 5.
<Invalid Entry Tone>	Sound produced when an invalid key operation is performed, such as when you enter a number outside the valid setting range	Select <On> (produce a tone) or <Off> (not produce a tone), and then go to step 5.
<Restock Supplies Tone>	Sound produced when a toner cartridge is almost empty	Select <On> (produce a tone) or <Off> (not produce a tone), and then go to step 5.
<Warning Tone>	Sound produced when a paper jam or other error occurs	Select <On> (produce a tone) or <Off> (not produce a tone), and then go to step 5.
<Job Done Tone>	Sound produced when an operation such as copying or scanning is complete	Select <On> (produce a tone) or <Off> (not produce a tone), and then go to step 5.
<Energy Saver Alert>	Sound produced when the machine enters or exits sleep mode	Select <On> (produce a tone) or <Off> (not produce a tone), and then go to step 5.
<Original in Feeder Detection Tone>	Sound produced when an original is loaded in the feeder	Select <On> (produce a tone) or <Off> (not produce a tone), and then go to step 5.

How do I have an end sound only for errors?

In <Sound Only When Error Occurs>, select <On>, and select <Apply>.

How does the machine enter sleep mode?

The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power flow to the operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can save power simply by pressing on the operation panel. When the machine enters sleep mode, lights up yellow green.

What are the situations where the machine will not enter sleep mode?

• When the machine is in operation
• When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking
• When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning
• When a paper jam occurs
• When the receiver of the external telephone is off the hook
• When the machine is set such that the fax incoming ring will not sound
• When the menu screen is displayed
• When a job is waiting to be scanned to a USB memory device or to a computer
• When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes enters sleep mode when an error message is displayed.)
• When the machine is communicating with an LDAP server, etc.
• When the SSID/network key screen for Direct Connection is displayed
• When settings are being imported or exported

How do I change the Auto Sleep Time value?

Auto Sleep Time is a function that automatically puts the machine into the sleep mode if it remains idle for a specified length of time. The PDF recommends using the factory default settings to reduce power usage. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters the auto sleep mode, perform the procedure below.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Auto Sleep Time> Set the amount of time that elapses before the machine automatically enters sleep mode <Apply>

How do I change the Sleep Mode Setting to the specified time?

You can configure a setting so that the machine is placed into the sleep mode at the specified time. You can also configure a setting so that the sleep mode is released at the specified time.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> Select <Auto Sleep Daily Timer> or <Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings> Select <On> in <Set This Function>, and enter the time <Apply>

How do I exit sleep mode?

You can press or any other key on the operation panel to exit the sleep mode. You can also tap the display to exit sleep mode. If an external telephone is connected, the machine exits sleep mode when you take the receiver off the hook.

How do I register destinations?

You can register frequently used fax/scan destinations in the Address Book and easily select them when needed. Destinations can be searched alphabetically, from lists in the Address Book, or by entering three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers). You can also specify destinations more quickly by using the following features.

What are the features that allow you to specify destinations more quickly?

• Favorites: Registering a lot of addresses in the Address Book makes it difficult to find the destination you need. To avoid this situation, register frequently used destinations as Favorites. Destinations registered in Favorites can be searched from the < > in the Address Book.
• Group Dial: You can select multiple destinations that have already been registered and register them together as a group. You can send faxes or e-mails to multiple destinations at the same time. Groups can also be registered in Favorites.
• Index: The registered destinations are classified into indexes depending on the initial character or the type of address. Changing indexes allows you to perform a destination search quickly. Tap / or flick the target index sideways to change the display.

What are the different indexes for destinations?

• <All>: Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book.
• < >: Displays a list of destinations registered in Favorites.
• < >: Displays destinations for faxes.
• < >: Displays destinations for e-mails.
• < >: Displays destinations for I-Faxes.
• < >: Displays destinations for shared folders and FTP servers. Registration of destinations is performed from the computer.
• < >: Displays a list of destinations registered in Group Dial.
• <A-Z>/<0-9>/<ABC> to <YZ>: Displays destinations with recipient names whose first characters correspond to the characters of the selected index.

What are additional things to keep in mind when registering destinations?

• Use the computer to register a shared folder or FTP server as the destination for scans.
• You can save the Address Book as a file on your computer (although you cannot use the computer to edit the Address Book). You can also import a saved Address Book from the computer to the machine.
• You can print a list of destinations registered in the Address Book.
• If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can make search to find user information on the server and register it in the Address Book. You need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand.

How do I register destinations in the Address Book?

This section describes how to register destinations from the operation panel. You can also use the Remote UI to register destinations.

1. Select <Address Book> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Register Dest.>.
   • If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.
3. Select the type of address to register.
4. Select <Name>.
   • Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.
5. Enter the name, and select <Apply>.
6. Select <Fax Number>, <E-Mail Address>, or <I-Fax Address>.
7. Enter the destination, and select <Apply>.
8. Select <Register As>.
9. Select <Favorites> or <Coded Dial>.
   • If you select <Coded Dial>, select the destination number, or select <Use Numeric Keys> and enter the destination number.
10. Select <Apply>.

How do I register destinations with the LDAP server?

If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can make search to find user information on the server and register it in the Address Book. To make registration from the LDAP server, you need to specify the settings for connecting to the LDAP server beforehand.

1. Select <LDAP Server>.
2. Select the LDAP server you are using.
3. Select conditions for user information to be searched.
   • Name, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for searching destinations.
4. Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.
   • To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Select <Search Method>.
6. Select conditions to display the search result.
   • <Using All Conditions Below>: Searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specified in steps 3 and 4.
   • <Using Some Conditions Below>: If users that meet even one of the criteria specified in steps 3 and 4 are found, displays all those users.
7. Select <Start Search>.
   • The users meeting your search criteria are displayed.
   • If the authentication screen appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the user name of the machine and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>.
8. Select a user you want to register in the Address Book.
9. Select <Apply>.
   • The user name and the fax number or e-mail address registered on the LDAP server of the selected user are registered in the Address Book.

How do I register destinations from recall settings?

If recall settings are provided, you can select <Recall Settings> and register the destinations.

How do I make detailed settings for a fax destination?

After selecting <Set Details>, a screen similar to the following is displayed.

• <ECM TX>: If an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper image from being sent when setting <On>.
• <TX Speed>: If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust the transmission start speed downward.
• <Long Distance>: Specify <International (1)> to <International (3)> according to the transmission conditions when registering overseas fax numbers.
  • You can also specify <ECM TX> and <TX Speed> from <Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings>. However, settings made from <Address Book> are enabled for the detailed settings of destinations registered in the Address Book.

What are other things to keep in mind when registering destinations in the Address Book?

• You can make a group of destinations already registered in the Address Book and register it as one destination.
• When you want to change or delete items of information about destinations registered in the Address Book, see Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book.

How do I register multiple destinations as a group?

You can select multiple destinations that have already been registered and register them together as a group. This section describes how to register a group from the operation panel. You can also use the Remote UI to register a group. Only destinations of the same type of address can be registered in the same group. Shared folders or FTP servers cannot be registered in a group as destinations.

1. Select <Address Book> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Register Dest.> <Group>.
   • If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.
3. Select <Name>.
   • Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.
4. Enter the name, and select <Apply>.
5. Select <Destination>.
6. Select <Add>.
7. Select the index containing the destination you want to register.
8. Select the destination.
9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until you have registered all of the destinations that you want to register, and then select <Apply>.
10. Select <Register As>.
11. Select <Favorites> or <Coded Dial>.
    • If you select <Coded Dial>, select the destination number, or select <Use Numeric Keys> and enter the destination number.
12. Select <Apply>.

How can I view information about a destination in a group?

Select the target destination, and select <Details>.

How do I remove a destination from a group?

Select the destination that you want to remove from the group, and select <Delete> <Yes>.

How do I edit the registered destinations in the Address Book?

You can change your settings, such as changing a registered fax number or name, changing the type of destination registered as a fax number to an e-mail destination, changing a coded dial number, and adding or deleting group destinations. You can also delete destinations or groups. If you delete a destination from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the favorite settings.

1. Select <Address Book> in the Home screen.
2. Select the index containing the destination you want to edit.
3. Select the destination, and select <Edit>.
   • To clear selection of a destination, select again the destination with a check mark. When multiple destinations are selected, you can deselect all of them in batch by <Clear All>.
   • If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.
4. After editing the necessary items, select <Apply>.

How do I check destination details in the Address Book?

Select a destination of which the details you want to check, and select <Details>.

How do I delete destinations in the Address Book?

Select the destination you want to delete, and then select <Delete> <Yes>.

How do I use a USB memory device?

When using a USB memory, insert it into the USB port on the machine.

What are some things I should know before using a USB memory device?

• The supported formats of USB memory device are FAT16 and FAT32.
• The following devices and uses are not supported:
  • USB memory devices that have security functions installed
  • USB memory devices that do not meet the USB standards
  • Memory card readers connected via USB
  • USB memory devices that are used with extension cables
  • USB memory devices used via a USB hub

How do I handle USB memory devices?

• Make sure that the USB memory device is correctly oriented before inserting it. If you attempt to insert it in incorrect orientation, the memory device and the machine may be damaged.
• Do not remove, bump or otherwise move the USB memory device while data is being imported or exported. Also, do not turn OFF the machine while processing is in progress.
• You may not be able to save data properly on some USB memory devices.

How do I remove the USB memory device?

Always use the following procedure when removing USB memory devices. Using other methods to remove USB memory devices may result in damage to the device and the machine.

1. Select <Status Monitor>.
2. Select <Rmv. Mem. Media>.
   • Wait until the <The memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.
3. Disconnect the USB memory device.

How do you copy a document?

This section describes the basic operation procedure used to copy an original.

1. Place the original(s).
2. Select <Copy> in the Home screen.
3. Select <Number of Copies> in the Copy Basic Features screen.
4. Enter the number of copies, and select <Close>.

• If you have entered an incorrect value, use to clear it.

5. Specify the copy settings as necessary.
6. Select <Start>.

➠Copying starts.

• If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>.

What happens when placing originals in the feeder in step 1?

The original is automatically scanned.

What happens when placing originals on the platen glass in step 1?

For 2-sided copying or N on 1 copying, the screen prompting you to load the next original is displayed.

1. Place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>.

• You can also specify <Density>, <Original Type>, and <Color Balance> separately for each original.

• Repeat this step until you finish scanning the entire original.

2. Select <Start Printing>.

• When the <Paper Settings and Loaded Size Mismatch> or <The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Do you want to print?> message is shown in the display, there is a possibility that copying cannot be performed properly. For more information, see “Troubleshooting (FAQ)” on the online manual website.

What happens when copying originals with text or images that extend to the edges of the page?

• The edges of the original might not be copied. For more information about the scan margins, see Main Unit.
• If you always want to make copies with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for Functions
• If you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed: Registering Frequently Used Settings

How do you cancel copies?

If you want to cancel copying immediately after selecting <Start>, select <Cancel> on the screen or press on the operation panel. You can also cancel copying after checking the copy status.

How do you press the to cancel?

If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be printed. Select a copy document to be canceled, and select <Cancel> <Yes>.

How do you check the copy job status before canceling?

<Status Monitor> <Copy/Print Job> Select the copy document in the <Copy/Print Job Status> tab <Cancel> <Yes>

How do you check the copying status and log?

You can check the current copy statuses and the logs for copied documents.

• When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the copy job log.

In what cases is checking the copying status and log useful?

• When some long time has already passed after scanning of your original to be copied but printing of the document has not started yet, you may want to see the waiting list of the documents waiting to be printed.
• When you cannot find your printouts that you thought had been copied, you may want to see whether an error has occurred.

How do you check the copying status and log?

1. Select <Status Monitor>.
2. Select <Copy/Print Job>.
3. Check the copy statuses and logs.

How do you check the copy statuses?

1. Select the document whose status you want to check in the <Copy/Print Job Status> tab.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

How do you check the copy logs?

1. Select the document whose log you want to check in the <Copy Job Log> tab.

• <OK> is displayed when a document was copied successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a document failed to be copied because it was canceled or there was some error.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

What happens when a three-digit number is shown in the case of <error>?

• This number represents an error code. For more information, see “Troubleshooting (FAQ)” on the online manual website.

How do you enhance and adjust copy quality?

You can improve the copy quality by specifying more detailed settings, such as selecting the optimum image quality, erasing unnecessary shadows, etc.

How do you select the type of original for copying?

You can select the optical image quality for the copy depending on the original type, such as text-only documents, documents with charts and graphs, or magazine photos.

<Copy> <Other Settings> <Original Type> Select the original type

What is <text/photo/map (speed)>?

Priority is given to speed over image quality. This setting is only effective when selected for color copying.

What is <text/photo/map>?

Suitable when copying originals that contain both text and photos, or originals that include detailed lines, such as maps.

What is <text/photo/map (quality)>?

Priority is given to image quality over speed. You can also adjust the level of priority given to the quality of the text or photos. Adjust the setting on the scale, and select <Apply>.

What is <printed image>?

Suitable when making a clear copy of originals that contain printed photos (photos made of halftone dots), such as magazines or pamphlets.

How do you adjust sharpness for copying?

You can adjust sharpness of the copied image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of magazine photos.

<Copy> <Other Settings> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness <Apply>

What is an example of how to adjust sharpness for copying?

If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil

No change to sharpness Increased sharpness

If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos

No change to sharpness Decreased sharpness

How do you erase dark borders when copying?

When copying originals that are smaller than the output paper size, frame lines may appear around the edges in the copied image. When copying facing pages from thick book, dark borders may appear. <Erase Frame> enables you to erase these frame lines and dark borders.

• The width of the frame to erase is increased or decreased relative to the <Copy Ratio> setting.
• <Erase Frame> is not available when using <N on 1>.

<Copy> <Other Settings> <Erase Frame> <On> Specify the width of the frame to erase <Next> Select the original size on the <Scan Size> screen

What is an example of how to erase dark borders and frame lines when copying?

Without <Erase Frame> With <Erase Frame>

How do you adjust the color?

Adjust the levels of yellow, magenta, cyan, or black.

<Copy> <Other Settings> <Color Balance> Select the color, and adjust the color level <Apply>

What is an example of adjusting the color if you want to make a copy with colors that more closely match the original?

If the color of the copy does not match the original: Use color balance adjustment

What is an example of adjusting the color if you want to make a copy with brighter colors than the original?

Without color balance adjustment Yellow -5 Cyan +7 Yellow -7 Magenta +6 Cyan +5

• If you select <Fine Adjust>, you can adjust the levels of the three density areas for each color.

What are some useful copy functions?

This section describes useful copy functions to save paper and improve copying operation efficiency.

How do you copy?

This chapter describes basic copy operations and various useful copy functions.

What are the basic operations for copying?

• Using Basic Operations
  • Copy Basic Features Screen
  • Basic Copy Operations
  • Canceling Copies
  • Checking the Copying Status and Log
• Enhancing Quality
  • Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality
  • Selecting the Type of Original for Copying
  • Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness)
  • Erasing Dark Borders When Copying (Erase Frame)
  • Adjusting the Color

What are the useful copy functions?

• Using Useful Copy Functions
  • Useful Copy Functions
  • Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)
  • Collating Copies by Page
  • Making ID Card Copies
  • Making Passport Copies

What is the copy basic features screen?

When you select <Copy> in the Home screen, the Copy Basic Features screen appears.

What is on the copy basic features screen?

• Current setting status and setting buttons
• The setting status, such as copy ratio, copy paper, and number of copies, are displayed. To copy correctly, be sure to check the settings displayed here. When you want to change a setting, select the desired setting item.
• Basic Copy Operations

What is <2-sided>?

You can select a combination of 1-sided copying and 2-sided copying for the original and printout paper. Specify the detailed settings from <Other Settings>.

What are the types of 2-sided copying?

The illustration below shows the types of 2-sided copying.

• Scans one side of an original and prints the scanned data on one side of the paper.
• Scans one side of an original and prints the scanned data on both sides of the paper.
• Scans both sides of an original and prints the scanned data on both sides of the paper.
• Scans both sides of an original and prints the scanned data on one side of the paper.

What is <N on 1>?

You can select an “N on 1” pattern to arrange multi-page originals on the same side of one sheet. Specify the detailed settings from <Other Settings>.

What are the options for <N on 1>?

• Does not apply N on 1.
• Prints data for two consecutive pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
• Prints data for four consecutive pages on one side of a sheet of paper.

What is <Other settings>?

You can call the detailed settings or favorite settings that are not displayed in the Copy Basic Features screen.

What is <reset>?

You can collectively restore the default settings.

What is <start>?

Use this button to start copying. Selecting <B&W> starts black and white copying. Selecting <Color> starts color copying.

How do you adjust density?

Adjust the density of the scan if the text or images in an original are excessively light or dark. For example, you can sharpen text and lines written using a pencil.

How do you adjust the entire density?

<Density> Adjust the density <Close>

How do you adjust the background density?

<Density> <Adjust Background Density> <Adjust (Manual)> Adjust the background density <Apply> <Close>

• Depending on the original color, portions other than the background may be affected.
• If you select <Density by Color>, you can adjust the background density for each color.

How do you do 2-sided copying?

You can copy two pages of an original on both sides of the paper. You can also copy a 2-sided original on both sides of the paper, or on two sheets of paper.

• <2-Sided Printing> may not be available with some sizes and types of paper.

<Other Settings> <2-Sided Printing> Select the type of 2-sided copying <Apply>

<Orig./Fin. Type> Specify the original orientation, opening type, and finishing type.

How do you enlarge or reduce copies?

You can enlarge or reduce copies by using a preset copy ratio such as <STMT->LTR>, or by setting a custom copy ratio in increments of 1 %.

• If you make a setting for <N on 1> after setting the copy ratio, the setting of reduction ratio in <N on 1> takes priority.

<Copy Ratio> Select the copy ratio

What is <100% Direct>?

Makes copies at copy ratio 100 %.

What is <auto>?

Makes copies by automatically enlarging/reducing the original image to fit the specified paper size.

How do you use the preset copy ratio?

Select a copy ratio.

How do you use the numeric keys when enlarging or reducing copies?

You can set any copy ratio from 25 % to 400 % in 1 % increments.

How do you select copy paper?

Specify the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing out copies.

• You must first specify the size and type of paper that is loaded in the paper source.

<Paper> Select the paper source or <Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)> <Close>

What are the paper sources you can select?

• Uses the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray to make copies.

• Uses the paper that is loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1) of the machine to make copies.

• Automatically selects the Letter or Legal size paper depending on the original size loaded in the feeder.

• When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.

• <Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)> may not be displayed depending on the model you are using.

• <Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)> is not available when no original is loaded in the feeder.

• <Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)> is not available when using <N on 1>, <Erase Frame>, or <ID Card Copy>.

• For information about other copy settings, see Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality or Useful Copy Functions.

How can I reduce the size of a multiple-page original and arrange all pages on one side of the paper?

You can use the <N on 1> feature to reduce the size of a multiple-page original and arrange all pages on one side of the paper. This will allow you to save paper by copying the document on fewer pages than the original. The copy ratio will automatically reduce and display on the screen. If the copying process has not started, you can further reduce the image size by lowering the numeric value that is automatically displayed, but keep in mind that the edges of the original might not be copied if you increase the numeric value.

Is <N on 1> available when using <Erase Frame>?

No, <N on 1> is not available when using <Erase Frame>.

Will margins be created in the copied image when I copy multiple originals onto one page?

Yes, when you copy multiple originals onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.

How many pages can be combined on one side of paper?

The number of pages that can be combined on one side of the paper is selected by you. For example, <4 on 1> means that four pages of an original can be combined on a single sheet.

How can I specify how the originals are arranged on the page?

You can use the <Layout> option to specify how to arrange the originals on the page.

How do I collate copies in sequential page order when preparing multiple copies of multi-page originals?

To collate copies in sequential page order when preparing multiple copies of multi-page originals, you need to set <Collate> to <On>. This function is useful when you are preparing handouts for meetings or presentations.

What happens if I set <Collate> to <Off>?

If you set <Collate> to <Off>, the copies are grouped by page and not collated. For example, if you are making three copies of a five-page original, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.

What happens if I set <Collate> to <On>?

If you set <Collate> to <On>, the copies are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are making three copies of a five-page original, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.

How do I copy the front and back sides of a card onto the same side of a page?

To copy the front and back sides of a card onto the same side of a page, use the <ID Card Copy> function. This is useful when copying a driver’s license or ID card.

What is the automatic <Copy Ratio> setting when using the <ID Card Copy> function?

The <Copy Ratio> is automatically set to <100% Direct> when using the <ID Card Copy> function.

What are the steps for making an ID card copy?

1. Place the card on the platen glass.
2. Select <ID Card Copy>.
3. Select <Start>.
4. Turn the card over.
5. Select <Scan Next>.

How do I copy multiple passports onto one sheet?

To copy multiple passports onto one sheet, follow these steps:

1. Place the passport with the desired pages open on the platen glass.
2. Select <Passport Copy> in the Home screen.
3. Select the layout.
4. Select the paper source that contains the paper you want to use.
5. Configure the copy settings as necessary.
6. Select <Start>.

What are the layout options for passport copies?

The available layout options are:

• <2 on 1 (2-Sided)>: This option copies four facing pages of passports onto one side of the paper, for a total of eight facing pages copied onto both sides of the paper.

• <4 on 1 (2-Sided)>: This option copies eight facing pages of passports onto one side of the paper, for a total of 16 facing pages copied onto both sides of the paper.

• <2 on 1>: This option copies four facing pages of passports onto one side of the paper.

• <4 on 1>: This option copies eight facing pages of passports onto one side of the paper.

What happens after I select <Start> when making passport copies?

After selecting <Start>, the first passport is scanned.

What do I do after the first passport is scanned?

Place the next passport on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>. Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the passports.

Can I specify <Density> and <Color Balance> separately for each passport?

Yes, you can specify <Density> and <Color Balance> separately for each passport.

What is the final step for making passport copies?

After scanning all passports, select <Start Printing>.

What do I need to do before I can use the fax functions?

You need to complete some procedures before using the fax functions, such as configuring the initial settings for fax functions and registering destinations in the Address Book.

What are some basic fax operations?

Some basic fax operations include using the Fax Basic Features Screen, performing basic operations for sending faxes, canceling sending faxes, receiving faxes, and checking the status and log for sent and received documents.

What are some useful functions I can use when sending faxes?

Some useful functions when sending faxes include recalling previously used settings for sending (Recall Settings), sending a fax after a phone call (Manual Sending), and saving a copy of a sent original.

How do I receive faxes based on my needs?

You can choose from various receiving methods, including saving received documents into the machine (Memory Reception) and forwarding all received documents automatically.

Can I send faxes directly from my computer?

Yes, you can send faxes directly from your computer using the PC Fax function.

Can I send and receive faxes via the Internet?

Yes, you can send and receive faxes via the Internet using the Internet Fax (I-Fax) function.

What is displayed when I select <Fax> in the Home screen?

Selecting <Fax> in the Home screen displays the FAX Basic Features screen, which appears when you are sending faxes.

What are the different tabs on the FAX Basic Features Screen?

The FAX Basic Features screen has the following tabs:

• <Enter Dest.> tab: This tab allows you to directly enter a destination.
• <Specify Destination> tab: This tab allows you to search for an LDAP server, enter a coded dial, or specify a destination using the recall settings.
• <TX/RX Settings> tab: This tab allows you to specify the scanning settings and change the RX mode of the machine.

What other options are available on the FAX Basic Features screen?

The FAX Basic Features screen also has the following options:

• <Confirm Destination>: This option allows you to check the name and fax number of specified destinations, as well as the number of specified destinations. You can also change the fax number or cancel the specification of destinations.

• <Address Book>: This option allows you to specify destinations that are registered in the Address Book.

• <Reset>: This button allows you to collectively restore the default settings.

• <Start>: This button starts the faxing process.

What are the basic steps for sending a fax?

The basic operation procedure for faxing an original is as follows:

1. Place the original(s).
2. Select <Fax> in the Home screen.
3. Select <Reset> in the Fax Basic Features screen.
4. Specify the destination.
5. Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
6. Select <Start>.

Why should I always reset the settings in the Fax Basic Features screen before sending a fax?

Resetting the settings in the Fax Basic Features screen before sending a fax ensures that destinations set by the previous user are not still selected. This can prevent transmission errors.

What are the options for specifying a destination when sending a fax?

The options for specifying a destination when sending a fax are as follows:

• Specifying from Address Book
• Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers
• Entering Destinations Directly
• Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server

How do I specify a destination from the Address Book?

The Address Book allows you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient names. To specify a destination from the Address Book, follow these steps:

1. Select <Address Book>.
2. Select an index.
3. Select the check box for the desired destination, and select <Apply>.

What do I need to do before I can specify a destination from the Address Book?

You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature.

What happens if a destination is selected from <Address Book> in the Home screen?

If a destination is selected from <Address Book> in the Home screen, the Fax Basic Features screen can be displayed while the selected destination remains being specified.

How do I specify a destination using coded dial numbers?

Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address Book. This allows you to specify an address by entering its coded dial number. To specify a destination from coded dial numbers, follow these steps:

1. Select <Coded Dial> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2. Enter a three-digit number.

What should I do if I enter an incorrect value when specifying a destination from coded dial numbers?

If you enter an incorrect value, use the backspace key to clear it.

What happens if <Confirm When Coded Dial TX> is set to <On>?

If <Confirm When Coded Dial TX> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the destination and the name for the number. For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are shown.

What should I do if the confirmation screen appears?

Check the contents of the confirmation screen, and if everything is correct, select <OK>. To specify a different destination, select <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number.

What should I do if the destination I want to specify is not registered in the Address Book?

If a destination is not registered in the Address Book, specify it by entering a fax number.

How do I directly enter a destination when sending a fax?

To directly enter a destination, follow these steps:

1. Enter the fax number in the <Enter Dest.> tab.

What should I do if I enter an incorrect value when entering a fax number?

If you enter an incorrect value, use the backspace key to clear it.

How do I add a second or subsequent destination?

To enter a second or subsequent destination, select <Next Dest.>.

What happens if <Confirm Entered Fax Number> is set to <On>?

If <Confirm Entered Fax Number> is set to <On>, the input screen reappears so that you can confirm the destination. You will need to enter the destination again.

How do I send a fax abroad?

To send a fax abroad, enter the international access code, the country code, and the fax number to specify the destination.

What should I do if I am unable to successfully connect to a recipient?

If you are not able to successfully connect to a recipient, select <Pause> and insert a pause between numbers.

How do I specify a destination using an LDAP server?

If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can specify a destination using user information in the server. To specify a destination using an LDAP server, follow these steps:

1. Select <LDAP Server> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2. Select the LDAP server you are using.
3. Select the conditions for user information to be searched.
4. Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.
5. Select <Search Method>.
6. Select conditions to display the search result.
7. Select <Start Search>.
8. Select the check box for the user that you want to specify as destination, and select <Apply>.

What information can I use as search criteria when specifying a destination using an LDAP server?

Name, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for searching destinations.

Can I specify multiple search criteria when searching for a destination using an LDAP server?

Yes, to specify multiple search criteria, repeat the steps for selecting the search conditions and entering the search target character string.

What are the search method options when specifying a destination using an LDAP server?

The search method options are:

• <Using All Conditions Below>: This searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specified.

• <Using Some Conditions Below>: This displays all users that meet even one of the criteria specified.

What happens if the authentication screen appears when I select <Start Search>?

If the authentication screen appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the username of the machine and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>.

What happens when the users meeting my search criteria are displayed?

Select the checkbox for the user that you want to specify as the destination, and select <Apply>.

How do I send a fax to multiple destinations at a time?

To send a fax to multiple destinations at a time (sequential broadcast), repeat the appropriate steps to enter all destinations. You can also recall previously used destinations.

How do I delete a destination if I specified multiple destinations?

To delete a destination if you specified multiple destinations, follow these steps:

1. Select <Confirm Destination>.
2. Select the checkbox for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.
3. Select <Yes>.

Can I view the destinations registered in a group?

Yes, if you select the Group Dial checkbox, you can view the destinations registered in the group by selecting <Details> then <Destination>.

How can I adjust the image quality of a fax?

You can adjust the image quality of a fax by:

• Adjusting the resolution
• Adjusting the density
• Adjusting the sharpness

How do I select the resolution for a fax?

To select the resolution for a fax, follow these steps:

1. Select <Resolution> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab.
2. Select the desired resolution.

What is the relationship between resolution and image quality and sending time?

The higher the resolution, the clearer the image becomes, but the longer it takes to send.

How do I adjust the density of a fax?

To adjust the density of a fax, follow these steps:

1. Select <Density> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab.
2. Adjust the density.
3. Select <Apply>.

When is it appropriate to adjust the density of a fax?

You can adjust the density of the fax if the text or images in an original are too light or dark.

How do I adjust the sharpness of a fax?

To adjust the sharpness of a fax, follow these steps:

1. Select <Sharpness> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab.
2. Adjust the sharpness.
3. Select <Apply>.

When would I want to increase the sharpness of an image?

Increase the sharpness to sharpen blurred text and lines.

When would I want to decrease the sharpness of an image?

Decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of magazine photos.

How can I scan 2-sided originals?

The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of originals in the feeder. To scan 2-sided originals, follow these steps:

1. Select <2-Sided Original> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab.
2. Select either <Book Type> or <Calendar Type>.

When can the machine not scan both sides of originals automatically?

The machine cannot scan both sides of originals automatically when the originals are placed on the platen glass or when the machine is set to Manual Sending.

When do I select <Book Type>?

Select <Book Type> for originals whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.

When do I select <Calendar Type>?

Select <Calendar Type> for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.

What happens after I select <Start> when sending a fax?

After selecting <Start>, if the <Confirm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct and then select <Start Scanning>. The original will then begin to scan.

How do I cancel sending a fax?

If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> then <Yes>.

What happens if I placed originals in the feeder in step 1?

If you placed originals in the feeder in step 1, when scanning is complete, the faxes are sent.

What happens if I placed originals on the platen glass in step 1?

If you placed originals on the platen glass in step 1, when scanning is complete, you need to continue with the following steps:

1. Select the original size.
2. Place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>. Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages.
3. Select <Start Sending>.

What happens after I select <Start Sending>?

The faxes are sent.

What are some other functions I may want to use or adjust when sending faxes?

You may also want to:

• Change the default settings for functions if you always want to send faxes with the same settings.

• Register a combination of settings to use when needed if you want to register frequently used settings.

• Adjust <Off-Hook Alarm> settings if you want to sound an alarm when the handset is off the hook.

How can I cancel sending faxes immediately after selecting <Start>?

If you want to cancel sending faxes immediately after selecting <Start>, select <Cancel> on the display or press the Stop button on the operation panel.

Can I cancel sending faxes after checking the fax status?

Yes, you can also cancel sending faxes after checking the fax status.

How do I cancel a fax using the Stop button?

If the screen displays a list of documents when the Stop button is pressed, this means that originals have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. To cancel, select the document you want to cancel, and then select <Cancel> followed by <Yes>.

How do I cancel a fax transmission by checking the transmission status?

To cancel a fax transmission by checking the transmission status, follow these steps:

1. Select <Status Monitor>.
2. Select <TX Job>.
3. Select the document in the <TX Job Status> tab.
4. Select <Cancel>.
5. Select <Yes>.

What paper sizes can be used to print received fax documents?

The machine can print received fax documents on A4 or Letter size paper.

What might happen if I print received fax documents on a paper size other than A4 or Letter size?

If received fax documents are printed on paper sizes other than A4 or Letter, a portion of the page may not be printed or a page may be printed on two separate sheets of paper.

What are the different methods for receiving faxes?

The machine provides the following receiving methods:

• <Auto>: The machine receives faxes automatically. Even if someone makes a call to you, you cannot talk to the caller.

• <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>: The machine automatically receives a fax when the call is a fax. When the call is a telephone call, an incoming call rings. You can pick up the handset to answer the call.

• <Manual>: When the call is a fax, an incoming call rings. Pick up the handset. If you hear a beep, select the * button, then <Fax> followed by <Start Receiving> to receive faxes. When the call is a telephone call, an incoming call rings. Pick up the handset and start your conversation.

What must I do before using the <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)> receiving method?

You need to connect your telephone to the machine before using the <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)> receiving method.

What must I do before using the <Manual> receiving method?

You need to connect your telephone to the machine before using the <Manual> receiving method.

How do I set up the machine to receive faxes?

After selecting the method that best suits your needs, you can set up the machine to receive faxes by following the setup procedure.

How do you set the machine to automatically receive faxes when an incoming call rings within a specified timeframe?

Switch to Auto RX. When the call is a fax, after an incoming call rings, the machine receives the fax automatically. When the call is a telephone call, the answering machine activates, enabling the caller to leave a message. You can talk with the caller if you pick up the handset before the answering machine starts recording a message. You need to connect your answering machine to the machine beforehand.

What are the recommendations for setting up the answering machine to receive faxes automatically?

Set the answering machine to answer after a few rings. Add approximately 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the message or set the maximum recording time to 20 seconds.

What is Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)?

If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone company, this receiving mode is available. This service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line. You can use one of these numbers for faxes and one for telephone calls. When the machine receives a call, it automatically recognizes the ring pattern, and your telephone rings differently depending on whether the call is a fax or a telephone call. If the ring pattern is for a fax, the machine automatically receives the fax.

Where can I get more information about DRPD?

Contact your telephone company.

What do I need to do before using DRPD?

Connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.

Why might my machine not be able to send or receive faxes properly?

Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or receive faxes properly.

What should I do if I am connecting an external telephone with fax functions?

Set the telephone to not receive faxes automatically.

What does it mean if I pick up the telephone handset and hear a beep?

The call is a fax. You can receive the fax just by using the telephone to enter a specific ID number.

How do you set up the machine to receive faxes?

1. Select <Fax> in the Home screen. If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
2. Select <RX Mode> in the <TX/RX Settings> tab of the Fax Basic Features screen.
3. Select the receiving method.

What settings need to be specified when selecting <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)> as the receiving method?

• <Ring Start Time>: Enables you to specify the duration during which the machine determines whether an incoming call is a fax or a telephone call.
• <Incoming Ring Time>: Enables you to specify the duration during which an incoming call rings for a telephone call.
• <Action After Ring>: Enables you to specify how the machine operates if you do not pick up the handset while an incoming call is ringing. Select <End> to disconnect the call or <Receive> to receive an incoming fax.

When the setting is complete, select <Apply>.

What do you do when selecting <DRPD> as the receiving method?

Select the ring pattern that your telephone company assigned to your fax number.

How do you print received documents on both sides of the paper?

Select <Print on Both Sides>.

How do you print information, such as reception date and time, at the bottom of received documents?

Select <Print RX Page Footer>.

How do you continue printing even when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low?

Select <Continue Print. When Cart. Low>.

How do you use a telephone to receive faxes (Remote Reception)?

When you pick up the telephone and get a fax signal, you do not need to go to the machine to receive the fax. Just enter a specific ID number with the telephone, and you can start receiving the fax. When the telephone is not directly connected with the machine, the remote reception function is not available.

What are the steps for using a telephone to receive faxes (Remote Reception)?

1. When an incoming call rings, pick up the telephone handset.
2. If you hear a beep, enter the ID number for Remote Reception with the telephone.
3. Hang up the handset.

How do you recall previously used settings for sending (Recall Settings)?

You can recall the destinations specified in the past. When you specify a previously used destination, the machine also sets the same fax settings such as density you used the last time you sent documents to that destination.

When is the Recall Settings feature not available?

• When <Restrict Resending from Log> is set to <On>.
• Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations, and disables this feature.
• The destinations in Manual Sending are not available for this feature.
• When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specified are deleted.

What are the steps for recalling previously used settings for sending?

1. Place the original(s).
2. Select <Fax> in the Home screen. If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
3. Select <Reset> in the Fax Basic Features screen. If the destinations set by the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset the settings before sending.
4. Select <Recall Settings> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
5. Select the destination. When you transmit to multiple destinations, only the address specified for the first transmission is displayed in the log, but all the destinations are specified. The selected destination and the fax settings used at the time are specified. You can also change the settings before sending.
6. Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
7. Select <Start>. If the <Confirm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select <Start Scanning>. Scanning of the original starts. If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>.

How do you delete destinations when using the Recall Settings feature?

When you transmitted to multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1. Select <Confirm Destination>.
2. Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>. If you select the Group Dial check box, you can view the destinations registered in the group by selecting <Details> <Destination>.
3. Select <Yes>.

What happens when scanning is complete when placing originals in the feeder in step 1 of recalling previously used settings for sending?

The faxes are sent.

What are the steps to take when scanning is complete when placing originals on the platen glass in step 1 of recalling previously used settings for sending?

1. Select the original size. When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to step 3.
2. Place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>. Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages.
3. Select <Start Sending>. The faxes are sent.

How do you send a fax after a phone call (Manual Sending)?

You can send faxes manually at the end of a phone conversation. When you hear a beep over the phone, it means the recipient is trying to receive your faxes. Select <Start> to send your faxes. You need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.

What are the limitations of Manual Sending?

• The machine cannot automatically scan both sides of the originals in Manual Sending.
• When the original is placed on the platen glass, only one page can be sent.

What are the steps for sending a fax after a phone call (Manual Sending)?

1. Place the original(s).
2. Select <Fax> in the Home screen. If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
3. Select <Reset> in the Fax Basic Features screen. If the destinations set by the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset the settings before sending.
4. Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
5. Dial the recipient’s fax number.
6. Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive your faxes. If you hear a beep, proceed to step 7.
7. Select <Start>. If you place the original on the platen glass, select the original size. Scanning of the original starts. If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>.
8. Hang up the handset.

How do you save a copy of a sent original?

In addition to the address specified when the fax is sent, you can also send faxed documents to a preset storage address for archiving. This is useful for keeping a log of what has been sent. You can specify a fax number, an e-mail address, a shared folder on the computer, an FTP server, or an I-Fax as the storage address. Only destinations in the Address Book can be specified as a storage address. To use the Address Book, the destination must be registered beforehand.

What are the steps for saving a copy of a sent original?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings>.
3. Select <Archive TX Document>.
4. Select <On> in <Archive TX Document>. When not using the function for archiving sent documents, select <Off>.
5. Configure storage of sent documents.
   • <Archive Address>: Specify the storage destination of sent documents. In the Address Book, select the check box for the destination to use as the storage location, and select <Apply>.
   • <File Name>: You can specify a character string to be used in the file name when sending a document by E-mail/I-fax or when saving to a shared folder/FTP server. The file name is automatically assigned based on the following format: arbitrary character string_communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).file extension name. When not specifying <File Name>, you can use the following format for file name: communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).file extension name.
6. Select <Apply>.

What are the various receiving methods?

You can store received faxes in the machine’s memory without printing them. You can reduce fax paper waste by checking the detailed information of fax documents and only printing necessary documents.

How do you save received documents into the machine (Memory Reception)?

You can store received faxes into the memory of the machine and then print them later. This feature can prevent unauthorized persons from seeing confidential documents unintentionally.

How do you store documents into memory?

To store received documents into memory, set <Use Memory Lock> to <On>. You can configure a setting to enable you to preview received documents using the Remote UI. You can also specify a setting to activate the Memory Reception function only during a specified period of time of the day.

What are the settings for storing documents into memory?

• <Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Common Settings> <Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox> <Fax Memory Lock Settings> Select <On> in <Use Memory Lock> Specify each setting <Apply>
• <Use Fax Preview>: Specify whether to preview received documents stored in memory. Select <On> to preview the documents using the Remote UI.
• <Report Print>: Enables you to print RX Result reports every time documents are stored into memory. To print reports, select <On>. You also need to set <RX Result Report> to <On>.
• <Set Memory Lock Time>: Specify whether to activate the Memory Reception function only during a specific time frame of the day. Select <On> to activate the Memory Reception function only during a time frame specified in <Memory Lock Time>.
• <Memory Lock Time>: Set the time to start and end the Memory Reception function. You cannot specify <Use Fax Preview> and <Set Memory Lock Time> at the same time.

How do you print documents in memory?

To print received documents in memory, set <Use Memory Lock> to <Off>. All the documents in memory are printed. You cannot select a specific document for printing. If a time for the feature to deactivate has been specified, the documents are automatically printed at the specified time.

What are the steps for printing documents in memory?

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Common Settings> <Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox> <Fax Memory Lock Settings> Select <Off> in <Use Memory Lock> <Apply>

How do you check/forward/delete documents in memory?

You can check an outline of each document stored in memory, including sender fax numbers and the number of pages sent. You can also select and forward a document stored in memory and delete an unnecessary document if any.

What are the steps for checking/forwarding/deleting documents in memory?

1. Select <Status Monitor>.
2. Select <RX Job>.
3. In the <RX Job Status> tab, select the document you want to check/forward/delete. This displays detailed information about the document. To forward the document, select <Forward>, and specify the appropriate destination. To delete the document, select <Delete> <Yes>.

How do you forward received documents automatically?

The machine can forward all the received documents to specified destinations. Even if you are out of the office, you can receive fax information anytime, anywhere.

What are the different settings for forwarding received documents automatically?

• Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically
• Printing Documents to be Forwarded
• Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded

How do you specify settings for documents to be forwarded automatically?

While the Forwarding feature is activated, all the documents to be received are automatically forwarded.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings>.
3. Select <Forwarding Settings> <Forwarding Function>.
4. Select <On> in <Use Forwarding Function>. When not using the forwarding function, select <Off>.
5. Configure the forwarding settings.
   • <Forwarding Destination>: Specify a forwarding destination. In the Address Book, select the check box for a destination to which to forward, and select <Apply>.
   • <File Name>: You can specify a character string to be used in the file name when sending a document by E-mail/I-fax or when saving to a shared folder/FTP server. The file name is automatically assigned based on the following format: arbitrary character string_communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).file extension name. When not specifying <File Name>, you can use the following format for the file name: communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).file extension name.
6. Select <Apply>.

How do you print documents to be forwarded?

If you want to check the documents to be forwarded for yourself, you can set the machine to print the documents whenever they are forwarded, or to print only the documents that failed to be forwarded. <Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings> <Print Images> Select <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>

How do you print/resend/delete documents that failed to be forwarded?

You can store documents that failed to be forwarded in memory and print, resend, or delete them later.

How do you store documents that failed to be forwarded in memory?

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive/Forward> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings> <Store Images in Memory> <Only When Error Occurs>

How do you print/resend/delete documents stored in memory that failed to be forwarded?

1. Select <Status Monitor>.
2. Select <Fax Forwarding Errors>.
3. Select the document you want to print/resend/delete. This displays detailed information about the document. To print the document, select <Print> <Yes>. To resend the document, select <Forward>, select the checkbox for the target destination, and then select <Apply>. To delete the document, select <Delete> <Yes>. You can use the Remote UI to preview the documents that failed to be forwarded.

How do you check the status and log for sent and received documents?

The statuses and communication logs for sent and received fax and I-Fax documents can be checked separately for sending and receiving. When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the communication logs.

What are the steps for checking the status and log for sent and received documents?

1. Select <Status Monitor>.
2. Select <TX Job> or <RX Job>.
3. Check the statuses and communication logs for sent and received documents.

How do you check the statuses for sent and received documents?

1. Select the document whose status you want to check in the <TX Job Status> or <RX Job Status> tab. This displays detailed information about the document. If you specified multiple destinations, the number of specified destinations is displayed on the screen. To check the details of specified multiple destinations, select <Destination>.

How do you check the communication logs for sent and received documents?

1. Select the document whose log you want to check in the <TX Job Log> or <RX Job Log> tab. <OK> is displayed when a document was sent or received successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a document failed to be sent or received because it was canceled or there was some error. This displays detailed information about the document. When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>, this number represents an error code.

How do you register the destination of the sent document to the Address Book?

For a document sent to a destination not registered in the Address Book, you can register that destination to the Address Book by selecting <Regst to Add Book> on the details screen.

How do you send faxes from your computer (PC Fax)?

You can send fax documents created on your computer application directly from your computer. This feature eliminates the need to print documents for faxing and saves paper. You need to specify the basic fax settings and install the fax driver on your computer.

Where can I find more information about how to install the fax driver?

See the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

What is important to note about the fax driver screens in the manual?

Depending on the operating system and the version of the fax driver you are using, the fax driver screens in this manual may differ from your screens.

How do you access the Fax Driver Help?

Clicking [Help] on the fax driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see information that is not in the User’s Guide, including information about driver features such as registering frequently used settings and how to set up those features.

How do I send faxes from my computer?

1. Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box. How you display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the application you are using.
2. Select the fax driver for this machine, and click [Print].
3. Specify the destination.
   • To specify only one destination: Click the [Enter Destination] tab, then set the communication mode and fax number (or URI).
   • To specify multiple destinations at once: Click the [Select Destination] tab, click [Add Destination], set the communication mode and fax number (or URI), and click [OK]. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add concurrent destinations. You can also add a destination by clicking [Add Next Destination] in step 3.
   • If you need to specify a number to dial an outside line, select [Detailed Settings] [Add Outside Dialing Prefix to G3/G4/IP Fax Number] and enter the number in [Outside Dialing Prefix]. The specified number is added to the beginning of the fax number when the machine dials.
   • When the [Confirm Fax Number] or [Confirm URI] field is active, also enter the appropriate number in the field. The setting of whether to confirm entered numbers can be changed in the fax driver screen. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.
4. Click [Send] to send the document.

How do I use Internet Fax (I-Fax)?

The Internet Fax (I-Fax) function allows you to send and receive faxes over the Internet. Originals are sent attached as TIFF images files to e-mail. Since a telephone connection is not used, you can send faxes to distant locations and send documents with many pages without worrying about communications charges. Some advance preparation is required, such as specifying the mail server settings.

How do I send I-Faxes?

To send a fax to a computer or another I-Fax-compatible device, specify an e-mail address instead of a fax number as the destination. If you send an I-Fax to a computer, it is sent as an e-mail attachment in TIFF format. In the same way as when you send e-mail to a computer, you can specify multiple destinations and specify Cc and Bcc destinations.

1. Place the original(s).
2. Select <Scan> in the Home screen.
   • If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
3. Select <I-Fax> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
4. Specify the destination.
5. Specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations, as necessary.
   • Select the method used to specify destinations in the <Specify Destination> tab, and then specify the destination.
   • If you selected <LDAP Server> or <Specify Myself as Destination>, the destination is specified in the <To> field.
   • <Cc> and <Bcc> addresses can only be selected using <Address Book> or <Coded Dial>.
   • If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary. Select <Confirm Destination>, select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>. If you select the Group check box, you can view the destinations registered in the group by selecting <Details> <Destination>. Then select <Yes>.
6. Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
7. Specify the subject, message, and reply-to address for the e-mail as necessary.
   • To specify subject/message: Select <Subject/Message> in the <Send Settings> tab, select <Subject>, enter the subject, and select <Apply>. Select <Message>, enter the message, and select <Apply>. Then select <Apply>.
   • To specify reply-to address: Specify the reply-to address when you want to notify the recipient of an e-mail address different from that of the machine as the reply-to address. Select the target reply-to address from the destinations registered in the Address Book, and specify it. If the destination has not been registered in the Address Book, see “Registering Destinations”. Select <Reply To> in the <Send Settings> tab, select <Specify from Address Book>, select the check box for the desired reply-to address, and select <Apply>. The reply-to address that can be specified is always one of the e-mail addresses registered in the Address Book.
8. Select <Start>.
   • If the <Confirm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select <Start Scanning>.
   • Scanning of the original starts. If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>.
   • When placing originals in the feeder in step 1: When scanning is complete, the I-Faxes are sent.
   • When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1: When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below: If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>. Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages. When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step. Select <Start Sending>. The I-Faxes are sent.
   • If the <SMTP Authentication> screen appears, enter the user name and password, and select <Apply>.
   • The file name of a sent document is automatically assigned based on the following format: communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).file extension name. An arbitrary character string can be added in front of the file name.

What should I do if a send error occurs?

Error notifications are sometimes sent to the e-mail address set to the machine. If you leave it as-is, it may result in an insufficient remaining capacity of the mailbox depending on your mail server. It is recommended that you clear the mailbox periodically. To clear the mailbox: When the mailbox is cleared, all e-mail in the server mailbox is deleted. When you specify the e-mail account that you use usually, you should first check whether any e-mail in the mailbox needs to be kept.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [TX Settings] [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].
4. Click [Clear] in [Clear Mail Box].
5. Read the message that is displayed, and click [OK].
   • E-mail is deleted from the mailbox.

How do I specify a destination from the Address Book?

The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient names. You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature.

1. Select <Address Book> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2. Select <To>.
3. Select an index.
4. Select the check box for the desired destination, and select <Apply>.
   • If a destination is selected from <Address Book> in the Home screen, the Basic Features screen for I-Fax sending can be displayed while the selected destination remains being specified.

How do I specify destinations from coded dial numbers?

Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address Book. You can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number. To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.

1. Select <Coded Dial> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2. Select <To>.
3. Enter a three-digit number.
   • If you have entered an incorrect value, use to clear it. If a confirmation screen appears when <Confirm When Coded Dial TX> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the destination and the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>. To specify a different destination, select <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number.

How do I enter destinations directly?

For a destination that is not registered in the Address Book, specify it by entering an I-Fax address.

1. Select <Use Keyboard> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2. Enter the I-Fax address, and select <Apply>.

How do I specify destinations in an LDAP server?

If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can specify a destination using user information in the server. Access the LDAP server via the machine to search for the appropriate user information and specify it as the destination. You need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand.

1. Select <LDAP Server> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2. Select the LDAP server you are using.
3. Select conditions for user information to be searched.
   • Name, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for searching destinations.
4. Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.
   • To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Select <Search Method>.
6. Select conditions to display the search result.
   • <Using All Conditions Below>: Searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specified in steps 3 and 4.
   • <Using Some Conditions Below>: If users that meet even one of the criteria specified in steps 3 and 4 are found, displays all those users.
7. Select <Start Search>.
   • The users meeting your search criteria are displayed.
   • If the authentication screen appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the user name of the machine and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>.
8. Select the check box for the user that you want to specify as the destination, and select <Apply>.
   • If a screen on which a destination is already specified appears, you can only send to your own e-mail address. To send to other destinations, you must configure the send function authentication settings so that e-mail transmission is not restricted. Contact your administrator for details.

How do I specify destinations from the transmission records?

You can also recall previously used destinations.

What happens when an I-Fax arrives?

When an I-Fax arrives, the Data indicator on the operation panel blinks. After the I-Fax is completely received, the document is printed out automatically and the indicator goes out.

How do I cancel reception?

Select <Status Monitor> <RX Job>, select a document in the <RX Job Status> tab, <Delete>, then <Yes>.

How do I receive I-Faxes manually?

If you want to connect to the server before receiving I-Faxes automatically, or if you want to configure the machine so that it does not receive I-Faxes automatically, use the method below to receive I-Faxes manually. If there is a document on the server, printing begins.

Go to <Status Monitor> <RX Job> <Check I-Fax RX>.

What printout paper is used for I-Faxes?

Regardless of the received document size, incoming I-Faxes are printed at the size specified in <RX Print Size>. If paper of the size specified in <RX Print Size> is not loaded in the paper drawer, the <No Paper> error message is displayed.

How do I print from a computer?

You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver.

How do I print from a computer?

You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as installing the printer driver on your computer.

What is Printer Driver Help?

Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed descriptions that are not in the User’s Guide.

How do I use the optional items?

If the optional cassette feeding module is attached to the machine after installation of the printer driver, perform the following operation on the printer driver. To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

1. Open the printer folder.
2. Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, then click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3. Click the [Device Settings] tab.
4. Select [Paper Source].
5. Select the cassette feeding module from [1-Cassette Feeding Unit] in [Optional Drawer/ Cassette].
6. Click [OK].
7. Click [OK].

What are the basic printing operations?

This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver. Normally, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before proceeding to printing. By setting <Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing> to <On>, you can print from the paper source specified in the printer driver, regardless of the paper settings on the machine.

1. Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2. Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3. Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
   • Switch the tab according to the settings.
4. Click [Print] or [OK].
   • Printing starts.
   • If you want to cancel printing, see “Canceling Prints”.

How do I cancel prints?

You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.

How do I cancel prints from a computer?

You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.

1. Double-click the printer icon.
   • When the printer icon is not displayed, open the printer folder, right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [See what’s printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for this machine).
2. Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document] [Cancel].
3. Click [Yes].
   • Printing of the selected document is canceled.
   • Several pages may be output after you cancel printing. You can also cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI. On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].

How do I cancel prints from the operation panel?

Cancel printing using or <Status Monitor>. If the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed, select the document you want to cancel, and select <Cancel> <Yes>. To check the print job status before canceling, go to <Status Monitor> <Copy/Print Job>, select the document in the <Copy/Print Job Status> tab, <Cancel>, then <Yes>. Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.

How do I check the printing status and log?

You can check the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents. When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the print logs. This is useful when your documents are not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the documents waiting to be printed. Also, when you cannot find your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an error has occurred.

1. Select <Status Monitor>.
2. Select <Copy/Print Job>.
3. Check the print statuses and logs.
   • To check the print statuses: Select the document whose status you want to check in the <Copy/Print Job Status> tab. This displays detailed information about the document.
   • To check the print logs: Select the document whose log you want to check in the <Print Job Log> tab. <OK> is displayed when a document was printed successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a document failed to be printed because it was canceled or there was some error. This displays detailed information about the document. The displayed document name or user name may not reflect the actual document or user name. When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>, this number represents an error code.

What are the various printing methods?

This section describes how to print a document by adding a PIN, and how to print a file stored on a USB memory device without using the printer driver.

What are the many ways to use the machine as a printer?

There are many ways to use the machine as a printer. You can print documents on your computer by using the printer driver or print image files from a USB memory device. Make full use of the print functions to suit your needs.

How do I print from a computer?

You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver.

What are some useful printing functions?

You can assign a PIN to the print data to enhance security or directly print files stored in a USB memory device.

How do I print from mobile devices?

Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to print photos and web pages. The machine also supports Google Cloud Print™.

How do I print a document secured by a PIN (Secure Print)?

By setting a PIN to a document when printing from a computer, the document is held in the memory of the machine, and is not printed until the correct PIN is entered on the operation panel of the machine. This function is called “Secure Print,” and the document that is protected by a PIN is called a “secured document.” Using Secure Print keeps printouts of confidential documents from being left unattended.

How do I print via Secure Print?

This section describes how to print a document from an application as a secured document. The first part of this section describes how to send a secured document to the machine, and the second part of this section describes how to print the secured document on the machine.

How do I send a secured document from a computer to the machine?

1. Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2. Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3. Select [Secured Print] in [Output Method].
   • The [Information] pop-up screen is displayed. Check the message, and click [Yes] or [No].
4. Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
   • Switch the tab according to the settings.
5. Click [Print] or [OK].
   • After the secured document is sent to the machine, it is held in the memory of the machine waiting to be printed.

How do I print out secured documents?

Printing out secured documents sent to the machine. After a valid time period has elapsed, the secured document will be deleted from the memory of the machine and can no longer be printed.

• If secured documents are left unprinted, they occupy the memory and may prevent the machine from printing even ordinary (not secured) documents. Make sure that you print your secured documents as soon as you can.
• You can check how much memory is being used for secured documents. <Status Monitor> <Device Information> <Secure Print Memory Usage>

1. Select <Secure Print> in the Home screen.
   • You cannot proceed to the next step if the <Remote Scanner> screen shown below is displayed. In this case, select to close the screen, and select <Secure Print>.
2. Select the check box for the secured document to print, and select <Start>.
   • You can select multiple documents that have the same PIN.
   • If secured documents from two or more users are stored in memory, the screen for user selection is displayed prior to the screen for file selection. Select your user name.
   • You can collectively delete multiple documents. Select the check box for the secured document to delete, and select <Delete>.
3. Enter the PIN, and select <Apply>.
   • When you select multiple documents with different PINs in step 2, a message is displayed. Select <Close>, and select the secured documents again in step 2.
   • Printing starts.
   • If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel> <Yes>.

How do I change the valid time period for secured documents?

You can change the valid time period from the time secured document data is sent to the machine until the time it is deleted within a certain period of time.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Function Settings>.
3. Select <Secure Print>.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
4. Select <Secure Print Deletion Time>.
   • When <Secure Print Deletion Time> cannot be selected:
     • Set <Use Secure Print> to <On>.
   • Disabling Secure Print
     • Set <Use Secure Print> to <Off>, and then restart the machine.
5. Specify how long the machine holds secured documents, and select <Apply>.
   • The secured document is deleted from the memory of the machine unless it is printed before the time specified here elapses.
6. Select <Apply>.
7. Select <OK>.
8. Restart the machine.

How do I print from a USB memory device (Memory Media Print)?

You can print files directly by connecting a USB memory device to the machine. Using this function, you can print without using a computer. For more information about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove the USB memory device, see Using a USB Memory Device.

• It is necessary to set <Use Print Function> to <On>. <Memory Media Settings>

1. Select <Memory Media Print> in the Home screen.
2. Select the check box for the file to print.
   • You can select multiple files.
   • To clear a selection, select the file you have selected () again.
   • Selecting a folder displays its contents. To return to the folder in the upper level, select [Back].
   • Folders and files in a level deeper than the fifth directory are not displayed.
   • When you move to another folder, the previous file selections will be cleared.

How do I select all files?

1. Select <Select All>.
   • To clear all selections, select <Clear Selection>.
2. If file types are mixed, select <JPEG/TIFF Files> or <PDF Files>.

How do I change the file display method?

You can select the file display method from “Preview”/“Thumbnail”/“Details.”

• Preview
• Thumbnail
• Details

You can specify the file display method used to display the <Memory Media Print> screen. <Default Display Settings>

How do I change the file sort order?

You can change the sort order of the files in a USB memory device.

• You can specify a sort setting such as <Name (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Ascending)> as the default setting for the file sort order. <File Sort Default Settings>

1. Select <Sort Files>.
2. Select the criteria for file sorting.
   • When you select <Date/Time (Ascending)> or <Date/Time (Descending)>, files are sorted based on the modification dates and time of the files.
3. Select <Apply>.
4. Specify the print settings as necessary.
   • You can select <Reset> to restore all the default print settings.

What print settings can I specify?

• <Paper>
  • Select the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing.
    • Uses the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray to print files.
    • Uses the paper that is loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1) of the machine to print files.
    • When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.
    • When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
• <Brightness>
  • You can adjust the brightness of images.
  • When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
• <Number of Copies>
  • Enter the number of copies.
  • When specifying other print settings, select <Close>.
• <2-Sided Printing>
  • You can select 1-sided printing or 2-sided printing.
    • Prints on one side of paper.
    • Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally when bound.
    • Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically when bound.
  • <2-Sided Printing> may not be available with some sizes or types of paper.
• <N on 1>
  • <N on 1> is not available for printing TIFF files.
  • You can select an “N on 1” pattern to print multiple pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
    • Does not apply N on 1.
    • Prints two pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
    • Prints four pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
    • (PDF only) Prints eight pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper.
  • For a PDF file, you can print 9 or 16 pages of image data on one side of a sheet of paper by using <N on 1> under <Set PDF Details>.
• <Set JPEG/TIFF Details>
  • You can change the print settings for JPEG and TIFF images.
    • <2-Sided Printing>
      • You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.
    • <N on 1> (JPEG files only)
      • Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of paper, select <4 on 1>.
    • <Original Type>
      • You can select the type of original depending on the image to print.
        • <Photo Priority> Gives priority to printing photo images smoothly.
        • <Text Priority> Gives priority to printing text clearly.
    • <Halftones>
      • You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
        • <Gradation> Prints images with fine gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth finish.
        • <Error Diffusion> This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
          • The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.
• <Set PDF Details>
  • You can change the print settings for PDFs.
    • <2-Sided Printing>
      • You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.
    • <N on 1>
      • Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of paper, select <4 on 1>.
    • <Print Range>
      • Specify pages you want to print.
        • <All Pages> Prints all pages.
        • <Specified Pages> Specify the range of pages you want to print. Enter the desired value in each of <Start Page> and <End Page>, and select <Apply>.
          • When the specified page range does not match any of the pages of the PDF file, printing is not performed.
    • <Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
      • Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.
    • <Enlarge Print Area>
      • Specify whether to extend the print range to the paper size.
      • If you set to <On>, part of print data may not be printed in edge areas or paper may be partly smudged depending on the document.
    • <Print Comments>
      • This setting specifies whether to print annotations in the PDF file.
        • <Off> Prints no annotations.
        • <Auto> Prints only those annotations that are specified to be printed in the PDF file.
    • <Password to Open Document>
      • You can print password protected PDF files by entering the password required to open them. Enter the password, and select <Apply>.
• <Other Settings>
  • <Halftones>
    • You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. You can make this setting for each of the types of image contained in one document. See <Halftones> for the description of the setting.
  • <Pure Black Text>
    • You can print black text of which color information is “R=G=B=0%,” “C=M=Y=100%,” or “C=M=Y=0%/K=100%,” using only the K (black) toner. See <Pure Black Text> for the description of the setting.
  • <Black Overprint>
    • Specify the printing method used when black text overlaps a colored background or figure. See <Black Overprint> for the description of the setting.
  • <RGB Source Profile>
    • Select the source profile for color matching to print RGB data, according to the monitor you are using. See <RGB Source Profile> for the description of the setting.
  • <CMYK Simulation Profile>
    • This setting allows you to specify the simulation target to print the CMYK (Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK) data. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent CMYK color model based on this simulation. See <CMYK Simulation Profile> for the description of the setting.
  • <Use Grayscale Profile>
    • Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) data using the grayscale profile of the machine. See <Use Grayscale Profile> for the description of the setting.
  • <Output Profile>
    • Select the appropriate profile for print data. This option can be specified for each image type in one document. See <Output Profile> for the description of the setting.
  • <Matching Method>
    • Select the element to be prioritized when making color adjustment in <RGB Source Profile>. See <Matching Method> for the description of the setting.
  • <Composite Overprint>
    • Specify whether to overprint CMYK data, with overprint specified, as composite output. See <Composite Overprint> for the description of the setting.
  • <Grayscale Conversion>
    • Specify the way of printing color data in black and white. See <Grayscale Conversion> for the description of the setting.
• <Print Quality>
  • <Density>
    • Adjust the toner density to be used for printing. See <Density> for the description of the setting.
  • <Toner Save>
    • Selecting <On> prints in toner saving mode. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other appearance characteristics before proceeding to final printing of a large job. See <Toner Save> for the description of the setting.
  • <Gradation>
    • Specify the processing method used to reproduce gradation. <High 2> gives finer gradation than <High 1>. See <Gradation> for the description of the setting.
  • <Density Fine Adjustment>
    • When fine lines or small text are faded, increase the density to give less faded print. See <Density Fine Adjustment> for the description of the setting.
  • <Resolution>
    • Specify the resolution to process print data. See <Resolution> for the description of the setting.
  • <Special Smoothing Mode>
    • Specify the mode to print data with a smooth finish. If the quality of the printout is not acceptable in <Mode 1> (default), try another mode. See <Special Smoothing Mode> for the description of the setting.
  • <Toner Volume Correction>
    • When the toner volume for text or lines exceeds the limit value of the machine, make a correction so that the toner volume does not exceed the limit value. See <Toner Volume Correction> for the description of the setting.
  • <Line Control>
    • Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines. See <Line Control> for the description of the setting.
  • <Width Adjustment>
    • Configure a setting to print text or fine lines in bold. See <Width Adjustment> for the description of the setting.
  • <Advanced Smoothing>
    • Configure the smoothing setting to print the outline of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using applications) or text with a smooth finish. <Level 2> applies a stronger smoothing effect than <Level 1>. You can apply the setting separately for text and graphics. See <Advanced Smoothing> for the description of the setting.
  • <Gradation Smoothing>
    • Configure the smoothing setting to print the gradation (color density) of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using applications) or bit map images with a smooth finish. <Level 2> applies a stronger smoothing effect than <Level 1>. You can apply the setting separately for graphics and images. See <Gradation Smoothing> for the description of the setting.

How do I begin printing from a USB memory device?

1. Select <Start>.
   • Selecting <B&W> starts black and white printing. Selecting <Color> starts color printing.
   • If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel> <Yes>.
   • If you always want to print with the same settings: Memory Media Print

What are the basic operations for scanning originals?

This section describes the basic procedures for scanning originals.

• Scanning
  • Scanning and Saving to a Computer
  • Saving Data to a USB Memory Device
  • Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder or FTP Server
• Operating Jobs
  • Canceling Sending Documents
  • Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals

How do I scan and save to a computer?

The sequence of “scanning an original and saving it to a computer” can only be done when scanning from the machine. Scan while specifying what computer originals will be saved to; whether to scan originals in color or black and white; whether to save originals as PDFs or JPEGs; and other settings. Incidentally, if you want to specify a computer connected to the network as the destination, you must register the machine with the computer in advance (Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner).

1. Place the original(s).
2. Select <Scan> in the Home screen.
   • If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.
3. Select <Computer> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
   • If only a computer connected to the machine via USB is used, proceed to step 5.
4. Select the destination computer.
5. Select the scan type in the Computer Scan Basic Features screen.
   • The scan types and settings that are displayed can be confirmed and changed by using MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
   • If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual website.
6. Select <Start>.
   • Scanning of the original starts.
   • If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>.
   • You cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close the screen before scanning.

How do I scan?

You can scan original documents by using the operation panel of the machine or an application on a computer. Whichever way you use, the scanned originals are converted into electronic file formats such as PDFs. Use the scan function to convert large-volume paper documents into files so that you can organize them easily.

• To use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of software to a computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual website. To connect the machine to your computer via a network, you must register the machine to the installed software. Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner.
• Depending on the operating system and the version of the scanner driver or applications you are using, the screens in this manual may differ from your screens.

What are the basic operations for scanning originals?

You can scan and save originals to your computer by using the operation panel of the machine. You can also save originals to a USB memory device or send them as e-mail attachments.

• Scan Basic Features Screen
• Basic Operations for Scanning Originals
• Canceling Sending Documents
• Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals

How can I enhance the quality of my scans?

You can find instructions on how to resolve problems such as “blurry photos” or “text unreadable due to too deep color of the paper.”

• Scanning Clearly

How can I scan efficiently and reliably?

You can find instructions on how to enhance efficiency when sending data and descriptions of useful settings.

• Useful Scanning Functions

How do I scan from a computer?

You can scan originals placed on the machine from a computer. The scanned originals are saved to the computer. You can scan using MF Scan Utility (included with the machine), or with other applications such as an image-processing or word-processing application.

• Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)

How do I scan from mobile devices?

Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to scan originals set on this machine. Linking with Mobile Devices

What are the features on the Scan Basic Features Screen?

When you select <Scan> in the Home screen, the Scan Basic Features screen appears.

• <Computer> Saves the scanned data to a computer.
• <Remote Scanner> Puts the machine into the online status when originals are scanned from a computer.
• <USB Memory> Saves the scanned data to a USB memory device.
• <E-Mail> Sends the scanned data by e-mail.
• <I-Fax> Sends the scanned data by I-Fax.
• <File> Saves the scanned data to a shared folder or FTP server.

What are the features on the Basic Features Screen for Computer Scanning?

• Scan type
  • Select the scan setting.
• <Start>
  • Use this button to start scanning.

What are the features on the Basic Features Screen for USB Scanning?

• Send Settings
  • The original is scanned based on the settings specified here.
• <Reset>
  • You can collectively restore the default settings.
• <Start>
  • Use this button to start scanning. Selecting <B&W> starts black and white scanning. Selecting <Color> starts color scanning.

What are the features on the Basic Features Screen for E-Mail Sending/I-Fax Sending/File Saving?

• <Specify Destination> tab
  • Select this tab to search for a destination in the Address Book or an LDAP server, enter a coded dial, or specify a destination using the recall settings.
• <Send Settings> tab
  • Select this tab to specify the scanning settings.
• <Confirm Destination>
  • You can check or change the name and address of the specified destination as well as the number of destinations.
• <Reset>
  • You can collectively restore the default settings.
• <Start>
  • Use this button to start scanning. Selecting <B&W> starts black and white scanning. Selecting <Color> starts color scanning.

When scanning is complete, what is displayed on the computer?

The save destination folder.

If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned after scanning is complete, what should you do?

Place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>. Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages. When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

After scanning all pages, what should you select?

<Finish>.

Where is the scanned data saved by default?

The scanned data is saved to the My Documents folder. A subfolder named with the scanning date is created, and the data is saved to that folder.

How can the save destination be changed?

You can change the save destination from the MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

What is necessary to set to <On> to save data to a USB memory device?

It is necessary to set <Use Scan Function> to <On>.

Where should you place the original(s)?

Refer to Placing Originals.

What should you select on the Home screen to save data to a USB memory device?

Select <Scan> in the Home screen. If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.

After selecting <Scan> in the Home screen, what should you select in the Scan Basic Features screen?

Select <USB Memory> in the Scan Basic Features screen.

What should you specify as necessary after selecting <USB Memory> in the Scan Basic Features screen?

Specify the scanning settings as necessary:

• Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original
• Selecting a File Format
• Specifying Orientation of Your Original
• Scanning 2-Sided Originals

How can you specify the scanning size of your original?

Select the original size from <Scan Size>.

How can you select the file format to which originals are scanned?

Select a file format from <File Format>. You can select the file format to which originals are scanned from PDF/JPEG/TIFF. For PDF, you can select Compact PDF that reduces the data size or the PDF format that enables a text search by including text data scanned with OCR (optical character recognition). You can also create a PDF file with enhanced security by encrypting data or adding the signature.

What are the considerations for selecting JPEG, TIFF or PDF file formats?

• If you select JPEG in <File Format> and try to scan an original from the platen glass, you can only scan one page. To scan a multiple-page original all at once, use the feeder. Each page of the original is saved as a separate file. If you select TIFF or PDF, you can scan multiple-page originals either from the platen glass or from the feeder. In this case, whether the original is to be saved as a single file or each page as a separate file can be specified.

• <PDF (Compact)> and <PDF (Compact/OCR)> compress photos and illustrations on originals more than <PDF> and <PDF (OCR)>. The file will be smaller, but the image quality of some originals or the number of originals that can be scanned at once may be lower.

• In <PDF (Compact/OCR)> and <PDF (OCR)> you can configure the settings so that the machine automatically detects the original direction during scanning based on the direction of the text read by the OCR function.

How can you specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single PDF file or create a separate PDF file for each page?

Select the PDF format from <File Format>, then select <Set PDF Details> and select <Off> or <On> from <Divide into Pages>.

How can you specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single TIFF file or create a separate TIFF file for each page?

Select <Set TIFF Details> from <File Format>, then select <Off> or <On> from <Divide into Pages>.

How can you specify portrait or landscape orientation?

Select the original orientation from <Orig. Orientation>.

How can you scan 2-sided originals?

Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type> from <2-Sided Original>.

• <Book Type>: Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.
• <Calendar Type>: Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.

What happens when you select <Start> to scan originals to a USB memory device?

Scanning of the original starts.

If you want to cancel scanning originals to a USB memory device, what should you select?

Select <Cancel> <Yes>.

What starts when scanning is complete when placing originals in the feeder?

The saving process starts.

What should you do when scanning is complete when placing originals on the platen glass?

If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>. Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages. When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step. Then select <Finish>. The saving process starts.

Where is the scanned document stored?

A new folder is created on the USB memory device, and the scanned document is stored in that folder.

What is the file name format of a scanned document saved to a USB memory device?

The file name of a scanned document is automatically assigned based on the following format: the characters SCAN followed by a four-digit number.file extension name. The character string “SCAN” in the file name can be replaced with a different arbitrary character string.

What should you do if you always want to scan with the same settings to a USB memory device?

Refer to Changing the Default Settings for Functions.

What should you do if you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed to scan originals to a USB memory device?

Refer to Registering Frequently Used Settings.

What does this section describe?

This section describes the procedures for scanning originals and sending the scanned data directly from the machine by attaching it to an e-mail or saving it to a shared folder or FTP server.

What needs to be completed before you can send the data directly by e-mail?

Before you can send the data directly by e-mail, you need to complete certain procedures, such as specifying the e-mail server settings. Refer to Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail/Send and Receive I-Fax.

What needs to be completed before you can save the data to a shared folder or FTP server?

Before you can save the data to a shared folder or FTP server, you need to complete certain procedures, such as specifying the location to save the scanned originals to. Refer to Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location and Procedure for Setting a FTP Server as a Save Location.

Where should you place the original(s) to send by e-mail or save to a shared folder or FTP server?

Refer to Placing Originals.

What should you select on the Home screen to send by e-mail or save to a shared folder or FTP server?

Select <Scan> in the Home screen. If the login screen appears, specify the user name, the password, and the authentication server.

After selecting <Scan> in the Home screen, what should you select in the Scan Basic Features screen?

Select <E-Mail> or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen.

After selecting <E-Mail> or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen, what should you specify?

Specify the destination:

• Specifying from Address Book
• Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers
• Entering Destinations Directly (E-Mail Sending)
• Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server
• Specifying from the Address Book on a Mobile Device (E-Mail Sending)

What does the Address Book enable you to do?

The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient names. You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature.

Where should the shared folder or FTP server address be registered?

Register the shared folder or FTP server address from a computer. Refer to Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location and Registering Destinations from Remote UI.

How do you specify a destination from the Address Book?

1. Select <Address Book> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2. Select <To>.
3. Select an index.
4. Select the check box for the desired destination, and select <Apply>.

If a destination is selected from <Address Book> in the Home screen, what will happen?

The Basic Features screen for e-mail sending or file saving can be displayed while the selected destination remains being specified.

What are Coded Dial Numbers?

Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address Book. You can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number. To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.

Where should the shared folder or FTP server address be registered?

Register the shared folder or FTP server address from a computer. Refer to Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location and Registering Destinations from Remote UI.

How do you specify a destination from a Coded Dial Number?

1. Select <Coded Dial> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2. Select <To>.
3. Enter a three-digit number. If you have entered an incorrect value, use to clear it.

What happens when <Confirm When Coded Dial TX> is set to <On>?

A screen is displayed that shows the destination and the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>. To specify a different destination, select <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number. Refer to Displaying Destinations in Address Book.

How do you enter a destination directly for e-mail sending?

For a destination that is not registered in the Address Book, specify it by entering an e-mail address.

1. Select <Use Keyboard> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2. Enter the e-mail address, and select <Apply>.
   • On how to enter text, see Entering Text.

How can you specify destinations in an LDAP Server?

If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can specify a destination using user information in the server. Access the LDAP server via the machine to search for the appropriate user information and specify it as destination. You need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand. Refer to Registering LDAP Servers.

How do you specify destinations in an LDAP Server?

1. Select <LDAP Server> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2. Select the LDAP server you are using.
3. Select conditions for user information to be searched.
   • Name, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for searching destinations.
4. Enter the search target character string, and select <Apply>.
   • On how to enter text, see Entering Text.
   • To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Select <Search Method>.
6. Select conditions to display the search result.
   • <Using All Conditions Below>: Searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specified in steps 3 and 4.
   • <Using Some Conditions Below>: If users that meet even one of the criteria specified in steps 3 and 4 are found, displays all those users.
7. Select <Start Search>. The users meeting your search criteria are displayed.
   • If the authentication screen appears when you select <Start Search>, enter the user name of the machine and the password registered in the LDAP server, and select <Apply>. Refer to Registering LDAP Servers.
8. Select the check box for the user that you want to specify as destination, and select <Apply>.

How can you specify destinations from the address book on a mobile device (e-mail sending)?

You can specify destinations from the address book on your mobile device.

Before using this feature:

• You need to install “Canon PRINT Business” on your mobile device. Refer to Utilizing the Machine through Applications.
• Set <Link Mobile Device Address Book> on the machine to <On>. Refer to <Link Mobile Device Addr. Book>.

How do you specify destinations from the address book on your mobile device?

1. Select <Mobile Portal> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
2. Connect to the mobile device. Refer to Connecting with Mobile Devices.
3. Send an address from the mobile device to the machine.
   • On how to operate on the mobile device side, see “Canon PRINT Business Help.”
   • Information entered on the mobile device side such as subject, message and file name can also be sent to the machine.
4. When a message appears on the display of the machine, select <OK>.

Can you only send to destinations that are not restricted?

You can only send to destinations that are not restricted. To send to other destinations, you must configure the send function authentication settings in such a way that transmission is not restricted. Contact your administrator for details. Refer to LDAP Server Authentication.

Can you recall previously used destinations?

You can also recall previously used destinations. Refer to Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/ Saving (Recall Settings).

How many destinations can be specified when saving data to a shared folder or FTP server?

Only one destination can be specified.

When sending an e-mail, how do you specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations?

Select the method used to specify destinations in the <Specify Destination> tab, and then specify the destination.

• If you selected <LDAP Server> or <Specify Myself as Destination>, the destination is specified in the <To> field.
• <Cc> and <Bcc> addresses can only be selected using <Address Book> or <Coded Dial>.

How do you delete destinations?

If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1. Select <Confirm Destination>.
2. Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.
   • If you select Group, select <Details> <Destination>; you can view the destinations registered in the group.
3. Select <Yes>.

What scanning settings can be specified when sending an e-mail or saving to a shared folder or FTP server?

• Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original
• Selecting a File Format
• Specifying Orientation of Your Original
• Scanning 2-Sided Originals

How can you specify the scanning size of your original?

Select the original size from <Scan Size> in the <Send Settings> tab.

How can you select the file format to which originals are scanned?

Select a file format from <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab. You can select the file format to which originals are scanned from PDF/JPEG/TIFF. For PDF, you can select Compact PDF that reduces the data size or the PDF format that enables a text search by including text data scanned with OCR (optical character recognition). You can also create a PDF file with enhanced security by encrypting data or adding the signature. Refer to Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files.

What are the considerations for selecting JPEG, TIFF or PDF file formats?

• If you select JPEG in <File Format> and try to scan an original from the platen glass, you can only scan one page. To scan a multiple-page original all at once, use the feeder. Each page of the original is saved as a separate file. If you select TIFF or PDF, you can scan multiple-page originals either from the platen glass or from the feeder. In this case, whether the original is to be saved as a single file or each page as a separate file can be specified in Dividing a PDF File by Page or Dividing a TIFF File by Page.

• <PDF (Compact)> and <PDF (Compact/OCR)> compress photos and illustrations on originals more than <PDF> and <PDF (OCR)>. The file will be smaller, but the image quality of some originals or the number of originals that can be scanned at once may be lower.

• In <PDF (Compact/OCR)> and <PDF (OCR)> you can configure the settings so that the machine automatically detects the original direction during scanning based on the direction of the text read by the OCR function. Refer to <OCR (Text Searchable) Settings>.

How can you specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single PDF file or create a separate PDF file for each page?

Select <Set PDF Details> from <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab, select the PDF format then select <Off> or <On> from <Divide into Pages>.

How can you specify whether to convert the original with multiple pages into a single TIFF file or create a separate TIFF file for each page?

Select <Set TIFF Details> from <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab, then select <Off> or <On> from <Divide into Pages>.

How can you specify portrait or landscape orientation?

Select the original orientation from <Orig. Orientation> in the <Send Settings> tab.

How can you scan 2-sided originals?

Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type> from <2-Sided Original> in the <Send Settings> tab.

• <Book Type>: Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.
• <Calendar Type>: Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.

For e-mail, what can be specified as necessary?

You can specify the subject, message, reply-to address, and priority as necessary. Refer to Specifying E-Mail Settings.

What happens when you select <Start> to send an e-mail or save to a shared folder or FTP server?

• If the <Confirm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select <Start Scanning>. Scanning of the original starts.

• If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Refer to Canceling Sending Documents.

What starts when scanning is complete when placing originals in the feeder?

The sending/saving process starts.

What should you do when scanning is complete when placing originals on the platen glass?

If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>. Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages. When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step. Then select <Start Sending>. The sending/saving process starts.

If the <File Authentication> or <SMTP Authentication> screen appears, what should you do?

Enter the user name and password, and select <Apply>.

What is the file name format of a sent document?

The file name of a sent document is automatically assigned based on the following format: communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).file extension name. An arbitrary character string can be added in front of file name. Refer to Configuring a File Name.

What are the error notifications?

Error notifications are sometimes sent to the e-mail address set to the machine. If you leave it as-is, it may result in an insufficient remaining capacity of mailbox depending on your mail server. It is recommended that you clear the mailbox periodically.

How do you clear the mailbox?

When the mailbox is cleared, all e-mail in the server mailbox is deleted. When you specify the e-mail account that you use usually, you should first check whether any e-mail in the mailbox needs to be kept.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Refer to Starting Remote UI.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Refer to Remote UI Screen.
3. Select [TX Settings] [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].
4. Click [Clear] in [Clear Mail Box].
5. Read the message that is displayed, and click [OK].
   • E-mail is deleted from the mailbox.

What should you do if you always want to scan with the same settings to send an e-mail or save to a shared folder or FTP server?

Refer to Changing the Default Settings for Functions.

What should you do if you want to register a combination of settings to use when needed to send an e-mail or save to a shared folder or FTP server?

Refer to Registering Frequently Used Settings.

How do you cancel sending documents?

If you want to cancel sending documents immediately after selecting <Start>, select <Cancel> on the display or press . You can also cancel sending documents after checking the sending status.

• Select <Cancel> to cancel
• Press to cancel

What should you do if the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed?

Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel, and select <Cancel> <Yes>.

How can you check the transmission status before canceling?

Select the document in the <TX Job Status> tab from <Status Monitor> <TX Job>, then select <Cancel> <Yes>.

What can you check regarding scanned originals sent directly from the machine?

You can check the status and log for scanned originals sent directly from the machine. When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the logs for sent documents. Refer to <Display Job Log>.

How can you check the status and log for scanned originals sent directly from the machine?

1. Select <Status Monitor>.
2. Select <TX Job>.
3. Check the statuses and logs for sent documents.

How do you check the statuses for sent documents?

Select the document whose status you want to check in the <TX Job Status> tab. This displays detailed information about the document. If you specified multiple destinations, the number of specified destinations is displayed on the screen. To check the details of specified multiple destinations, select <Destination>.

How do you check the logs for sent documents?

Select the document whose log you want to check in the <TX Job Log> tab. <OK> is displayed when a document was sent successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a document failed to be sent because it was canceled or there was some error. This displays detailed information about the document.

What does a three-digit number represent in the case of <Error>?

This number represents an error code. For more information, see “Troubleshooting (FAQ)” on the online manual website.

How can you register the destination of a sent document to the Address Book?

For a document sent to a destination not registered in the Address Book, you can register that destination to the Address Book by selecting <Regst to Add Book> on the details screen.

When creating files for brochures that contain many pictures or reports written in pencil, what can you do to achieve clearer image quality?

You can adjust density and brightness to achieve clearer image quality. Refer to Adjusting Image Quality, Adjusting Density, and Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness).

How can you select the image quality for the scan depending on the original type?

You can select the image quality for the scan depending on the original type, such as text-only originals, originals with charts and graphs, or magazine photos.

How do you adjust the image quality when saving data to a USB memory device?

Select the original type from <Original Type> after selecting <Scan> <USB Memory>.

How do you adjust the image quality when sending data by e-mail/I-fax or saving data to the server?

Select the original type from <Original Type> in the <Send Settings> tab after selecting <Scan> and specifying destinations in <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File>.

How can I adjust the density of the scan?

You can adjust the density of the scan if the text or images in an original are too light or dark. To do this:

• Select <Scan>.
• Choose <USB Memory>.
• Select <Density>.
• Adjust the density.
• Select <Apply>.

If sending data by e-mail/I-Fax or saving data to the server:

• Select <Scan>.
• Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File>.
• Select <Density> in the <Send Settings> tab.
• Adjust the density.
• Select <Apply>.

How can I adjust the sharpness of an image when scanning?

You can adjust the sharpness of the image when scanning. Increase the sharpness to sharpen blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of magazine photos. For saving data to a USB memory device:

• Select <Scan>.
• Choose <USB Memory>.
• Select <Sharpness>.
• Adjust the sharpness.
• Select <Apply>.

For sending data by E-mail/I-Fax or saving data to the server:

• Select <Scan>.
• Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File>.
• Select <Sharpness> in the <Send Settings> tab.
• Adjust the sharpness.
• Select <Apply>.

What are some useful scanning functions?

The machine is equipped with useful functions, such as those that can create secure PDF files to prevent them from being tampered with, and that can send data again to previously specified destinations.

• Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files
• Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality (Data Size)
• Configuring a File Name
• Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings)
• Specifying E-Mail Settings

Why are digital files vulnerable in terms of security?

Digital files are vulnerable in terms of security because they can be easily viewed or tampered with, leaving no trace. When scanning important documents, you can take appropriate measures, such as encrypting data and adding a device signature to enhance security.

• Encryption and device signature are only available for PDF files.
• Both the encryption and device signature can be used at the same time.

How can I encrypt a PDF file?

You can encrypt and send/save a PDF file by setting a password when scanning originals. The password setting helps reduce the risk of the PDF file being viewed or edited by others.

1. Select <Scan> in the Home screen.
2. Select <USB Memory>, <E-Mail>, or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
3. If you select <USB Memory>, proceed to step 4.
4. Specify the destination, and specify the scanning settings as necessary.
5. Proceed to <Set PDF Details>:
   • For saving data to a USB memory device, select <File Format> then <Set PDF Details>.
   • For sending e-mail/saving data to a shared folder or FTP server, select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab, then <Set PDF Details>.
6. Select the type of PDF format. You can specify whether to enable encryption for each PDF format.
7. Select <Encryption>.
8. Select the encryption level:
   • <Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES> encrypts the file in the 128-bit environment, which can be opened by Adobe Acrobat 7.0 or later.
   • <Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES> encrypts the file in the 256-bit environment, which can be opened by Adobe Acrobat 10.0.
   • <Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES> can be changed to <Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES> with a different compatible version.
9. Enter the encryption password, and select <Apply>.
10. Enter the same password, and select <Apply>.
11. Select <Apply>.

How can I add a device signature?

Convert the scanned original into a PDF file with a device signature. The device signature serves the same purpose as sealing or signing a document; it can be used to check where the file was created and whether the document has been tampered with or falsified after the signature was appended. To assign the device signature to a PDF file, you need to generate the key and certificate for the device signature in advance.

1. Select <Scan> in the Home screen.
2. Select <USB Memory>, <E-Mail>, or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
3. If you select <USB Memory>, proceed to step 4.
4. Specify the destination, and specify the scanning settings as necessary.
5. Proceed to <Set PDF Details>:
   • For saving data to a USB memory device, select <File Format> then <Set PDF Details>.
   • For sending e-mail/saving data to a shared folder or FTP server, select <File Format> in the <Send Settings> tab, then <Set PDF Details>.
6. Select the type of PDF format. You can specify whether to enable encryption for each PDF format.
7. Select <Digital Signatures>.
8. Select <Top Left>.
9. Select <Apply>.

How can I adjust the balance between file size and image quality (data size)?

You can specify the file compression ratio when converting scanned originals into the JPEG format. <Small: Memory Priority> makes the compression ratio higher than normal to create smaller files with lower image quality. On the other hand, <Large: Image Quality Priority> makes the compression ratio lower than normal, creating larger files with higher image quality.

For saving data to a USB memory device:

• Select <Scan>.
• Select <USB Memory>.
• Select <Data Size>.
• Specify the setting.

For sending data by E-mail or saving data to the server:

• Select <Scan>.
• Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<File>.
• Select <Data Size> in the <Send Settings> tab.
• Specify the setting.

How can I configure a file name?

You can specify an arbitrary character string to be used in the file name of a scanned document.

For saving data to a USB memory device:

The file name is automatically assigned based on the following format: arbitrary character string + four-digit number.file extension name.

• Select <Scan>.
• Select <USB Memory>.
• Select <File Name>.
• Enter a character string.
• Select <Apply>.

For sending data by E-mail/I-Fax or saving data to the server:

The file name is automatically assigned based on the following format: arbitrary character string_communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).file extension name.

• Select <Scan>.
• Specify destinations in <E-Mail>/<I-Fax>/<File>.
• Select <File Name> in the <Send Settings> tab.
• Enter a character string.
• Select <Apply>.

How can I recall previously used settings for sending/saving?

You can select a destination from among the past destinations. When you specify a previously used destination, the machine also sets the same scan settings, such as density, you used the last time you sent documents to that destination.

• When <Restrict Resending from Log> is set to <On>, you cannot use this feature.
• Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations and disables this feature.
• When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specified are deleted.

1. Place the original(s).
2. Select <Scan> in the Home screen.
3. Select <E-Mail>, <I-Fax>, or <File> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
4. Select <Recall Settings> in the <Specify Destination> tab.
5. Select the destination.
   • When you transmit to multiple destinations, only the address specified for the first transmission is displayed in the log, but all the destinations are specified.
6. Select <Start>.
   • If the <Confirm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select <Start Scanning>. Scanning of the original starts.
   • If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> then <Yes>.
7. If placing originals in the feeder in step 1, when scanning is complete, the sending/saving process starts.
8. When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1, when scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a file format):
   1. If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>. Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages. When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
   2. Select <Start Sending>. The sending/saving process starts.
9. If the <File Authentication> or <SMTP Authentication> screen appears, enter the user name and password, and select <Apply>.

How can I delete destinations (e-mail/I-Fax)?

If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1. Select <Confirm Destination>.
2. Select the check box for the destination to be deleted, and select <Remove from Dest.>.
   • If you select the Group check box, you can view the destinations registered in the group by selecting <Details>, then <Destination>.
3. Select <Yes>.

What can I do when the selected destination and its scan settings are specified?

You can change the settings before sending.

How can I specify e-mail settings?

When attaching a scanned original to an e-mail, you can specify the subject, message, reply-to address, and priority for the e-mail before sending it.

1. Place the original(s).
2. Select <Scan> in the Home screen.
3. Select <E-Mail> in the Scan Basic Features screen.
4. Specify the destination, and configure the scan settings as necessary.
5. Specify the subject, message, reply-to address, and priority for the e-mail.
6. Select <Start>.
   • If the <Confirm Destination> screen is displayed, check whether the destination is correct, and then select <Start Scanning>. Scanning of the original starts.
   • If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> then <Yes>.
7. If placing originals in the feeder in step 1, when scanning is complete, the e-mails are sent.
8. When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1, when scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a file format):
   1. If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and select <Scan Next>. Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages. When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
   2. Select <Start Sending>. The e-mails are sent.
9. If the <SMTP Authentication> screen appears, enter the user name and password, and select <Apply>.

How do I specify the subject/message?

1. Select <Subject/Message> in the <Send Settings> tab.
2. Select <Subject>.
3. Enter the subject, and select <Apply>.
4. Select <Message>.
5. Enter the message, and select <Apply>.
6. Select <Apply>.

How do I specify the reply-to address?

Specify the reply-to address when you want to notify the recipient of an e-mail address different from that of the machine as the reply-to address. Select the target reply-to address from the destinations registered in the Address Book, and specify it. If the destination has not been registered in the Address Book, you will need to register it.

1. Select <Reply To> in the <Send Settings> tab.
2. Select <Specify from Address Book>.
3. Select the check box for the desired reply-to address, and select <Apply>.

How do I specify priority?

1. Select <Priority> in the <Send Settings> tab.
2. Select a priority level.

What can I do if I always want to scan with the same settings?

You can change the default settings for functions.

What can I do if I want to register a combination of settings to use when needed?

You can register frequently used settings.

What can I do if I want to specify the e-mail sender name?

Select <Register Unit Name>.

How can I use my computer to scan (remote scan)?

To scan from a computer, you can use MF Scan Utility or an application such as an image processing or word processing application. If you use ScanGear MF supplied with the machine, you can configure advanced scan settings. When using the machine with a USB connection, exit sleep mode before scanning.

What is MF Scan Utility?

MF Scan Utility is an application included with the machine that enables you to scan documents or images to a computer. You can forward the scanned data to a specified application, or attach it to an e-mail message. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility. If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual website.

How do I scan using an application?

You can scan images by using an application such as a word-processing or image-processing application, and load the images directly into the application. You do not need to start another application to scan.

How do I scan documents from an application?

You can scan originals from applications such as image-processing or word-processing software. The scanned image is directly loaded in the application, allowing you to edit or process the image immediately. The following procedure varies depending on the application.

• The application must be compatible with TWAIN or WIA*. For more information, see the instruction manual for your application.

*TWAIN is a standard for connecting image input devices, such as scanners, with computers. WIA is a function that is an integrated standard in Windows.

1. Place the original(s).
   • The second or subsequent originals may not be scanned, or an error message may be displayed depending on the application. In such a case, place and scan one original at a time.
   • When <Auto Online> is set to <Off>, you must select <Scan> then <Remote Scanner> in the Home screen to bring the machine online.
2. From the application, select the start scan command. The procedure for selecting the start scan command varies depending on the application. For more information, see the instruction manual for your application.
3. Select the scanner driver for this machine. Select ScanGear MF or WIA. If you select ScanGear MF, you can configure advanced scan settings.
4. Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
5. Click [Scan]. Scanning of the original starts. When scanning is complete, the scanned image is forwarded to an application.

How do I use ScanGear MF?

Click on the ScanGear MF screen, and see the Help.

What is ScanGear MF?

ScanGear MF is a scanner driver included with the machine. You can use ScanGear MF to configure advanced scan settings when you scan. The way of starting ScanGear MF differs depending on the way of scanning from the computer.

How do I start ScanGear MF from MF Scan Utility?

When scanning from MF Scan Utility, click [ScanGear] to start ScanGear MF. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility. If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual website.

How do I start ScanGear MF from an application?

To scan from applications such as image-processing or word-processing software, select ScanGear MF as scanner driver.

What are the functions of ScanGear MF?

• Previewing the image before scanning
• Specifying the scanning area
• Adjusting the detailed image quality

How do I connect with mobile devices?

You can connect with mobile devices via a wireless LAN router (LAN Connection) or directly (Access Point Mode).

How can I utilize the machine through applications?

You can utilize the machine through applications such as AirPrint and Google Cloud Print.

What is AirPrint?

You can use AirPrint to print, scan or fax with Apple devices such as iPhones, iPads, or Macs.

What if AirPrint cannot be used?

You can connect directly to the machine with your Apple device and utilize the machine.

What is Google Cloud Print?

You can print documents created with various applications on your computer, smartphone, or tablet from anywhere as long as you have an Internet connection. Google Cloud Print can be used with web browsers such as Google Chrome or applications compatible with Google Cloud Print.

How can I link my machine with mobile devices?

Linking the machine with mobile devices enables you to use an appropriate application to perform printing, or other operations with ease. You can also operate the machine from mobile devices via remote control to confirm printing status and change the settings of the machine.

There are two methods used to connect a mobile device with the machine:

• Connecting via a wireless LAN router
• Communicating wirelessly and directly with the machine

Select a connection method according to the communication environment and the device you are using.

What are the important notes when connecting to mobile devices?

• Depending on your mobile device, the machine may not operate correctly.
• When [Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)] or [Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)] is enabled in Security Policy, you can use neither Mopria® or AirPrint.

How do I connect to the machine via a wireless LAN router?

If a wireless LAN router is connected to the network connected to the machine, you can establish communication with a mobile device via the wireless LAN router in the same way for a computer. For information about how to connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer. Connect the machine to a router via the wired or wireless LAN.

What are the important notes for connecting via a wireless LAN router?

• To perform the procedures below, use the IPv4 address.
• Select <LAN Connection> and proceed with the procedure, if the <Direct Connection> screen is displayed after <Mobile Portal> is selected in the procedure below.
• For information about the operating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application’s Help or the Canon website (https://global.canon/gomp/).

How do I connect manually via a wireless LAN router?

1. Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
2. Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.

How do I connect using a QR code via a wireless LAN router?

1. Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
2. Select <QR Code>.
3. Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
4. Read the QR code displayed on the screen using the mobile device.

How do I connect using the NFC (Android) via a wireless LAN router?

Before using the NFC, check whether <Use NFC> is set to <On>.

1. Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
2. Enable the NFC settings of the mobile device.
3. Move the mobile device closer to the NFC mark of the machine.

How do I connect to the machine directly?

Even in an environment without a wireless LAN router, using “Access Point Mode,” which can directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly, enables you to connect the mobile device on hand to the machine without difficult settings. Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order:

• Check the network settings of the machine.
• Set the IPv4 address.
• Prepare the mobile device by configuring settings to connect the mobile device to Wi-Fi.
• Put the machine into the connection standby status: <Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> set <Use Direct Connection> to <On>.

What are the important notes for connecting directly?

• For information about the operating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application’s Help or the Canon website (https://global.canon/gomp/).
• It may take time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.

How do I connect manually (direct connection)?

1. Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
   • When any mobile device is already connected, proceed to step 3.
2. Select <Connect>.
3. Configure the Wi-Fi settings from the mobile device using the SSID and network key information that appear on the screen.
4. When the target operation is completed, select <Disconnect>.

How do I connect using a QR Code (direct connection)?

1. Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
   • When any mobile device is already connected, proceed to step 3.
2. Select <Connect>.
3. Select <QR Code>.
4. Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
5. Read the QR code displayed on the screen using the mobile device.
6. When the target operation is completed, then select <Disconnect>.

How do I connect using the NFC (Android) (direct connection)?

Before using the NFC, check whether <Use NFC> is set to <On>.

1. Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.
   • When any mobile device is already connected, proceed to step 3.
2. Select <Connect>.
3. Launch Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
4. Enable the NFC settings of the mobile device.
5. Move the mobile device closer to the NFC mark of the machine.
6. When the target operation is completed, then select <Disconnect>.

What are the important tips for connecting directly?

• Select <Connection Information> on the <Direct Connection> screen to check the connected mobile device.
• When <Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd> is set to <On>, it is not necessary to perform the operation of selecting <Connect>.
• While connecting via direct connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the mobile device you are using.

What are the important notes for connecting directly?

• If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.
• If the status without data transmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during communication by direct connection, the communication may end.
• Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.
• If the machine is used with a wireless LAN, you need to keep the machine connected to the wireless LAN when using direct connection. When the machine is not connected to a wireless LAN or the connection process is not complete yet, the direct connection process cannot begin. If the connection between the machine and the wireless LAN is lost during communication through direct connection, the communication may end.
• When you finish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.
• If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.

How do I utilize the machine through applications?

Perform printing and other operations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various applications, including those exclusive to Canon, are supported.

How do I print using Canon PRINT Business?

This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application’s Help or the Canon website (https://global.canon/gomp/).

What are the important notes when printing using Canon PRINT Business?

• You can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.

How do I print with Canon Print Service?

You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (https://global.canon).

How do I print by Mopria®?

The machine also supports Mopria®. Using Mopria® enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android using common operations and settings, even if manufacturers and models differ. For example, if you are using printers supporting Mopria® made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria® that is located in a place you are visiting, you can print without installing an application exclusive for each manufacturer or model. For more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://www.mopria.org.

How do I confirm Mopria® settings?

1. Log in to the Remote UI with Administrator privileges.
2. Go to [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [Mopria Settings] [Edit].
3. Check that the [Use Mopria] check box is selected.
4. Click [OK].

How do I print with Google Cloud Print?

You can use applications and services which support Google Cloud Print to print from a computer or mobile device without using a printer driver.

What are the AirPrint Settings?

• Configuring AirPrint Settings
• Displaying the Screen for AirPrint

What are the functions of AirPrint?

• Printing with AirPrint
• Scanning with AirPrint
• Faxing with AirPrint

What do I do if AirPrint Cannot Be Used?

See Troubleshooting.

How do I configure AirPrint settings?

You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.

What are the important notes for configuring AirPrint settings?

• For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI.
• If you are using a mobile device, such as an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read “click” as “tap” in this section.

How do I configure AirPrint settings using the Remote UI?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [AirPrint Settings].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Specify the required settings.

How do I configure the required settings for AirPrint?

• [Use AirPrint]: Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.
• [Printer Name]: Enter the name of the machine. If an mDNS name has already been registered in [mDNS Settings], the registered name is displayed.
• [Location]: Enter the location of the machine. If a location has already been registered in [Device Information Settings] ([Device Management] in [Management Settings]), the registered name is displayed.
• [Latitude]: Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed.
• [Longitude]: Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed.

6. Click [OK].

What are the important notes for configuring AirPrint settings?

• If you select [Use AirPrint], the following settings in <Network> are set to <On>.

  • Use HTTP
  • IPP Print Settings
  • IPv4 Use mDNS
  • IPv6 Use mDNS
  • Use Network Link Scan

• If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specified, you may be unable to print any more from the Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name> of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac again.

• Entering the printer name makes it easier to identify multiple printers that support AirPrint.

How do I change the setting of functions available with AirPrint?

If you want to disable functions that you are not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, configure the necessary setting using the operation panel.

How do I change print and fax settings?

To perform printing or fax sending with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.

How do I turn the print and fax function on/off?

You can specify whether to perform printing and fax sending with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.

1. Go to <Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP Print Settings>.
2. Set <Use IPP Printing> to <Off> or <On>.
3. Select <Apply>.

How do I change the TLS setting?

You can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing or sending faxes with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <Off>.

1. Go to <Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP Print Settings>.
2. Set <Allow IPP Printing Only w/ TLS> to <Off> or <On>.
3. Select <Apply>.

How do I change the scan setting?

Configure the scan setting using AirPrint.

How do I set the scan function to enable or disable?

You can turn on/off the scan function available with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.

• If you set this item to <On>, <Use HTTP> under <Network> is set to <On>.

1. Go to <Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Network Link Scan Settings>.
2. Set <Use Network Link Scan> to <Off> or <On>.
3. Select <Apply>.

How do I change TLS settings for scanning?

You can specify whether or not to encrypt TLS communications when scanning data using AirPrint. The factory default setting is <Off>.

1. Go to <Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Network Link Scan Settings>.
2. Set <Use TLS> to <Off> or <On>.
3. Select <Apply>.

How do I display the screen for AirPrint?

You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can configure security function settings.

1. Select [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners], then add the machine to the Mac you are using.
   • If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.
2. Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].
3. Click [Options & Supplies].
4. Click [Show Printer Webpage].
5. Log in to the Remote UI.
   • To change the AirPrint settings, it is necessary to log in as an administrator.

What is the AirPrint-dedicated Page?

When you log in with administrator privileges, the AirPrint-dedicated page is displayed.

What is available on the AirPrint-dedicated page?

• [AirPrint Settings]: Enables you to check the values entered in the AirPrint settings, such as the name and location of the machine. You can click [Edit] to change the settings.
• [Other Settings]
• [Print Security Settings]: Configure the print security settings using TLS or authentication.
• [Scan Security Settings]: Configure the scan security settings using TLS.
• [TLS Settings]: Enables you to change the key and certificate used for TLS.
• [Key and Certificate Settings]: Enables you to generate and install a key and certificate, or request a certificate to be issued.
• [Consumables Information]: Enables you to check the information of each paper source and consumables of the machine and the device version.

What are the system requirements for printing with AirPrint?

One of the following Apple devices is required to print with AirPrint:

• iPad (all models)
• iPhone (3GS or later)
• iPod touch (3rd generation or later)
• Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*

*OS X v10.9 or later when using a USB connection

What is the required network environment for printing with AirPrint?

One of the following environments is required:

• An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN
• An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly
• An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

What are the important notes for printing with AirPrint?

• For printing, it is required to set <Use IPP Printing> to <On>.

How do I print from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch?

1. Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device.
   • For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment.
   • For information on the Direct Connection, see Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode).
2. From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.
3. Tap [Print].
4. Select this machine from [Printer].
   • The printers connected to the network are displayed here. Select this machine in this step.
   • The screen for selecting this machine in [Printer] is not displayed on applications that do not support AirPrint. You cannot print by using those applications.
5. Specify the print settings as necessary.
   • The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6. Tap [Print].
   • Printing starts.

How do I check the print status from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch?

During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice and tap [Print].

How do I print from a Mac?

1. Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.
   • For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment.
2. Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
   • If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.
3. Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
   • How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual or Help for the application you are using.
4. Select the machine in the print dialog box.
   • The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
5. Specify the print settings as necessary.
   • The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6. Click [Print].
   • Printing starts.

What are the system requirements for scanning with AirPrint?

To scan with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed. To scan using TLS, you need a Mac with OS X 10.11 or later installed.

What is the required network environment for scanning with AirPrint?

One of the following environments is required:

• An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN
• An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

What are the important notes for scanning with AirPrint?

• For scanning, it is required to set <Use Network Link Scan> to <On>.
• Before scanning, it is required to put the machine into online state. When the auto online function is set to <Off>, first put the machine into online state by selecting <Scan> <Remote Scanner>, then start the procedure for scanning.
• You cannot scan while settings for operations are being made, or while the machine is performing any operation whatsoever.

How do I scan from a Mac?

1. Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.
   • For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment.
2. Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
   • If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.
3. Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].
4. Click [Scan].
5. Click [Open Scanner].
   • The [Scanner] screen is displayed.
6. Configure the scan settings as necessary.
7. Click [Scan].
   • The original is scanned, and the image is displayed.

What are the system requirements for faxing with AirPrint?

To send faxes with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed.

What is the required network environment for faxing with AirPrint?

One of the following environments is required:

• An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN
• An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

What are the important notes for faxing with AirPrint?

• For faxing, it is required to set <Use IPP Printing> to <On>.

How do I fax from a Mac?

1. Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.
   • For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment.
2. Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
   • If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.
3. Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
   • How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the application you are using.
4. Select this machine in the print dialog box.
   • The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select the fax driver of this machine in this step.

What is the time to automatically establish a disconnection when the direct connection is enabled?

You can specify the time.

How do I connect multiple mobile devices at the same time?

Configure the machine’s SSID and network key arbitrarily.

How do you send a fax?

1. Specify the destination.

2. Click [Fax].

   ➠ Fax sending starts.

What should you do if AirPrint cannot be used?

• Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, first turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10 seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.
• Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.
• Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.
• Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.
• Make sure that the machine is configured to enable execution of jobs from a computer even when no department ID and password are entered.
• For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and that the machine contains a sufficient amount remaining in the toner cartridges.
• For scanning, make sure that the machine’s setting for Network Link Scan is <On>.

What is Google Cloud Print?

Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user with a Google account to print from a smartphone, tablet, or computer connected to the Internet using applications compatible with Google Cloud Print. Unlike conventional printing from a computer, it does not require a printer driver.

What is required when registering the machine and when printing using Google Cloud Print?

An environment in which you can connect to the internet is required when registering the machine and when printing using Google Cloud Print. In addition, the customer is responsible for any fees regarding internet connection.

Is Google Cloud Print available in all countries and regions?

Google Cloud Print may not be available, depending on your country or region.

Does Google Cloud Print support printing from an IPv6 address?

No, Google Cloud Print does not support printing from an IPv6 address.

Is a Google account required to use Google Cloud Print?

Yes, a Google account is required to use Google Cloud Print. If you do not have a Google account, create one on the Google website.

What should you check before configuring cloud printing?

• Make sure that the IPv4 address is specified for the machine, and that the machine is able to communicate with computers on a network.
• Check whether the date and time of the machine are specified correctly.
• If Department ID Management is set, make sure that you can print from a computer without entering a Department ID or PIN.

How do you register the machine with Google Cloud Print?

Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print enables you to print from anywhere using the service.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in as an administrator.

2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

3. Select [Network Settings] [Google Cloud Print Settings].

4. Click [Edit] for [Basic Settings].

5. Select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box [OK].

6. Click [Register] in [Registration Status].

7. Click the URL link displayed for [URL for Registration].

8. Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine.

   ➠Printing can now be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print, such as Google Chrome™.

Where can I find information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print?

For information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print, check the Google Cloud Print home page.

How do you re-register the machine?

To re-register the machine, delete its registration before registering it again.

How do you configure settings on the Operation Panel?

You can also enable or disable the Cloud Print function from <Menu> in the Home screen.

How do you register from a Mobile Device or Google Chrome?

You can register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine’s display shows the confirmation screen before completion of the registration. Press <Yes> to complete the registration. For information on registration methods, see the manual of your device or the Google Cloud Print website.

How do you manage the machine by the Remote Control?

You can use the Remote UI from a smart phone or tablet Web browser. You can confirm the machine status or perform various settings from a mobile device. Note that the Remote UI screen may not be displayed properly for some devices and environments.

How do you start the Remote UI from Mobile Devices?

Enter the IP address of the machine on the Web browser to start the Remote UI. Prior to operation, confirm the IP address set for the machine. If it is unknown, ask your network administrator.

1. Start the Web browser of the mobile device.
2. Enter “http://<the IP address of the machine>/” in the address entry column.

What should you do if you want to use an IPv6 address?

If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets. Example: http://[fe80:2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/

Is there a difference between the Smartphone Version and PC Version of the Remote UI?

For a “Smartphone Version” of the Remote UI, a portion of items displayed are omitted. If you want to confirm all of the items, see the “PC Version.”

How do you manage the machine?

To reduce the various risks associated with the use of this machine, such as leaks of personal information or unauthorized use by third parties, constant and effective security measures are required. An administrator should manage important settings, such as access privileges and security settings, to ensure that the machine is used safely.

◼ Configuring the Basic Management System

• Setting Access Privileges
• Configuring the Network Security Settings

◼ Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse

• Restricting the Machine’s Functions
• Increasing the Security of Documents

◼ Ensuring Effective Management

• Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)

◼ Managing the System Configuration and Settings

• Updating the Firmware
• Initializing Settings

How do you set access privileges?

Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine. Access privileges are set separately for system administrators, general users, and the Remote UI. When privileges are set, the user must enter an ID and PIN to print or change settings. Set up an account with full access privileges called “System Manager ID” for a system manager. Registering an account called “Department ID” allows you to manage general users. Using a Department ID, you can set a PIN for using this machine as well as keep track of the number of pages printed for each department ID. And by setting a Remote UI Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI.

What is the System Manager ID?

System Manager ID is an account with full access privileges. If you specify a System Manager ID, you need to log on to the machine using the System Manager ID information in order to access items that requires administrator privileges such as <Network> and <Management Settings>. We recommend that you set and register the System Manager ID. Otherwise, anyone will be able to change the machine settings. Only one System Manager ID can be registered.

What is the Department ID (Department ID Management)?

You can specify access privileges for a user (or group of users) by registering a Department ID. You can register multiple Department IDs. If a user tries to operate the machine when Department IDs are enabled, a login screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Information such as how many pages have been printed for each Department ID can be compiled.

What is the Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)?

This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI.

What are the Authentication Settings for Send Function (Authorized Send)?

If your system has an LDAP server installed, you can set LDAP server authentication to be carried out when the fax or scan function is used.

How do you set the System Manager ID and PIN?

Set the system manager account, “System Manager ID.” You can also set a PIN for the System Manager ID. If the System Manager ID is specified, you can access items that require administrator privileges, for example, <Network> and <Management Settings>, only when the System Manager ID and PIN have been entered correctly. The System Manager ID settings information is critical to the security of the machine, so make sure that only Administrators know the System Manager ID and PIN.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

2. Select <Management Settings>.

3. If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

4. Select <User Management> <System Manager Information Settings>.

5. Select <System Manager ID and PIN>.

6. Specify the System Manager ID and PIN.

   • Specify the <System Manager ID> <System Manager PIN>.
   • Enter numbers for each item, and select <Apply>.
   • The Confirm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to confirm.

Can you register an ID or PIN that consists only of zeros, such as “00” or “0000000”?

No, you cannot register an ID or PIN that consists only of zeros, such as “00” or “0000000.”

How do you cancel the System Manager ID and PIN settings?

To cancel the System Manager ID and PIN settings, clear the information you entered in and select <Apply> with the fields blank.

How do you set the System Manager Name?

1. Select <System Manager Name>.
2. Enter the System Manager Name, and select <Apply>.

What should you do if you forget your PIN?

Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

How do you configure settings via the Remote UI?

• Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registration] [User Management] [System Manager Information] [Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.
• By using the Remote UI, you can register a variety of information, including contact information, Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as the settings that you can register by using the operation panel. The registered information can be viewed on the [Device Information] page of the Remote UI.

How do you log in to the machine?

• If you try to access items that require administrator privileges, for example, <Network> and <Management Settings>, when the System Manager ID is specified, the Login screen is displayed.
• You must also enter the System Manager ID and PIN to log in using the Remote UI in System Manager Mode.

How do you set the Department ID Management?

You can control access to the machine by using multiple IDs for multiple users or groups. If a user tries to operate the machine when Department ID Management is enabled, a login screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own Department ID and PIN to use the machine. When Department ID Management is enabled, usage of functions, such as printing, is recorded for each Department ID. To configure Department ID Management, register department IDs as necessary and then enable Department ID Management function. When you want to enable Department ID Management for jobs from a computer, you need to configure additional settings on the computer side.

How do you register/edit department ID and PIN?

Register a Department ID and set a PIN for it. Register all the department IDs to be managed.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [User Management] [Department ID Management].
4. Register or edit Department IDs.

How do you register a department ID?

1. Click [Register New Department].

2. Specify the required settings.

   • [Department ID] Enter the Department ID number to be registered.
   • [Set PIN] To set a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Confirm] text boxes.
   • [Restrict Functions] You can restrict the number of pages to print and the available functions for departments to be registered. To restrict the number of pages to print, select the check box for the target type, and enter the appropriate number of pages in [Number of Pages]. Select the check box for the target functions to restrict functions.

3. Click [OK].

What happens if the [Restrict Scan] check box is selected?

If the [Restrict Scan] check box is selected, the Save to USB Memory Device, Send E-mail, and Save to Shared Folder or FTP Server functions are all restricted. You can also restrict other methods that scan documents by importing them to a computer, but in that case you cannot block access for each Department ID.

How do you edit the settings of the registered department ID?

1. Click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] to edit.
2. Change the settings as necessary and click [OK].

How do you delete a department ID?

Click [Delete] on the right of the Department ID you want to delete click [OK].

What is [Department ID Page Total]?

You can check the total number of pages for jobs that have been executed to date on a department ID basis.

How do you return the counts to zero?

If you want to return the counts to zero, click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] and click [Clear Count] [OK]. If you want to return the counts of all Department IDs to zero, click [Clear All Counts] [OK].

How do you use control cards?

• When the optional Copy Card Reader-F is attached to the machine, Department IDs will be registered automatically.
• Do not delete the registered department IDs. The control cards that correspond to the deleted department IDs will become unavailable.
• You cannot use [Restrict Functions] to restrict the allowable number of pages to print.

How do you enable the Department ID management?

After you register as many Department IDs as necessary, enable Department ID Management.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [User Management] [Department ID Management].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Select the [Department ID Management] check box.
6. Click [OK].

What does [Department ID Management] do?

Select the check box to enable Department ID Management. If you do not want to use Department ID Management, clear the check box.

How do you access Department ID Management settings using the operation panel?

Department ID Management settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.

What happens when you try to operate the machine when Department ID Management is enabled?

When you try to operate the machine when Department ID Management is enabled, the login screen is displayed.

How do you enable the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer?

When you want to enable Department ID Management for jobs from a computer, you need to specify the department ID and PIN using the driver pre-installed on each computer. To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

1. Open the printer folder.

2. Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].

3. Click the [Device Settings] tab.

4. Select [Department ID Management] under [User Management].

5. Click [Settings] found to the right.

6. Specify the settings as necessary and click [OK].

   • [Allow PIN Setting] Select the check box to enable the PIN setting.
   • [Department ID] Enter the Department ID number.
   • [PIN] Enter the PIN corresponding to the Department ID as necessary.
   • [Verify] Click to verify that the correct ID and PIN are entered. This function is not available if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices) port.
   • [Confirm Department ID/PIN When Printing]/[Confirm Department ID/PIN When Sending Faxes] Select the check box to display the [Confirm Department ID/PIN] pop-up screen each time you send job from a computer.
   • [Do Not Use Department ID Management When B&W Printing] Select the check box to send black and white print data as an unknown ID job.
   • [Authenticate Department ID/PIN at Device] Select the check box if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD port.

7. Click [OK].

What happens when you try to send a job from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled?

When you try to send job from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled, the following pop-up screen is displayed (unless the [Confirm Department ID/PIN When Printing]/[Confirm Department ID/PIN When Sending Faxes] check box is cleared).

How do you block jobs when the Department ID is unknown?

If you do not change the default settings, any user can print from a computer, scan (via <Computer> and <Remote Scanner>), send a PC fax from a computer, or make black and white copies without entering an ID and PIN even when Department ID Management is enabled for the machine. You can change the default settings so that the machine cannot be used for these functions without a correct ID and PIN.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

3. Select [User Management] [Department ID Management].

4. Click [Edit].

5. Clear the check boxes as necessary.

   • [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs] In order to send job from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled, you need to enter the correct ID and PIN. However, if the check box is selected for this setting, jobs are executed even when the ID and PIN are not entered. When you want to configure a setting so that no jobs are executed unless the correct department ID and PIN are entered, clear the check box.
   • [Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] If the check box is selected, you can select <Computer> or <Remote Scanner> on the main screen and scan documents into a computer anytime. If the check box is cleared, you cannot scan documents into a computer if Department ID Management is enabled. It is not possible to restrict scanning of documents into a computer for individual department IDs.
   • [Allow Black & White Copy Jobs] If the check box is selected when Department ID Management is enabled, you can copy in black and white without entering the correct ID and PIN. Clear the check box to require entering an ID and PIN.

6. Click [OK].

How do you set a Remote UI PIN?

You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN. When Department ID Management is enabled, setting here is not required.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

2. Select <Management Settings>.

3. If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

4. Select <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI Settings> <Restrict Access>.

5. Select <On>.

6. Specify the Remote UI Access PIN.

   • Enter a PIN, and select <Apply>.
   • The Confirm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to confirm.
   • You cannot register a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as “00” or “0000000.”

What should you do if you forget your PIN?

Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, use the procedure above to set a new PIN.

What happens if <Management Settings> are initialized?

The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN.

How do I configure LDAP server authentication?

If your system has an LDAP server installed, you can ensure LDAP server authentication is carried out when the send function is used. This enables you to prevent unauthorized use by third parties and information disclosure. Once the authorization settings are enabled, the Authorized Send screen appears when the fax or scan function is used and operation can only continue if it is correctly authorized by the LDAP server.

How do I enable LDAP server authentication?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [TX Settings] [Authentication Settings for Send Function].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Select the [Use User Authentication] check box and select whether a confirmation screen is displayed at logout.

What does the [Use User Authentication] check box do?

Selecting the [Use User Authentication] check box displays the Authorized Send login screen when the fax or scan function is used (LDAP server authentication).

What does the [Display Confirmation Screen When Logging Out] check box do?

Selecting the [Display Confirmation Screen When Logging Out] check box displays a screen that allows you to selectively log out when you are logged on for both Authorized Send and Department ID Management. If you clear this check box, no selection screen is displayed when you log out, and you are logged out from both Authorized Send and Department ID Management.

How do I configure the settings for sending e-mail/I-Faxes?

1. Select whether to allow sending e-mail and I-Faxes using the [E-Mail/I-Fax Sending] option.
2. Select an authentication method when [Allow] or [Only Allow Sending to Myself] is selected in [E-Mail/I-Fax Sending]. This allows you to specify whether an authentication screen is shown on the SMTP server when an e-mail is sent.
3. Select whether the e-mail address of an authorized user will be set as the sender using the [Specify Authentication User Destination as Sender] check box.

What are the options for [E-Mail/I-Fax Sending]?

• [Do Not Allow]: Blocks sending e-mail and I-Faxes. <E-Mail> and <I-Fax> in the scan function can no longer be used.
• [Allow]: Permits outgoing e-mail and I-Faxes.
• [Only Allow Sending to Myself]: Blocks all outgoing e-mail and I-Faxes other than those to users with authorized e-mail addresses. The e-mail addresses of authorized users must be registered on the LDAP server.

What are the options for [Authentication Method] when [Allow] or [Only Allow Sending to Myself] is selected in [E-Mail/I-Fax Sending]?

• [Display the authentication screen using the same user name as when the sending operation started]: Displays the authentication screen showing the same user name and password entered in the Authorized Send login screen.
• [Display the authentication screen without any authentication information]: Displays the authentication screen with the user name and password fields blank.
• [Use device-specific authentication information and do not display the authentication screen]: No authentication screen is displayed when e-mail or I-Faxes are sent. Authorization on the SMTP server is carried out using the user name and password set in [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].

What happens when the [Specify Authentication User Destination as Sender] check box is selected?

When selected, the e-mail address of an authorized user will be set as the sender. The e-mail addresses of authorized users must be registered on the LDAP server. If you clear this check box, the e-mail address set in [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings] is set as the sender.

How do I configure the file transfer settings?

1. Select whether to allow saving to shared folders and FTP servers using the [File Sending] option.
2. When [Allow] is specified in [File Sending], select whether an authentication screen is shown on the server when sending using the [Authentication Method] option.
3. When [Only Allow Sending to Myself or Specified Folder] is specified in [File Sending], select whether an authentication screen is shown on the server when sending using the [Authentication Method] option.
4. When [Only Allow Sending to Myself or Specified Folder] is selected in [File Sending], you can specify the folder where the data is saved by selecting the [Specify Destination Folder] check box. If the check box is not selected, the save destination is set based on authorized user information registered on the LDAP server.

What are the options for [File Sending]?

• [Do Not Allow]: Blocks saving to shared folders and FTP servers. <File> in the scan function can no longer be used.
• [Allow]: Saving to shared folders and FTP servers is not blocked.
• [Only Allow Sending to Myself or Specified Folder]: Blocks all saving to shared folders and FTP servers other than specified folders. The data is saved to folders registered on the LDAP server or to the folder specified in [Specify Destination Folder].

What are the options for [Authentication Method] when [Allow] is specified in [File Sending]?

• [Display the authentication screen using the same authentication information as when the sending operation started]: Displays the authentication screen showing the same user name and password entered in the Authorized Send login screen.
• [Display the authentication screen without any authentication information]: Displays the authentication screen with the user name and password fields blank.
• [Use the authentication information from the address book and do not display the authentication screen]: No authentication screen is displayed when sending. Authentication is carried out on the server using the user name and password set in the Address Book.

What are the options for [Authentication Method] when [Only Allow Sending to Myself or Specified Folder] is specified in [File Sending]?

• [Use the same authentication information as when the sending operation started]: Carries out authorization on the server using the user name and password entered in the Authorized Send login screen. Selecting the [Display Authentication Screen] check box displays the authentication screen with this user name and password already entered when you send the data.
• [Display the authentication screen without any authentication information]: Displays the authentication screen with the user name and password fields blank.

What are the options when the [Specify Destination Folder] check box is selected?

• [Host Name]: Enter a host name for the shared folder or FTP server.
• [Folder Path]: Enter a path name for the save destination folder (excluding the host name). When the [Add User Name] check box is selected, the user name used for authentication on the LDAP server is added to the path.

How do I configure the settings for sending faxes?

Select whether to allow sending faxes using the [Fax Sending] option. [Do Not Allow] prevents the user from sending faxes from the machine.

How do I finish configuring the LDAP server authentication settings?

Click [OK].

What are some features supported by the machine to enhance security and secrecy?

• Firewall Settings: Unauthorized access by third parties, as well as network attacks and intrusions, can be blocked by limiting communication only to devices that have a specific IP address or MAC address.
• Changing Port Numbers: A protocol that is used to exchange information with other devices is assigned port numbers that are predetermined according to the type of protocol. The port number must be the same for all communication devices; therefore, changing it to an arbitrary number is important to prevent hacking from outside.
• Proxy Settings: When the client devices are connected to an external network, communication is established through the proxy server. When the proxy server is used, websites can be browsed more safely; therefore, security can be expected to be enhanced.
• TLS Encrypted Communication: TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine from a computer via the Remote UI.
• IPSec Communication: While TLS only encrypts data used on a specific application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application, IPSec encrypts the whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system than TLS.
• IEEE 802.1X Authentication: IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device.

How do I specify IP addresses for firewall settings?

You can either limit communication to only devices with specified IP addresses or block devices with specified IP addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.

How do I specify IP addresses for firewall settings using the Remote UI?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [Firewall Settings].
4. Click [Edit] for the target IP address filter. Select the filter that matches the target IP address. To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer, select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from a computer, select [Inbound Filter].
5. Specify the settings for packet filtering. Select the default policy to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine and then specify IP addresses for exceptions.
   1. Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
   2. Specify address exceptions. Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].
6. Click [OK].
7. Restart the machine.

What does the [Use Filter] check box do?

Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

What does the [Default Policy] option do?

It allows you to select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.

What does the [Reject] option do for [Default Policy]?

Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications with other devices are prohibited.

What does the [Allow] option do for [Default Policy]?

Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications with other devices are permitted.

What do I do if IP addresses are incorrectly entered for firewall settings?

If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI. In this case, you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.

What are the entry form examples for IP addresses?

Description	Example
Entering a single address	IPv4: Delimit numbers with periods. <br> 192.168.0.10 <br>IPv6: Delimit alphanumeric characters with colons.<br>fe80::10
Specifying a range of addresses	Insert a hyphen between the addresses. <br>192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
Specifying a range of addresses with a prefix	Enter the address, followed by a slash and a number indicating the prefix length.<br>192.168.0.32/27<br>fe80::1234/64

What happens when [Reject] is selected for an outbound filter?

Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be filtered.

How do I delete an IP address from exceptions?

Select an IP address and click [Delete].

How can I enable or disable IP address filtering using the operation panel?

You can also enable or disable IP address filtering from <Menu> in the Home screen.

How do I specify MAC addresses for firewall settings?

You can limit communication to only devices with specified MAC addresses, or block devices with specified MAC addresses but permit other communications. This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.

How do I specify MAC addresses for firewall settings using the Remote UI?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [Firewall Settings].
4. Click [Edit] for the target MAC address filter. To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer, select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from a computer, select [Inbound Filter].
5. Specify the settings for packet filtering. Select the precondition (default policy) to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then specify MAC addresses for exceptions.
   1. Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
   2. Specify address exceptions. Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add]. You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.
6. Click [OK].
7. Restart the machine.

What does the [Reject] option do for [Default Policy] when specifying MAC addresses?

Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications with other devices are prohibited.

What does the [Allow] option do for [Default Policy] when specifying MAC addresses?

Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications with other devices are permitted.

What do I do if MAC addresses are incorrectly entered for firewall settings?

If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the Remote UI. In this case, you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.

What happens when [Reject] is selected for an outbound filter when specifying MAC addresses?

Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be filtered.

How do I delete a MAC address from exceptions?

Select a MAC address and click [Delete].

How can I enable or disable MAC address filtering using the operation panel?

You can also enable or disable MAC address filtering from <Menu> in the Home screen.

How do I change port numbers?

When a port number has been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers. Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.

How do I change port numbers using the operation panel?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Preferences> <Network>. If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3. Select <TCP/IP Settings> <Port Number Settings>.
4. Select the protocol whose port number you want to change.
5. Enter the port number and select <Apply>.
6. Select <OK>.
7. Restart the machine.

How do I set a proxy?

When setting a proxy, make sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and password for authentication.

How do I set a proxy using the Remote UI?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [Proxy Settings].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
6. Click [OK].

What does the [Use Proxy] check box do?

Select the check box to use the specified proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.

What do I enter in the [HTTP Proxy Server Address] field?

Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.

What do I enter in the [HTTP Proxy Server Port Number] field?

Change the port number as necessary.

What does the [Use Proxy within Same Domain] check box do?

Select the check box to also use the specified proxy server for communication with devices in the same domain.

What do I do to enable authentication by the proxy server?

To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the [Use Proxy Authentication] check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the user name in the [User Name] text box.

How do I set or change the password for the proxy authentication?

To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the [Set/Change Password] check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.

How do I configure the key and certificate for TLS?

To use TLS encrypted communication for the Remote UI, you need to specify a “key and certificate” (server certificate) you want to use before enabling TLS. Generate or install the key and certificate for TLS before enabling TLS.

How do I configure the key and certificate for TLS using the Remote UI?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [TLS Settings].
4. Click [Key and Certificate].
5. Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certificate you want to use.
6. Click [Edit].
7. Configure detailed TLS settings. Specify [Maximum Version] and [Minimum Version] of TLS using the [Allowed Versions] option. Select the check box for the encryption algorithm to use for TLS using the [Algorithm Settings] option.
8. Click [OK].
9. Select [License/Other] [Remote UI Settings].
10. Click [Edit].
11. Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].
12. Restart the machine.

How can I check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate?

You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text link under [Key Name], or the certificate icon.

How can I enable or disable TLS encrypted communication using the operation panel?

You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from <Menu> in the Home screen.

What do I do if a security alert is displayed regarding the security certificate when I try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled?

If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the security certificate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address field, and then proceed to display the Remote UI screen.

How do I use TLS to encrypt e-mail/I-Fax communication?

If the SMTP server and the POP3 server support TLS, you can enable TLS for communication with these servers. For more information about the SMTP server and the POP3 server, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

How do I generate the key and certificate for network communication?

A key and certificate can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via Transport Layer Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Self-signed certificates are used with the key and certificate generated in “Network Communication.”

How do I generate the key and certificate for network communication using the Remote UI?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Device Management] [Key and Certificate Settings].
4. Click [Generate Key].
5. Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].
6. Specify settings for the key and certificate.

How do I delete a registered key and certificate?

Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate you want to delete, then click [OK]. A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when “[TLS]” or “[IEEE 802.1X]” is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the other key and certificate before deleting it.

What should you set for the Key Name?

Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a list.

What should you select for Signature Algorithm?

Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.

What should you select for the Key Algorithm?

Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-down list. In either case, the larger the number for the key length is, the higher the security level becomes. However, the communication speed becomes slower.

• When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].

What should you enter for Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)?

Enter the validity start date of the certificate, in the order of: year, month, day.

What should you enter for Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)?

Enter the validity end date of the certificate, in the order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than [Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.

What should you do for the Country/Region?

Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list. You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as “US” for the United States.

What should you enter for State/City?

Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

What should you enter for Organization/Organization Unit?

Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

What should you enter for Common Name?

Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. “Common Name” is often abbreviated as “CN.”

What should you do when generating a key and certificate?

Click [OK].

• Generating a key and certificate may take some time.
• After the key and certificate is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.

Why might a communication error result when communicating with devices?

Because certificates generated on the machine do not have a CA signature, a communication error may result depending on devices it communicates with. To have the certificate authority issue the certificate with the CA signature, you need to obtain data of CSR (Certificate Signing Request), which the administrator can generate from Remote UI. When the certificate is issued, register it in the key with the CSR generated.

How do you generate a key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Device Management] [Key and Certificate Settings].
4. Click [Generate Key].
5. Select [Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].
6. Specify settings for the key and CSR:
   • [Key Settings]
     • [Key Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a list.
     • [Signature Algorithm] Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
     • [Key Algorithm] Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-down list. In any case, the larger the number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.
       • When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].
   • [Certificate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]
     • [Country/Region] Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list. You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as “US” for the United States.
     • [State]/[City] Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
     • [Organization]/[Organization Unit] Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
     • [Common Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. “Common Name” is often abbreviated as “CN.”
7. Click [OK].
   • Generating a key and CSR may take some time.
8. Click [Store in File].
   • A dialog box for storing the file appears. Choose where to store the file and click [Save].
     • The CSR file is stored on the computer.
9. Attach the stored file and submit the application to the certification authority.

How do you delete a registered key and certificate?

• Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate you want to delete click [OK].
  • A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when “[TLS]” or “[IEEE 802.1X]” is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and certificate before deleting it.

When can the key with the CSR generated be used?

The key with the CSR generated cannot be used until the certificate issued from the certificate authority based on the CSR is registered in the key. Once the certification authority has issued the certificate, register it using the procedure below.

How do you register a certificate to a key?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Device Management] [Key and Certificate Settings].
4. Click [Key Name] or [Certificate] required to register the certificate.
5. Click [Register Certificate].
6. Click [Browse], specify the file for the certificate signing request, and click [Register].

How do you register the key and certificate for network communication?

You can obtain the key and certificate, and the CA certificate from a certification authority (CA) for use with the machine. Install and register the obtained key and certificate file and CA certificate file in this machine using Remote UI. Check the key and certificate, and CA certificate conditions that are required for the machine in advance.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Device Management] [Key and Certificate Settings] or [CA Certificate Settings].
   • Click [Key and Certificate Settings] to install a key and certificate, or [CA Certificate Settings] to install a CA certificate.
4. Click [Register Key and Certificate] or [Register CA Certificate].
5. Click [Install].
6. Click [Browse], specify the file to install, and click [Start Installation].
   • The key and certificate file or the CA certificate file is installed on the machine from a computer.
7. Register the key and certificate or CA certificate.
   • Registering a key and certificate
     1. Click [Register] on the right of the key and certificate file you want to register.
     2. Enter the name of the key and password.
        • [Key Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the key to be registered.
        • [Password] Enter alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the file to be registered.
     3. Click [OK].
   • Registering a CA certificate Click [Register] on the right of the CA certificate file you want to register.

How do you delete a registered key and certificate or CA certificate?

• Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate or CA certificate you want to delete click [OK]. You cannot delete the preinstalled CA certificates.
  • A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when “[TLS]” or “[IEEE 802.1X]” is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and certificate before deleting it.

How do you disable or enable the preinstalled CA certificates?

• Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certificate you want to disable. To enable the certificate again, click [Enable] on the right of the certificate.

How do you delete the key and certificate file or CA certificate file?

• Click [Delete] on the right of the file you want to delete click [OK].

What is Internet Protocol Security (IPSec or IPsec)?

Internet Protocol Security (IPSec or IPsec) is a protocol suite for encrypting data transported over a network, including Internet networks. While TLS only encrypts data used on a specific application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application, IPSec encrypts either whole IP packets or the payloads of IP packets, offering a more versatile security system. The IPSec of the machine works in transport mode, in which the payloads of IP packets are encrypted. With this feature, the machine can connect directly to a computer that is in the same virtual private network (VPN). Check the system requirements and set the necessary configuration on the computer before you configure the machine.

What are IP address filter settings applied before?

IP address filter settings are applied before the IPSec policies.

What does configuring IPSec Settings require you to do before using IPSec for encrypted communication?

Before using IPSec for encrypted communication, you need to register security policies (SP). A security policy consists of the groups of settings described below. After registering policies, specify the order in which they are applied.

• Selector Selector defines conditions for IP packets to apply IPSec communication. Selectable conditions include IP addresses and port numbers of the machine and the devices to communicate with.
• IKE IKE configures the IKEv1 that is used for key exchange protocol. Note that instructions vary depending on the authentication method selected.
  • [Pre-Shared Key Method] This authentication method uses a common key word, called Shared Key, for communication between the machine and other devices. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before specifying this authentication method.
  • [Digital Signature Method] The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures. Generate or install the key and certificate beforehand.
• AH/ESP Specify the settings for AH/ESP, which is added to packets during IPSec communication. AH and ESP can be used at the same time. You can also select whether or not to enable PFS for tighter security.

How do you configure IPSec Settings?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [IPSec Settings].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Select the [Use IPSec] check box and click [OK].
   • If you want the machine to only receive packets that match one of the security policies that you define in the steps below, clear the [Receive Non-Policy Packets] check box.
6. Click [Register New Policy].
7. Specify the Policy Settings.
   1. In the [Policy Name] text box, enter alphanumeric characters for a name that is used for identifying the policy.
   2. Select the [Enable Policy] check box.
8. Specify the Selector Settings.
   • [Local Address] Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the machine to apply the policy.
     • [All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
     • [IPv4 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from the IPv4 address of the machine.
     • [IPv6 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address of the machine.
   • [Remote Address] Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the other devices to apply the policy.
     • [All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
     • [All IPv4 Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv4 addresses of the other devices.
     • [All IPv6 Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv6 addresses of the other devices.
     • [IPv4 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec. Enter the IPv4 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
     • [IPv6 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec. Enter the IPv6 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
   • [Addresses to Set Manually] If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Remote Address], enter the IP address to apply the policy. You can also enter a range of addresses by inserting a hyphen between the addresses.

Entering IP addresses	Description	Example
Entering a single address	IPv4: Delimit numbers with periods.	192.168.0.10
	IPv6: Delimit alphanumeric characters with colons.	fe80::10
Specifying a range of addresses	Insert a hyphen between the addresses.	192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
[Subnet Settings]	When manually specifying IPv4 address, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the subnet mask using periods to delimit numbers (example:“255.255.255.240”).
[Prefix Length]	Specifying the range of IPv6 addresses manually also allows you to specify the range using prefixes. Enter a range between 0 and 128 as the prefix length.

* **[Local Port]/[Remote Port]** If you want to create separate policies for each protocol, such as HTTP or WSD, click the [Single Port] radio button and enter the appropriate port number for the protocol to determine whether to use IPSec. 

What packets is IPSec not applied to?

• Loopback, multicast, and broadcast packets
• IKE packets (using UDP on port 500)
• ICMPv6 neighbor solicitation and neighbor advertisement packets

9. Specify the IKE Settings.
   • [IKE Mode] The mode used for the key exchange protocol is displayed. The machine supports the main mode, not the aggressive mode.
   • [Authentication Method] Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] or [Digital Signature Method] for the method used when authenticating the machine. You need to enable TLS for the Remote UI before selecting [Pre-Shared Key Method]. You need to generate or install the key and certificate before selecting [Digital Signature Method].
   • [Valid for] Specify how long a session lasts for IKE SA (ISAKMP SA). Enter the time in minutes.
   • [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] Select an algorithm from the drop-down list. Each algorithm is used in the key exchange.
     • [Authentication] Select the hash algorithm.
     • [Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm.
     • [DH Group] Select the Diffie-Hellman group, which determines the key strength.
   • Authenticating a machine using a pre-shared key
     1. Click the [Pre-Shared Key Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Shared Key Settings].
     2. Enter alphanumeric characters for the pre-shared key and click [OK].
     3. Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
   • Authenticating a machine using digital signature method
     1. Click the [Digital Signature Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Key and Certificate].
     2. Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certificate you want to use.
     3. Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
10. Specify the IPSec Network Settings.
    • [Use PFS] Select the check box to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for IPSec session keys. Enabling PFS enhances the security while increasing the load on the communication. Make sure that PFS is also enabled for the other devices.
    • [Specify by Time]/[Specify by Size] Set the conditions for terminating a session for IPSec SA. IPSec SA is used as a communication tunnel. Select either or both of the check boxes as necessary. If both check boxes are selected, the IPSec SA session is terminated when either of the conditions has been satisfied.
      • [Specify by Time] Enter a time in minutes to specify how long a session lasts.
      • [Specify by Size] Enter a size in megabytes to specify how much data can be transported in a session.
    • [Select Algorithm] Select the [ESP], [ESP (AES-GCM)], or [AH (SHA1)] check box(es) depending on the IPSec header and the algorithm used. AES-GCM is an algorithm for both authentication and encryption. If [ESP] is selected, also select algorithms for authentication and encryption from the [ESP Authentication] and [ESP Encryption] drop-down lists.
      • [ESP Authentication] To enable the ESP authentication, select [SHA1] for the hash algorithm. Select [Do Not Use] if you want to disable the ESP authentication.
      • [ESP Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm for ESP. You can select [NULL] if you do not want to specify the algorithm, or select [Do Not Use] if you want to disable the ESP encryption.
    • [Connection Mode] The connection mode of IPSec is displayed. The machine supports transport mode, in which the payloads of IP packets are encrypted. Tunnel mode, in which whole IP packets (headers and payloads) are encapsulated is not available.
11. Click [OK].
    • If you need to register an additional security policy, return to step 6.
12. Arrange the order of policies listed under [Registered IPSec Policies].
    • Policies are applied from one at the highest position to the lowest. Click [Up] or [Down] to move a policy up or down the order.
13. Restart the machine.

How do you view details of a certificate?

• You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text link under [Key Name], or the certificate icon.

How do you edit a policy?

• Click the corresponding text link under [Policy Name] for the edit screen.

How do you delete a policy?

• Click [Delete] on the right of the policy name you want to delete click [OK].

How do you enable or disable IPSec communication from the operation panel?

• You can also enable or disable IPSec communication from <Menu> in the Home screen.

What does the machine connect to as a client device?

The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server (authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.

What are the IEEE 802.1X Authentication Methods?

Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key and certificate or a CA certificate before configuring IEEE 802.1X authentication.

• TLS The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certificates. A key and certificate issued by a certification authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when authenticating the machine). For the server authentication, a CA certificate installed via the Remote UI can be used in addition to a CA certificate preinstalled in the machine.
• TTLS This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certificate for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used with PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before configuring this authentication method.
• PEAP The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MSCHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before configuring this authentication method.

How do you configure IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].
4. Click [Edit].
5. Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, and enter the login name in the [Login Name] text box.
   • [Use IEEE 802.1X] Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
   • [Login Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.
6. Configure the required settings according to the specified authentication method.
   • Setting TLS
     1. Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certificate].
        • You cannot use TLS with TTLS or PEAP.
     2. Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certificate you want to use for the client authentication.
   • Setting TTLS/PEAP
     1. Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
        • Internal protocol for TTLS
          • You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP.
     2. Click [Change User Name/Password].
        • To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.
     3. Set the user name/password.
        • [User Name] Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
        • [Change Password] To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new password both in the [Password] and [Confirm] text boxes.
     4. Click [OK].
7. Click [OK].
8. Restart the machine.

How do you enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from the operation panel?

• You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Menu> in the Home screen.

What are some of the functions of the machine that are rarely used?

Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes, the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.

What can you do to restrict access to Address Book and Sending Functions?

You can specify the PIN in the Address Book to disable a general user from modifying data or limit destinations that can be specified for fax sending. You can also disable a user from collectively sending a fax to multiple destinations (Sequential Broadcast).

What can you do to restrict printing from a computer?

You can limit “printing from computer” only to secure documents so that no print jobs can be executed unless the PIN is entered on the machine side.

What does the USB connection allow and what can it cause?

The USB connection allows an easy connection with peripheral devices, but it may cause a security risk such as an information leakage. You can restrict a USB connection with a computer or saving to a USB memory device.

What can you do when not performing operations via the network?

When not performing operations via the network, for example, when using the machine via USB connection, you can disable HTTP communication to prevent a hacking via the HTTP port.

What can you do when not using Remote UI?

When not using Remote UI, you can disable functions to prevent an unauthorized remote operation via Remote UI.

How can some cases of information leakage be prevented?

Some cases of information leakage can be prevented by limiting the available fax and e-mail destinations to those registered in the Address Book or LDAP servers, or by setting a PIN for the Address Book so that unauthorized users cannot add or edit Address Book entries. You can also avoid sending documents to unintended recipients if the machine is set to ask you to enter the fax number twice for confirmation.

How do you restrict the use of the Address Book?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Set Destination>.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3. Select <Address Book PIN>.
4. Specify the PIN.
   • Enter the number, and select <Apply>.
   • The Confirm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to confirm.

What are some things to note when setting the Address Book PIN?

• You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as “00” or “0000000”.
• To cancel the PIN setting, clear the information you entered in and select <Apply> with the field blank.

In addition to setting the Address Book PIN, how can you further enhance security?

You can further enhance security by performing the following operations:

• Restricting the addition of new destinations
• Disabling the PC fax function

How do you limit available destinations?

By limiting destinations that can be specified to those registered in the Address Book or LDAP servers, you can reduce the possibility of specifying unintended destinations and prevent users from leaking information. You can configure the setting to display the confirmation screen to prevent the user from misdialing when specifying a coded dial number in the Address Book.

How do you restrict new destinations that can be specified?

Restrict destinations that can be specified when sending faxes or scanned documents to “those already registered in the Address Book”, “those previously used”, or “those searchable from the LDAP servers.” When this function is enabled, the machine prohibits users from entering destinations using the numeric keys, adding new entries to the Address Book, and editing the existing Address Book entries.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Restrict New Destinations> <On>

How do you disable the use of previously used destinations?

This prohibits the specification of destinations from the transmission records. Using this restriction prevents destinations being selected from the transmission records for “Send Fax”, “Scan and Send as E-mail” and “Scan and Save to Shared Folder or FTP Server.”

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Restrict Resending from Log> <On>

How do you display destinations in the Address Book?

When using coded dial numbers to specify destinations, you need to precisely remember whose destination (or what group) is registered in what coded dial number. If you do not remember all these numbers accurately, you may send your documents to unintended destinations. You can avoid sending data to unintended recipients by configuring the machine to display the details of the coded dial number you selected/entered as a sending destination on the screen before you send documents to that destination.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Confirm When Coded Dial TX> <On>

How do you check destinations when sending data?

You can configure a setting so that the destination confirmation screen is displayed when fax, e-mail, or I-Fax sending starts. If <Only for Sequential Broadcast> is selected, the confirmation screen is displayed only when multiple destinations are specified.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Common Settings> <Confirm Dest. Before Sending> Select <On> or <Only for Sequential Broadcast>

How do you restrict the fax sending functions?

You can set various restrictions for sending faxes, which can prevent information leakage to third parties or sending documents to unintended destinations.

How do you confirm the entered fax number?

You can configure the setting to display the confirmation screen to prevent the user from misdialing when entering a destination fax number using the numeric keys.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Confirm Entered Fax Number> <On>

How do you restrict fax sending from a computer?

You can prohibit users from PC faxing (faxing from a computer).

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Allow Fax Driver TX> <Off>

How do you restrict sequential broadcasts?

You can prohibit a function that collectively sends a fax to multiple destinations (Sequential Broadcast).

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Restrict Sequential Broadcast> <On>

How do you disable destination registration from logs to the Address Book?

You can configure to disable registering destinations from fax send logs to the Address Book.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Send> <Fax Settings> <Register Log Dest to Addr Book> <Do Not Allow>

How do you restrict printing from a computer?

You can drastically reduce information leakage risks by limiting the documents printable from a computer to the Secure Print documents.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Secure Print> <Restrict Printer Jobs> <On> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

How do you restrict USB functions?

USB is a convenient way of connecting peripheral devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source of information leakage if it is not properly managed. Be especially careful when handling USB memory devices. This section describes how to restrict connection via the USB port of the machine and how to prohibit use of USB memory devices.

How do you restrict the USB connection with a computer?

You can disable the computer connection USB port located on the back side of the machine. If this port is disabled, the machine cannot communicate with a computer via USB. This setting does not affect the front USB port, which is for attaching USB memory devices.

<Menu> <Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings> Select <Off> in <Use as USB Device> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

How do you restrict the scan to USB function?

You can disable storing scanned original data into a USB memory device.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Memory Media Settings> Select <Off> in <Use Scan Function> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

How do you restrict the USB print function?

You can disable printing data from a USB memory device. The data in the USB memory device cannot be printed.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Store/Access Files> <Memory Media Settings> Select <Off> in <Use Print Function> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

How do you disable HTTP communication?

HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party intrusions via the unused HTTP port.

• Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing with Google Cloud Print.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Use HTTP> <Off> <Yes>

How do you disable the Remote UI?

The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specified by using a Web browser on a computer. To use the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI> Select <Off> in <Use Remote UI> <Apply> <OK> Restart the machine

How do you increase the security of documents?

The machine is equipped with security functions designed to prevent documents from being leaked or tampered with.

• Device Signature: The digital signature is added to scanned documents using a key and certificate mechanism in order to prove to the recipient that the document has been created on the machine. The recipient can verify “the device that created the document” and “whether the document has been tampered with.” Before adding a device signature, you need to generate a key and certificate (device certificate) that is used for the device signature using the machine.

How do you generate a device signature key?

You can generate a key and certificate for the device signature that show a document was scanned on the machine. The certificate is appended when a document is scanned and converted into a PDF file.

• Only one key and certificate for the device signature can be generated. It cannot be deleted.
• An optional Send PDF Security Feature Set is required.
• Key and certificate for the device signature are valid for five years. Renew them when required.

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Select [Device Management] [Key and Certificate Settings].
4. Click [Generate Key].
5. Select the [Device Signature] check box, and click [OK].
   • A key and certificate for the device signature is generated.

How do you renew the device signature key and the key and certificate?

1. Click [Update] at the right of the key and certificate for the device signature.
2. Click [OK].

How do you manage the machine from a computer (Remote UI)?

Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the status of the machine. You can also make various settings. You can do this without leaving your desk, making system management easier.

What are the functions of the Remote UI?

• Checking the Status and Logs
• Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
• Registering Destinations from Remote UI
• Security Policy
• Importing/Exporting the Setting Data

What are the basics of the Remote UI?

• Starting Remote UI

How do you start the Remote UI?

To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI. Check the IP address set to the machine in advance. If you have any questions, ask your Network Administrator.

What are the steps to log in to the Remote UI when the Department ID Management is disabled?

• To log in to the Remote UI, you need to set a Remote UI Access PIN on the machine beforehand.
• To log in to System Manager Mode (System Manager ID), you first need to change the System Manager PIN from the default setting.

1. Start the Web browser.
2. Enter “http://<the IP address of the machine>/” in the address field, and press the [ENTER] key.
   • If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http:// [fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
3. If a security alert is displayed:
   • A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted. When certificate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue browsing the website.
4. Log in to the Remote UI.
   • Select [System Manager Mode] or [General User Mode], and enter a value in [Remote UI Access PIN] as necessary.
5. Click [Log In].
   • The Portal page (main page) will be displayed.

What are the steps to log in to the Remote UI when the Department ID Management is enabled?

Enter the appropriate ID in [Department ID] and PIN in [PIN].

What do you do if a security alert is displayed?

A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted. When certificate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue browsing the Web site.

What are the Remote UI log in options when the Department ID Management is disabled?

• [System Manager Mode]: You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the appropriate ID in [System Manager ID] and PIN in [System Manager PIN].
• [General User Mode]: You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. When you want to check if a specific document of yours is in the print queue or cancel the printing of a document of yours in the print queue, enter the user name of the document in [User Name]. The user name is automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or computer login name.
• [Remote UI Access PIN]: In the following situations, enter a Remote UI Access PIN.
  • When no System Manager ID is set and you are logging in to System Manager Mode
  • When you are logging in to General User Mode

What is the Remote UI screen?

When you log in to the Remote UI, the following Portal page appears. This section describes the items displayed on the Portal page and the basic operations.

What does the [Device Basic Information] section of the Remote UI screen display?

Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the Error Information page will be displayed.

What does the [Consumables Information] section of the Remote UI screen display?

Displays paper information and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.

What does the [Support Link] section of the Remote UI screen display?

Displays the support link specified in [Support Link] under [License/Other].

What does the refresh icon on the Remote UI screen do?

Refreshes the currently displayed page.

What does the [Language] section on the Remote UI screen do?

Selects the display language used for the Remote UI screens.

What does the [Log Out] section on the Remote UI screen do?

Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.

What does the [Mail to System Manager] section on the Remote UI screen do?

Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specified in [System Manager Information] under [User Management].

What does the [Status Monitor/Cancel] section on the Remote UI screen do?

Displays the [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. For any of the waiting documents, you can check the status/history or cancel the processing.

What does the [Settings/Registration] section on the Remote UI screen do?

Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged in to System Manager Mode, you can change the settings items and save/load the registered data.

What does the [Address Book] section on the Remote UI screen do?

Displays the coded dial numbers and the Favorites list registered in the Address Book. You can also register or edit the Address Book when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.

What does the [Application Library] section on the Remote UI screen do?

Displays the Application Library setting page.

How do you check the status and logs?

• Checking Current Status of Print Documents
• Checking Current Status of Received Documents
• Checking History of Documents
• Checking Information of Documents That Failed To Be Forwarded
• Checking Error Information
• Checking Consumables
• Checking Device Specifications
• Checking System Manager Information
• Checking Print Total Counter
• Checking History of Toner Cartridges
• Checking Usage Status of the Machine

What should you note about the file name of a document?

A file name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the file name.

How do you check the current status of print documents?

The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.

Log in to the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status] in [Print]

• You can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].
• Regardless of the Department ID Management setting, all the print documents currently printing and waiting to be printed will be listed.
• If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only be displayed on the documents that you printed.

How do you check the current status of received documents?

You can check the logs of received fax and I-Fax documents. You can also click [Delete] for a received fax document to delete it. Log in to the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status] in [RX].

How do you perform the following operations for a received fax document?

To perform the following operations for a received fax document, you need to log on in System Manager Mode and set <Use Fax Preview> to <On>.

How do you print all received documents?

Click [Print All] to print all received documents.

How do you print a document waiting to be printed?

Click [Print] to print a document waiting to be printed.

How do you display detailed information and preview of a document waiting to be printed?

Click [Job Number] to display detailed information and preview of a document waiting to be printed.

Where are the job logs of print, copy, sending (TX), and receiving (RX) displayed?

The job logs of print, copy, sending (TX), and receiving (RX) are displayed in:

Log in to the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Log].

Where is the information of documents that failed to be forwarded displayed?

Information of documents that failed to be forwarded is displayed in:

Log in to the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Forwarding Errors].

How do you delete documents that failed to be forwarded?

When you have logged on in System Manager Mode, you can click [Delete] to delete documents that failed to be forwarded.

How do you display detailed information or preview of the document that failed to be forwarded?

When you have logged on in System Manager Mode, you can click [Job Number] to display detailed information or preview of the document that failed to be forwarded.

When is the error information page displayed?

When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on the Portal page (main page).

To access the error information page:

Log in to the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Error Information].

Where is the paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. displayed?

Paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed in:

Log in to the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Consumables].

You can also click [Check Consumables Details] in the Portal page (main page) to display this page.

Where are the maximum print speed and machine features displayed?

The maximum print speed and machine features are displayed in:

Log in to the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device Features].

Where is the information about the machine and the system manager displayed?

Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed in:

Log in to the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device Information].

The device name and other system manager information displayed here correspond to the settings in [System Manager Information] on the [User Management] page or in [Device Information Settings] on the [Device Management] page.

Where is the total number of pages that have been printed by the copy, print, and fax functions displayed?

The total number of pages that have been printed by the copy, print, and fax functions is displayed in:

Log in to the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Check Counter].

Where can you check the usage logs of toner cartridges and other logs?

You can check the usage logs of toner cartridges and other logs in:

Log in to the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Cartridge Log].

The display can be changed for each color of the toner cartridge.

Where are the monthly total volume of printouts and monthly total power consumption displayed?

The monthly total volume of printouts and monthly total power consumption are displayed in:

Log in to the Remote UI [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Eco Information].

You can display the Eco Information screen and change the settings to save paper and power consumption.

How do you change the various machine settings?

You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI.

Are there any settings that can only be set using the Remote UI?

Yes, some settings can only be set using the Remote UI.

Are there any settings that can only be changed when you have logged in to System Manager Mode?

Yes, some settings can only be changed when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.

May operations be required that differ from the procedure described in the PDF?

Yes, some settings may require operations that differ from the procedure described in the PDF.

What are the steps to setting up menu options from the Remote UI?

1. Start the Remote UI.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Click the setting you want to configure in the menu on the left side of the screen.
4. Click the link to display the desired page as necessary.
5. Click [Edit].
6. Specify the required settings.
7. Click [OK].
8. Restart the machine as necessary.

Where can you view information about whether you need to restart the machine?

For information about whether you need to restart the machine, view the message on the edit screen.

How do you register destinations in the Address Book of the machine and edit information of registered destinations?

You can use the computer to register destinations in the Address Book of the machine and edit information of registered destinations. Specify the shared folder or FTP server destination here.

When can you change the settings for destinations in the Address Book?

You can change the settings only when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.

How do you register destinations from the Remote UI?

1. Start the Remote UI.

2. Click [Address Book] on the Portal page.

3. If the enter PIN page is displayed:

   • The Address Book is protected by a PIN. Enter the [PIN] and click [OK].

4. Click [Coded Dial].

   • You can also register destinations in Favorites. In this case, click [Favorites] instead of [Coded Dial].

5. Click the text link under [Number], [Type], or [Name] for an item named “Not Registered.”

   • You can edit a registered item by clicking the corresponding text link under [Number], [Type] or [Name].
   • You can delete a registered destination by clicking the corresponding [Delete] button.
   • If you delete a destination from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the favorite settings.

6. Select the type of the destination to register, and click [OK].

   • To register the shared folder or FTP server destination, select [File].

7. Specify the destination.

   To register the fax destination:

   • [Name] Enter the name of the destination.
   • [Fax Number] Enter the fax number of the destination.
   • [ECM TX] Select the check box to make the following possible: if an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper image from being sent.
   • [Speed] If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust the transmission start speed downward.
   • [Long Distance] Specify [International (1)] to [International (3)] according to the transmission conditions when registering overseas fax numbers.

   To register the e-mail or I-Fax destination:

   • [Name] Enter the name of the destination.
   • [E-Mail Address]/[I-Fax Address] Enter the e-mail address of the destination.

   To register the shared folder or FTP server destination:

   • [Name] Enter the name for the destination.

   • [Protocol] Select the protocol for the destination.

     • [Windows (SMB)] Select this when registering a shared folder as a destination.
     • [FTP] Select this when registering an FTP server as a destination.

   • [Host Name]

     • For a shared folder Enter the computer name or IP address. You can include a path to the shared folder with the computer name or IP address (e.g. “\swan\share” or “\192.168.2.100\share”).
     • For an FTP server Enter the IP address of the FTP server (e.g. “192.168.2.100”).

     Using a DNS server:

     • You can also enter the host name (or FQDN) instead of the computer name or IP address (e.g. for a shared folder: “\swan.organization.company.com\share”).

   • [Folder Path] Enter the location of the folder to which the data will be sent.

     • For a shared folder Use "" as a separator. Specify the level that follows the path specified in [Host Name].
     • For an FTP server Use “/” as a separator. The path is an absolute path when a “/” is placed at its top, otherwise a relative path with respective to the current directory of the user who has logged in.
     • If there is no folder in which the data will be stored, a folder with the specified name is automatically created when sending is performed. However, if the specified path includes two or more non-existent folder levels or if the user does not have a write privilege for the parent folder, no folder is created and the process ends in a send error.

   • [User Name] Enter the user name set for the shared folder or FTP server.

   • [Set Password] To set a password for the shared folder or FTP server, select the check box and enter a [Password].

8. Click [OK].

What should you ensure when setting up destinations from the Remote UI?

Ensure that the same display language is selected on both the computer and the Remote UI. [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly or may not be referenceable.

What is a common practice for organizations to adopt regarding security policies?

It is a common practice for organizations to adopt a security policy that defines basic information security objectives and standards, which requires information devices such as computers and multifunctional printers to be operated accordingly. If you have a security policy to be applied in your organization, apply it to this machine as well.

How do you view the security policy set in the machine using the Remote UI?

1. Start the Remote UI.
2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3. Click [Security Settings] [Confirm Security Policy].

What are the security policy items?

[Interface] [Wireless Connection Policy]

Prevent unauthorized access by prohibiting wireless connections.

[Prohibit Use of Direct Connection]

<Use Direct Connection> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to access the machine from mobile devices.

[Prohibit Use of Wireless LAN]

<Select Wired/Wireless LAN> is set to <Wired LAN>. It is not possible to establish a wireless connection with the machine via a wireless LAN router or access point.

[USB Policy]

Prevent unauthorized access and data breaches by prohibiting USB connection.

[Prohibit Use as USB Device]

<Use as USB Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to connect to a computer via USB.

[Prohibit Use as USB Storage Device]

<Use USB Storage Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to use USB memory devices.

[Network] [Communication Operational Policy]

Increase the security of communications by requiring the verification of signatures and certificates.

[Always Verify Signatures for SMS/WebDAV Server Functions]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Always Verify Server Certificate When Using TLS]

The following settings in [Use TLS for SMTP] and [Use TLS for POP] are set to [On].

• [Verify Certificate]
• [Add CN to Verification Items]

The following settings in [Use Google Cloud Print] are set to [On].

• [Verify Server Certificate]
• [Add CN to Verification Items]

The following settings in [Confirm TLS Certificate for LDAP Server Access] of [LDAP Server (For Search)] and [LDAP Server (For Authentication)] are set to [On].

• [Confirm TLS Certificate for LDAP Server Access]
• [Add CN to Verification Items]

[Prohibit Cleartext Authentication for Server Functions]

<Dedicated Port Auth. Method> is set to <Mode 2>. When using the machine as a server, plain text authentication and functions that use plain text authentication are not available.

[Prohibit Use of SNMPv1]

In <SNMP Settings>, <SNMPv1 Settings> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to use SNMPv1 when obtaining device information from the computer.

• This setting does not apply to communication with IEEE 802.1X networks, even if [Always Verify Server Certificate When Using TLS] is set to [On].
• If [Prohibit Cleartext Authentication for Server Functions] is set to [On] and your device management software or driver version is old, it may not be possible to connect to the machine. Ensure that you are using the latest versions.

[Port Usage Policy]

Prevent external breaches by closing unused ports.

[Restrict LPD Port (Port Number: 515)]

In <LPD Settings>, <Use LPD Printing> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to perform LPD printing.

[Restrict RAW Port (Port Number: 9100)]

In <RAW Settings>, <Use RAW Printing> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to perform RAW printing.

[Restrict FTP Port (Port Number: 21)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Restrict WSD Port (Port Number: 3702, 60000)]

The following settings in <WSD Settings> are set to <Off>. It is not possible to use WSD functions.

• <Use WSD Printing>
• <Use WSD Browsing>
• <Use WSD Scanning>
• <Use Computer Scanning>
• <Use Multicast Discovery>

[Restrict BMLinkS Port (Port Number: 1900)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)]

Part of the settings to enable printing from mobile devices using applications will be turned <Off>, disabling part of printing from mobile devices using applications.

[Restrict SMB Port (Port Number: 137, 138, 139, 445)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Restrict SMTP Port (Port Number: 25)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Restrict Dedicated Port (Port Number: 9002, 9006, 9007, 9011-9015, 9017-9019, 9022, 9023, 9025, 20317, 47545-47547)]

<Use Dedicated Port> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to use dedicated ports.

[Restrict Remote Operator’s Software Port (Port Number: 5900)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Restrict SIP (IP Fax) Port (Port Number: 5004, 5005, 5060, 5061, 49152)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)]

The following settings will be turned <Off>, and part of the settings to enable printing from mobile devices using applications will also be turned <Off>. It will be disabled to search the network or perform automatic settings using mDNS. In addition, part of printing from mobile devices using applications will be disabled as well.

• <mDNS Settings> (IPv4)
• <mDNS Settings> (IPv6)
• [Use Google Cloud Print] [Local Print]

[Restrict SLP Port (Port Number: 427)]

In [Multicast Discovery Settings], [Discovery Response] is set to [Off]. It is not possible to search the network or perform automatic settings using SLP.

[Restrict SNMP Port (Port Number: 161)]

In <SNMP Settings>, the <SNMPv1 Settings> and <SNMPv3 Settings> are set to <Off>, and <Scan w/ Canon PRINT Business> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to obtain device information from the computer or configure settings using SNMP.

[Authentication] [Authentication Operational Policy]

[Prohibit Guest Users to Use Device]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Force Setting of Auto Logout]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Password Operational Policy]

[Prohibit Caching of Password for External Servers]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Display Warning When Default Password Is in Use]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Prohibit Use of Default Password for Remote Access]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Password Settings Policy]

[Minimum Number of Characters for Password]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Password Validity Period]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive Characters]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Uppercase Character]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Lowercase Character]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Digit]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Symbol]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Lockout Policy]

Block users from logging in for a specified period of time after a certain number of consecutive invalid login attempts.

[Enable Lockout]

In <Lockout>, <Enable Lockout> is set to <On>. Specify the values for <Lockout Threshold> and <Lockout Period>.

[Key/Certificate]

Protect important data by preventing the use of weak encryption, or by saving encrypted user passwords and keys in a designated hardware component.

[Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption]

<Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.> is set to <On>. It is not possible to use weak encryption.

[Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption]

In <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.>, <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.> is set to <On>. It is not possible to use a key or certificate with weak encryption.

[Use TPM to Store Password and Key]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Log]

[Force Recording of Audit Log]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Force SNTP Settings]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Job] [Printing Policy]

[Prohibit Immediate Printing of Received Jobs]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Sending/Receiving Policy]

Limit the sending operations for destinations, and limit how received data is processed.

[Allow Sending Only to Registered Addresses]

<Restrict New Destinations> is set to <On>. It is only possible to send to destinations that are registered in the Address Book.

[Force Confirmation of Fax Number]

<Confirm Entered Fax Number> is set to <On>. Users are required to enter a fax number again for confirmation when sending a fax.

[Prohibit Auto Forwarding]

In <Forwarding Function>, the <Use Forwarding Function> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to automatically forward faxes.

[Storage]

[Force Complete Deletion of Data]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

How do you apply the security policy to the machine?

You can import the security policy edited on the imageRUNNER ADVANCE Series or using Device Management Software to apply it to this machine. In addition, you can export the security policy as applied to this machine to apply it to other machines*.

*Only Canon devices that are compatible with security policy settings

What are the requirements for importing the security policy settings?

The security policy settings can only be imported if the security policy setting password on the exporting machine matches that of the importing machine, or if no password has been set for the importing machine. If no password has been set for the importing machine, the password configured for the exporting machine is set to the importing machine.

Can you set or change the security policy on this machine?

No, you cannot set or change the security policy on this machine.

What can be saved on your computer?

Address Book and machine settings data can be saved on your computer (export).

What can be registered in the machine?

Data that is saved on your computer can also be registered in the machine (import).

What are the benefits of importing/exporting settings?

You can easily copy the destinations in the Address Book to multiple machines. To use these features, it is required that you have logged in to System Manager Mode. If using the same model, you can import/export machine settings data.

What should you do before importing or exporting?

• Do not turn OFF the machine until the import or export process is complete.
• It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may result in damage to data or the machine.
• Do not operate the machine during the import or export process
• Before importing/exporting, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently proceeding.

Can settings data be imported/exported via a USB memory device?

Yes, you can also import/export settings data via a USB memory device by using the operation panel of the machine.

How do you export the setting data?

You can export Address Book and machine settings data, and save them on a computer. You can export Address Book data as a device configuration information file (.dcm) or Canon Address Book file (.abk). Select the device configuration information file type to save the data as a backup copy or copy the Address Book data to the same machine model. Select the Canon Address Book file type to copy the Address Book data to the fax driver or a different machine model. It is recommended that you regularly back up important settings.

What are the steps to exporting the setting data?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

2. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

3. Select [Data Management] [Export].

4. Select the settings to export, and specify the encryption password.

   • [Address Book (ABK)] Select the check box to export the Address Book data as a Canon Address Book file (*.abk). If the [Address Book (ABK)] check box is selected, you cannot export the settings of the machine at the same time with the Address Book data.
   • [Address Book] Select the check box to export Address Book data as a device configuration information file (*.dcm).
   • [Address Book PIN] If the Address Book is code-protected, enter the code for the Address Book.
   • [Settings/Registration] Select the check box to export machine settings data.
   • [Application Library Settings Information] Select the check box to export the Application Library settings data.
   • [Encryption Password] Enter a password to encrypt the export data using alphanumeric characters. Enter the same password in [Confirm]. If the [Address Book] or [Settings/Registration] check box is selected, the data cannot be exported without an encryption password set.
     • The password is required when exported data is imported.

5. Click [Start Exporting].

6. Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where to save the exported data.

   ➠The setting data will be saved.

How do you import the setting data?

Load (import) data that was exported from the machine. You can also import machine settings data from another machine to your machine if the models are the same.

What are the steps to importing the setting data?

1. Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

How do you import data?

1. Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
2. Select [Data Management] [Import].
3. Specify the file, enter the password, and select the settings to import.
   • Click [Browse] and select the file. You can only import a device configuration information file (*.dcm) and a Canon Address Book file (*.abk). If you select the Canon Address Book file type, you do not need to set any other items.
   • Enter the password set when the settings were exported.
4. Select the check box to import the data.
   • Importing Address Book data will overwrite the Address Book entries currently registered on the machine.
   • If the Address Book is code protected, enter the code for the Address Book.
5. Click [Start Importing].
6. Click [OK]. The selected settings data is loaded into the machine.
7. Click [OK]. If the [Settings/Registration] check box is selected in step 4, the machine automatically restarts.

How do you update the firmware?

For the firmware, select the method of update depending on the installation condition of the machine. There are two methods of update: the one is to access the latest firmware version on the Internet from the machine and perform the update if the version currently installed in the machine is not the latest, and the other is to access the latest firmware version on the Internet from a computer and perform the update from the computer if the version currently installed in the machine is not the latest. In an environment where connection to the Internet cannot be established via a wireless LAN, establish connection via a wired LAN or USB and perform the update from the computer.

What are the different installation conditions and how do you install the update?

Installation Condition of the Machine	How to Install the Update
Wireless LAN connection	Updating via the Internet
Wired LAN connection	Updating via the Internet, Updating from a Computer
USB connection	Updating from a Computer

If you are in an IPv6 environment, you cannot perform firmware update. Use USB to re-establish connection, and perform the update from the computer. You can check the firmware version from the operation panel of the machine. After completion of the firmware update operation, make sure that the update was performed correctly.

How do you update via the internet?

You can access the Canon server from the machine to update the firmware to the latest version.

1. Select <Update Firmware> in the Home screen. A check for existence of the latest firmware is performed.
   • If the <This is the latest firmware version.> message is displayed, there is no need to update the firmware.
2. When a license screen appears, select <Accept>.
3. Select <OK>. When the firmware update is complete, the machine restarts automatically.
   • Do not turn OFF the machine while the restart is in progress.

How do you update from a computer?

When you have downloaded the latest firmware version from the Canon website, use “User Support Tool” utility software to update the firmware from a computer. For how to perform firmware update from a computer, see the “User Support Tool Operation Guide” included with the firmware.

How do you put the machine into a firmware update waiting state?

<Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Update Firmware> <Via PC> <Yes>

How do you check the firmware version?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Management Settings>.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.
3. Select <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Update Firmware>.
4. Select <Version Information>. The current firmware version is displayed.

How do you initialize settings?

You can restore the following settings:

• Initializing Menu
• Initializing Key and Certificate
• Initializing Address Book
• Initializing All Data/Settings

How do you initialize the menu?

You can restore the settings of the machine. Depending on the settings selected, you may need to restart the machine after initialization.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Menu> Select the item you want to initialize <Yes> (Restart the machine if necessary)

You can restore the settings only for <Network> in <Preferences>.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Initialize Network Settings> <Yes> <OK> Restart the machine

How do you initialize the key and certificate?

You can restore the settings of the key and certificate and the CA certificate. Note that all the keys and certificates and CA certificates that you registered in the machine (except the preinstalled keys and CA certificates) will be deleted after initializing. After initializing, functions that require a key and certificate such as TLS encrypted communication and IKE of IPSec communication are not available. To use these functions, configure the settings for the key and certificate and activate the functions again.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Key and Certificate> <Yes>

How do you initialize the address book?

You can restore the settings of the Address Book. Note that all the information registered in the Address Book will be deleted after initializing.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Address Book> <Yes>

How do you initialize all data/settings?

This enables restoration of all data and machine settings, including logs, to the factory default values. This prevents sensitive data from being leaked when replacing or disposing of the machine. When the initialization process finishes, the machine automatically restarts. Before initializing, make sure that there are no documents being processed or waiting to be processed. These documents will be deleted when initialization is performed. To use the machine after initializing it, you need to configure all settings from the beginning.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Initialize All Data/Settings> <Yes> <Yes>

What is the Setting Menu List?

You can customize the machine based on your environment and needs by configuring settings described in this chapter. To start configuration, select <Menu> on the Home screen. This section describes what each item in the setting menu can configure. Refer to the PDF file included in the User’s Guide that summarizes the setting menu.

• <Preferences> This section describes the display and network settings.
• <Adjustment/Maintenance> This section describes how to adjust print image quality and the cleaning functions of the machine.
• <Function Settings> This section describes the settings for the individual functions.
• <Set Destination> This section describes the Address Book settings.
• <Management Settings> This section describes the user and hardware information management, security settings, etc.

You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings.

What are the preferences settings?

Item	Description
<Display Settings>	This section describes the settings related to viewing of the display.
<English Keyboard Layout>	This section describes the USB keyboard settings.
<Timer/Energy Settings>	This section describes the timer settings and energy settings.
<Network>	This section describes the network settings.
<External Interface>	This section describes the USB settings and other relevant settings.
<Accessibility>	This section describes settings for improving accessibility, such as inverting the screen colors and setting the message display time.

What are the display settings?

All the settings related to viewing of the display are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

• <Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>
• <Home Screen Button Display Settings> *2
• <Language> *3
• <Remote UI Language> *3
• <Notify to Clean Orig. Scan Area> *1
• <Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch> *3
• <Gram/Pound Switch> *3
• <Display Timing for Cart. Prep.>
• <Show Warnings>
• <Action When Warning>
• <Display IP Address>

What are the asterisks?

• Settings marked with “*1” may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items.
• Settings marked with “*2” cannot be imported or exported.
• Settings marked with “*3” may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country or region.

How do you set the default screen after startup/restoration?

By default, the Home screen is displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when the Auto Reset function is performed. Specify the setting to change the default screen and display the main screen of a different function. If you specify <Status Monitor>, also specify the screen to display after exiting the <Status Monitor> screen.

• <Home> <Copy>
• <Fax> *1
• <Scan> <Secure Print> <Status Monitor>
• <Home>
• <Copy>
• <Fax>*1
• <Scan>
• <Secure Print>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Default Screen After Startup/Restoration> Select a function to display the desired screen

How do you configure the home screen button display settings?

Configure the settings for the buttons displayed in the Home screen. You can select the settings that will be displayed as shortcut buttons, rearrange the order in which the buttons appear, and insert or remove spaces.

• <Select Button to Display>
• <Favorite Copy Settings>
• <Favorite Fax Settings>*1
• <Favorite Scan Settings>
• <Set Display Order>

How do you set the language?

Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.

• <Deutsch> <English>
• <Español> <Français> <Italiano>
• <Português> <日本語>
• <中文(繁體)> <中文(简体)> <한국어>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Language> Select a language <Yes>

How do you set the Remote UI language?

Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens.

• <English>
• <Japanese> <French> <Spanish>
• <German> <Italian> <Portuguese>
• <Chinese (Simplified)> <Chinese (Traditional)> <Korean>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Remote UI Language> Select a language

How do you notify to clean original scan area?

Specify whether to display a message when stains are detected in the document feed scanning area.

• <Off> <On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Notify to Clean Orig. Scan Area> Select <Off> or <On>

How do you set the millimeter/inch entry switch?

Select the unit of measurement.

• <Millimeter> <Inch>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch> Select <Millimeter> or <Inch>

How do you set the gram/pound switch?

Select the unit of measurement for the basis weight. This setting is available when <Select Country/Region> is set to <United States (US)>.

• <Gram> <Pound>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Gram/Pound Switch> Select <Gram> or <Pound>

How do you set the display timing for the cartridge preparation?

Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.

• <Auto> <Off>
• <Custom>
• <On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Display Timing for Cart. Prep.> Select <Off> in <Auto> Enter toner level in <Custom> <Apply>

How do you show warnings?

Specify whether to display a message telling that the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.

• <Off> <On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Show Warnings> Select <Off> or <On> <Apply>

When <Action When Warning> is set to <Stop Printing>, you cannot set this item to <Off>. When <Continue Print. When Cart. Low> is set to <Off>, the message will appear even if you set this item to <Off>.

What actions can you take when a warning appears?

Specify whether to continue printing when the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.

• <Low Cartridge Level>
• <Continue Printing>
• <Stop Printing>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Action When Warning> <Low Cartridge Level> Select <Continue Printing> or <Stop Printing> <Apply> <Yes>

If you change the setting of this item from <Continue Printing> to <Stop Printing>, <Show Warnings> is set to <On>.

How do you display the IP address?

Specify whether to display the machine’s IPv4 address on the <Status Monitor> screen.

• <Off> <On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Display IP Address> Select <Off> or <On>

How do you set the English keyboard layout?

Specify the layout of an USB keyboard if connected to the machine. The factory default settings differ depending on the country or region where the machine was purchased.

• <USA Layout> <UK Layout>

<Menu> <Preferences> <English Keyboard Layout> Select <USA Layout> or <UK Layout>

What are the timer/energy settings?

All the settings related to the timer and energy are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

• <Current Date/Time Settings> *1
• <Date/Time Settings>
• <Date Format> *2
• <Time Format>
• <Auto Reset Time>
• <Function After Auto Reset>
• <Auto Sleep Time>
• <Auto Sleep Daily Timer>
• <Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings>

What are the asterisks?

• Settings marked with “*1” cannot be imported or exported.
• Settings marked with “*2” may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country or region.

How do you set the current date/time settings?

Set the current date and time. Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed, the current date and time are also changed accordingly. The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time goes into effect.

How do you set the date/time settings?

Specify the date and time standard of the region in which the machine is to be installed.

How do you set the time zone?

Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also changed accordingly.

• <(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West> to <(UTC-05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)> to <(UTC +14:00) Kiritimati Island>

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.

How do you set the daylight saving time settings?

Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving time is in effect.

• <Off> <On>
• Start: Month, Week, Day
• End: Month, Week, Day

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight Saving Time Settings> Select <On>, and specify the dates <Apply>

How do you set the date format?

Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).

• <YYYY MM/DD>
• <MM/DD/YYYY>
• <DD/MM YYYY>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date Format> Select the date format

How do you set the time format?

Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.

• <12 Hour (AM/PM)>
• <24 Hour>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Time Format> Select the display setting

How do you set the auto reset time?

If a key is not pressed for a specified period of time, the screen and the settings are initialized to display the default screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. The Auto Reset is not performed in the following cases:

• The setting menu is displayed.

• The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents or sending or receiving faxes.

• An error message is displayed and the Error indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the error does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)

• <Set This Function>

  • <Off>
  • <On>

• <Set Time>

  • 1 to 2 to 9 (min.)

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Auto Reset Time> Select <On> in <Set This Function> Enter the time in <Set Time> <Apply>

The screen displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in <Function After Auto Reset>.

How do you set the function after auto reset?

Select whether to return the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. If <Default Function> is selected, the main screen of the function selected in <Default Screen After Startup/Restoration> is displayed. If <Selected Function> is selected, the display returns to the main screen of the function that was selected.

• <Default Function>
• <Selected Function>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Function After Auto Reset> Select <Default Function> or <Selected Function>

How do you set the auto sleep time?

If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specified period of time, the machine enters sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed. Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to save the most power.

• 1 to 60 (min.)

How do you set the auto sleep daily timer?

You can specify the time when the machine is automatically set to the sleep mode.

• <Set This Function>
  • <Off>
  • <On>
• (0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)

How do you set the sleep mode exit time settings?

Specify the time when the machine is recovered from the sleep mode.

• <Set This Function>
  • <Off>
  • <On>
• (0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)

What are the network settings?

All the settings related to the network are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

• <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>
• <Wireless LAN Settings>
• <Direct Connection Settings>
• <Easy Connection via PC>
• <TCP/IP Settings>
• <SNMP Settings>
• <Use Dedicated Port>
• <Dedicated Port Auth. Method>
• <Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>
• <Ethernet Driver Settings>
• <Use IEEE 802.1X>
• <Firewall Settings>
• <Google Cloud Print Settings>
• <Device Settings Management>
• <Monitoring Service>
• <RMT-SW>
• <Initialize Network Settings>

What are the asterisks?

• Settings marked with “*1” cannot be imported or exported.
• Settings marked with “*2” may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items.

How do you select a wired or wireless LAN?

When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using the following <Wireless LAN Settings>).

• <Wired LAN>
• <Wireless LAN>

How do you adjust the wireless LAN settings?

Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the setting for saving power consumption.

• <SSID Settings> Select to configure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by inputting manually from the operation panel.
• <Select Access Point> Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list. You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK.
• <Enter Manually> Select to configure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify authentication and encryption settings in detail.

What are the security settings?

• <None>
• <WEP>
  • <Open System>
    • WEP Key 1 to 4
  • <Shared Key>
    • WEP Key 1 to 4
• <WPA/WPA2-PSK>
  • <Auto>
  • <AES-CCMP>

What is WPS push button mode?

Select to automatically configure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router.

What is WPS PIN code mode?

Select to configure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router.

How do you set the power save mode?

Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

• <Off>
• <On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Wireless LAN Settings> Read the displayed message <OK> <Power Save Mode> Select <Off> or <On>

How do you view connection information?

Select to view the current wireless LAN settings.

• <MAC Address>
• <Wireless LAN Status>
• <Latest Error Information>
• <Channel>
• <SSID Settings>
• <Security Settings>
• <Power Save Mode>

How do you configure Direct Connection Termination?

Select <On> in <Automatically Terminate Session> and enter the time. Select <Apply> <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you configure Access Point Mode Settings?

Select <On> for each item and select <SSID>/<Network Key>. Enter the SSID/network key. Select <Apply> <Apply> <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you enable the machine to keep waiting for Direct Connection?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Keep Enabled If SSID/ Ntwk Key Spcfd>. Select <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you manually enter the machine’s IP address at the time of Direct Connection?

Enter an arbitrary IP address in <Config. IP Address For Direct Conn.> Select <Apply> <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you start the procedure for Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode)?

Select <Yes> in <Easy Connection via PC>. The connection process starts.

Where can you download Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility?

Download Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility from the Canon website (https://global.canon).

How do you configure the IPv4 address?

If <Auto Acquire> is <Off>, enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address.

How do you check the link-local address that is automatically acquired?

View the <Check IPv6 Settings>.

How do you enable or disable stateless addresses?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Stateless Address Settings>.

How do you enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use DHCPv6>.

How do you specify the IP address of the DNS server in the IPv4 environment?

Enter the desired values for <Primary DNS Server> and <Secondary DNS Server>.

How do you specify the host name of the machine to be registered in the DNS server as well as the name of the domain to which the machine belongs?

Enter the <Host Name> and <Domain Name> for IPv4 and IPv6.

How do you select whether to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine’s IP address is changed?

Select <Off> or <On> in <DNS Dynamic Update> for IPv4.

How do you set the DNS Dynamic Update Interval for IPv4?

Enter a value between 0 to 24 to 48 (hr.).

How do you select whether to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine’s IP address is changed for IPv6?

Select <Off> or <On> in <DNS Dynamic Update> for IPv6.

How do you select whether to register the manual address in IPv6?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Register Manual Address>.

How do you select whether to register the stateful address in IPv6?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Register Stateful Address>.

How do you select whether to register the stateless address in IPv6?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Register Stateless Address>.

How do you set the DNS Dynamic Update Interval for IPv6?

Enter a value between 0 to 24 to 48 (hr.).

How do you specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers in IPv4?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use mDNS>.

How do you specify the mDNS name in IPv4?

Enter the name in <mDNS Name>.

How do you specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers in IPv6?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use mDNS>.

How do you specify whether to use the same mDNS name for IPv6 as that for IPv4?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4>.

How do you specify the mDNS name in IPv6?

Enter the name in <mDNS Name>.

How do you enable or disable WINS resolution?

Select <Off> or <On> in <WINS Resolution>.

How do you specify the WINS server address?

Enter the address in <WINS Server Address>.

How do you enable or disable LPD?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use LPD Printing>.

How do you set the reception timeout period after which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted for LPD?

Enter the time in <RX Timeout>.

How do you enable or disable RAW?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use RAW Printing>.

How do you set the reception timeout period after which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted for RAW?

Enter the time in <RX Timeout>.

How do you enable or disable the use of WSD protocol for automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer or scanner?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use WSD Printing>.

How do you enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer by using the WSD protocol?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use WSD Browsing>.

How do you enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the scanner by using the WSD protocol?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use WSD Scanning>.

How do you enable or disable the function to acquire information for the scanner by using the WSD protocol from a computer?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use Computer Scanning>.

How do you enable or disable the function to search for devices on the network by using multicast?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use Multicast Discovery>.

How do you enable or disable PASV mode for FTP?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use FTP PASV Mode>.

How do you enable or disable HTTP?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use HTTP>.

How do you enable or disable encrypted communication by establishing a virtual private network (VPN) via IPSec?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use IPSec>. Select <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you change port numbers for LPD?

Enter a value between 1 to 515 to 65535 in <LPD>.

How do you change port numbers for RAW?

Enter a value between 1 to 9100 to 65535 in <RAW>.

How do you change port numbers for WSD Multicast Discovery?

Enter a value between 1 to 3702 to 65535 in <WSD Multicast Discovery>.

How do you change port numbers for HTTP?

Enter a value between 1 to 80 to 65535 in <HTTP>.

How do you change port numbers for Multicast Discovery?

Enter a value between 1 to 427 to 65535 in <Multicast Discovery>.

How do you change port numbers for POP3?

Enter a value between 1 to 110 to 65535 in <POP3>.

How do you change port numbers for SMTP?

Enter a value between 1 to 25 to 65535 in <SMTP>.

How do you change port numbers for FTP?

Enter a value between 1 to 21 to 65535 in <FTP>.

How do you change port numbers for SNMP?

Enter a value between 1 to 161 to 65535 in <SNMP>.

How do you select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives?

Select <1300>, <1400>, or <1500> in <MTU Size>.

How do you enable or disable SNMPv1?

Select <Off> or <On> in <SNMPv1 Settings>. Select <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you enable or disable SNMPv3?

Select <Off> or <On> in <SNMPv3 Settings>. Select <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running SNMP-compatible software?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from Host>. Select <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you specify whether to conform to the advanced specifications (RFC2790) of the protocol when monitoring the machine status from the SNMP-compatible software?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Format Host Rsrcs. MIB to RFC2790>. Select <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you enable or disable the dedicated port?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use Dedicated Port>. Select <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you specify whether to limit the authentication method specifically to the secure one when using the dedicated port?

Select <Mode 1> or <Mode 2> in <Dedicated Port Auth. Method>.

How do you specify a wait time for connecting to a network?

Enter the time in <Wait Time for Conn. at Startup>.

How do you select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Auto Detect>.

How do you select the communication mode?

Select <Half Duplex> or <Full Duplex> in <Communication Mode>.

How do you select the ethernet type?

Select <10BASE-T>, <100BASE-TX>, or <1000BASE-T> in <Ethernet Type>.

How do you check the MAC address of the machine?

View the <MAC Address>.

How do you enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use IEEE 802.1X>. Select <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified IPv4 addresses?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> in <IPv4 Address Filter>. Select <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified IPv6 addresses?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> in <IPv6 Address Filter>. Select <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you enable or disable settings for filtering packets sent to or received from devices with specified MAC addresses?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> in <MAC Address Filter>. Select <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you enable or disable Google Cloud Print?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use Google Cloud Print>.

How do you specify whether to use imageWARE Enterprise Management Console plug-ins to manage machine data such as settings and Address Book destinations?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Device Settings Management>.

How do you enable communication with a remote monitoring server?

Select <Yes> in <Monitoring Service>.

How do you change the RMT-SW switch settings?

Select <Off> or <On> in <RMT-SW>. Select <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you return the Network Settings to the factory defaults?

Select <Initialize Network Settings>.

How do you enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use as USB Device>.

How do you specify whether to use a USB memory device?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Use USB Storage Device>. Select <Apply> <OK>. Restart the machine.

How do you invert the display colors?

Select <Off> or <On> in <Invert Screen Colors>.

How do you adjust the brightness of the display?

Adjust the brightness in <Brightness>. Select <Apply>.

How do you specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed?

Enter a number for the interval in <Message Display Time>. Select <Apply>.

What are the settings related to image quality adjustment?

• <Auto Adjust Gradation>
• <Auto Correction Settings>
• <Correct Print Color Mismatch>
• <Black Text Processing for Color>
• <Adjust Print Position>
• <Special Processing>
• <Remove Streaks from Scan Area>

How do you adjust the gradation, density, and color in copies or printouts?

Select <Full Adjust>, <Quick Adjust>, or <Adjust Copy Image> in <Auto Adjust Gradation>.

How do you configure the settings to automatically perform a quick gradation adjustment or color mismatch correction?

Select <Off>, <When Turning Main Power ON>, or <After Printing First Job> in <Auto Adjust Image Regularly>.

How do you select the timing at which the Correct Print Color Mismatch function is to be performed automatically after the machine is turned ON?

Select <After Printing First Job> or <When Turning Main Power ON> in <Correct Print Color Mismatch>.

How do you adjust the degree of effect for black or blackish text in color documents for the feeder?

Select a value from the seven levels.

How do you adjust the degree of effect for black or blackish text in color documents for the platen glass?

Select a value from the seven levels.

How do you adjust the print position for the Multi-Purpose Tray vertically on the front side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>.

How do you adjust the print position for the Multi-Purpose Tray horizontally on the front side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>.

How do you adjust the print position for the Multi-Purpose Tray vertically on the back side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>.

How do you adjust the print position for the Multi-Purpose Tray horizontally on the back side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>.

How do you adjust the print position for Drawer 1 vertically on the front side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>.

How do you adjust the print position for Drawer 1 horizontally on the front side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>.

How do you adjust the print position for Drawer 1 vertically on the back side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>.

How do you adjust the print position for Drawer 1 horizontally on the back side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>.

How do you adjust the print position for Drawer 2 vertically on the front side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>.

How do you adjust the print position for Drawer 2 horizontally on the front side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>.

How do you adjust the print position for Drawer 2 vertically on the back side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>.

How do you adjust the print position for Drawer 2 horizontally on the back side?

Enter a value between -0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm)) in <Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>.

How do you enable Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only) for the Multi-Purpose Tray?

Select <On> in <Multi-Purpose Tray>. Select <Apply> <Yes>.

How do you enable Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only) for Drawer 1?

Select <On> in <Drawer 1>. Select <Apply> <Yes>.

How do you enable Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only) for Drawer 2?

Select <On> in <Drawer 2>. Select <Apply> <Yes>.

How do you enable Rough Surface Paper Mode for the Multi-Purpose Tray?

Select <On> in <Multi-Purpose Tray>. Select <Apply> <Yes>.

How do you enable Rough Surface Paper Mode for Drawer 1?

Select <On> in <Drawer 1>. Select <Apply> <Yes>.

How do you enable Rough Surface Paper Mode for Drawer 2?

Select <On> in <Drawer 2>. Select <Apply> <Yes>.

How do you enable Envelope Flap Closing Prevention?

Select <On> in <Env. Flap Closing Prevention>. Select <Yes>.

How do you set Paper Wrinkle Correction?

Select <Off>, <Mode 1>, or <Mode 2> in <Paper Wrinkle Correction>.

How can I correct paper curl?

If the printed paper curls, set this item. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode 1>. First, try with <Mode 1>.

• This setting is effective for plain paper and thin paper.
• Setting a greater improvement effect may result in faded printouts or slower printing speed. For MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw
  • <Mode 1> is effective for envelopes, and <Mode 2>, for envelopes and thin paper.
  • When <Mode 1> or <Mode 2> is specified, printed images may be blurry.

How can I reduce paper sticking at output?

When performing 2-sided printing in color, paper may stick together at the output. Setting this item will slow down the printing speed of prints that may easily stick together, to reduce sticking. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode 1>.

How can I improve uneven print density in high humidity?

Print density may be uneven when the machine is used in an environment with high humidity. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On> and use the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images and text may be blurry.

How can I improve blurry printed images and text in low humidity?

When using the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images and text may be blurry. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, print density may be lower or uneven when the machine is used in an environment with high humidity.

How can I reduce ghosting in printouts?

If the printout reveals a ghost of an image in the same page, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, toner may not be fixed sufficiently, resulting in faded printouts.

How can I reduce ghosting in continuous printing?

If continuous printing involves the generation of ghost images, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, print density may be uneven.

How can I clean a dirty fixing assembly?

If the fixing assembly is dirty, edges of the paper may get smudged. In this case, changing the setting of this item may solve the problem. The higher level you specify, the higher frequency of regular cleaning is performed. If a higher level is specified, the printing speed will be slower.

How can I automatically clean the fixing assembly?

If the fixing assembly is dirty, edges or the back side of the paper may get smudged. You can configure to perform automatic cleaning of the fixing assembly to prevent smudges. When <On> is specified, a sheet of paper is output each time cleaning is performed. Configure so that paper feed is performed from the paper source in which paper usable for cleaning is loaded. You can use the following paper for cleaning.

• Paper sizes: A4/Letter
• Paper types: Plain 1 to 3/Recycled 1 or 2

How can I reduce condensation when performing 2-sided printing after 1-sided printing?

When performing 2-sided printing after 1-sided printing, the printed images may be faint due to moisture condensation. In this case, setting to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.

How can I reduce condensation when performing 2-sided printing?

If the printed images are faint due to moisture condensation when performing 2-sided printing, setting to other than <Off> may solve the problem. For MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw, the improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than <Mode 1>. If you set to other than <Off>, the print may be faded or the printing speed may be slower.

How can I correct uneven gloss?

When gloss unevenness occurs in the leading edge of paper, setting to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, toner may not be fixed sufficiently, resulting in faded printouts.

How can I correct void on the back side of thin paper when performing 2-sided printing?

When performing 2-sided printing on thin paper, void may occur on the backside of the paper in the leading edge. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, print quality may be affected.

How can I correct void when printing on thin paper?

If printing on thin paper produces void in the leading edge of the paper, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, printouts may be faded.

How can I reduce uneven print density that looks like water drops?

If print density is uneven in a way that the print looks like a water drops pattern, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, print quality may be affected.

How can I correct a faded or streaky printout when using paper containing much paper dust?

Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.

How can I correct lightly colored white areas?

If white areas are lightly colored, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, print density may be lighter.

How can I correct color mismatch?

If color mismatch occurs, setting to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.

How can I reduce streaks on printouts?

If streaks appear on printouts, setting to <On> may solve the problem.

How can I reduce toner flaking?

Toner may peel off the printed page depending on the paper type or the environmental conditions. In this case, setting this item may solve the problem. For MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw:

• The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode 1>. First, try the adjustment with <Mode 1>.
• Setting a greater improvement effect may result in curled printouts or slower printing speed.

For MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw:

• If you set to <On>, ghost images may appear in blank areas.

How can I reduce toner fixing stain?

When toner stain (spotted stain) appears on the printed paper, the problem may not be solved even if you are cleaning the fixing assembly. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower.

How can I reduce faded or curled printouts in high humidity?

When the machine is used in an environment with high humidity, faded or curled printouts may be output. In this case, changing the setting of this item may solve the problem.

• <Auto> Automatically adjusts toner fixing.

• <Mode 1> If printouts are curled, set to this option.

• <Mode 2> If printouts are faded, set to this option.

  • If you set to <Mode 1>, printouts may be faded.
  • If you set to <Mode 2>, printouts may be curled.

How do I prioritize print speed or reduce toner usage when printing black and white print data mixed with color data?

When black and white print data is mixed with color data, specify whether to prioritize the print speed or to reduce the toner usage of the cyan, magenta, and yellow toner cartridges when printing data.

• <Mode 1> Prioritizes the print speed when printing.
• <Mode 2> Reduces the toner usage of toner cartridges when printing.

How do I reduce faint printouts after replacing toner cartridges?

Printouts may be faded immediately after replacement of toner cartridges with new ones. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

• If you set to <On>, the setting will become effective with the next replacement of toner cartridges.
• Immediately after cartridge replacement, a certain amount of time is required for toner to be evenly distributed inside the cartridge.

How can I prevent stains from being scanned?

You can configure a setting to prevent stains from being scanned when they are detected in the document feed scanning area. Selecting <On> removes streaks generated by the edge of the original. When streaks are removed, areas with stains are not scanned. Clean the original scanning area so that the original is scanned satisfactorily.

When should I clean the fixing assembly to reduce paper back side stain?

Clean the fixing assembly when the edge or back side of the printout is smudged.

When should I clean the fixing assembly?

Clean the fixing assembly after a toner cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on printouts.

When should I clean the transfer belt inside the machine (ITB)?

Clean the transfer belt inside the machine to prevent the print quality from deteriorating.

When should I clean the feeder rollers?

Clean the feeder rollers if originals become dirty after being fed through the feeder.

How can I control condensation?

When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation occurs, which may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. Select <On> to remove dew condensation in the machine. When selecting <On>, specify whether to restrict jobs. While condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper may be output. If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation removal.

What are the common settings for each function of the machine?

The common settings include:

• Paper Feed Settings
• Print Settings
• Scan Settings
• Generate File
• Fax Setup Guide

Settings marked with “*1” may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items. Settings marked with “*2” cannot be imported or exported.

How can I configure paper feed settings?

Configure paper feed settings by enabling or disabling the automatic drawer selection feature for the paper sources. If automatic drawer selection is set to <On> when printing documents, the machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with the appropriate paper size. Also, when the paper runs out, this setting enables continuous printing by switching from one paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size.

How can I switch the paper feed method when printing on paper with logos?

Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. In general use, to print on paper with logos, you need to change how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are performing 1- or 2-sided printing. However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load the paper with the logo side facing down for 1-sided printing in the same way as for 2-sided printing.

What is speed priority?

When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing. We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.

What is print side priority?

To print on a specific side of paper, you do not need to flip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2-sided printing is selected.

• If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper source that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided printing, <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper source instead. In this case, you need to load the paper in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected.
• 1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.

How can I configure printing operation settings?

Configure printing operation settings by specifying whether if the machine stops printing a job due to an error, the job will be automatically deleted after a specified period of time. To configure this, select <On> in <Set This Function>, enter the time in <Set Time>, <Apply>, <OK>, and restart the machine.

How can I configure scan settings?

Configure scan settings by specifying whether to automatically go online for remote scanning (scan standby mode) without using the operation panel.

How can I set the machine to automatically go offline if a scan is not performed within a specified time?

If scan is not performed within a specified period of time after the screen is displayed (the machine is set online for scanning), the machine automatically becomes offline. Specify the time period at which the machine becomes offline by selecting <On> in <Set This Function>, enter the time in <Set Time> and <Apply>.

How can I configure file generation settings?

Configure file generation settings by specifying settings for the gamma value for converting scanned originals into files.

How can I specify the gamma value used when converting scanned color originals into the specified file format?

Select the gamma value used when converting scanned color originals into the specified file format. You can specify the same gamma value as that of the monitor which is to be used for viewing the converted files. The files are displayed with brightness that is true to the original documents. For the gamma value of a monitor display, see the instruction manual included with the display.

How can I run OCR (Optical Character Recognition) on a text original to create a “searchable PDF”?

Specify whether the machine determines the original’s text direction and detects the original direction by selecting <Off> or <On> in <Smart Scan> and <Apply>.

How can I change the PDF encryption level to “128-bit” or “256-bit” when generating an encrypted PDF?

If “256-bit” is selected, the version compatible with Acrobat can be changed. Select <Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent> or <Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent>.

How can I display on-screen instructions for specifying settings, including the fax number and the RX mode?

Select the <Fax Setup Guide>.

What are the copy settings?

This section describes how to specify the copy settings.

What are the printer settings?

This section describes how to specify printer settings.

What are the settings for sending faxes and scanned originals?

This section describes how to specify settings for sending faxes and scanned originals.

What are the settings for receiving faxes and e-mails?

This section describes how to specify settings for receiving faxes and e-mails.

What are the settings for scanning originals and printing stored files?

This section describes the settings for scanning originals and printing stored files.

What are the settings for secure print?

This section describes the settings for Secure Print.

What are all the copy settings and their descriptions?

All the settings related to the copy are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ). Asterisks () indicate that settings marked with an asterisk () may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items.

How do I change the default settings for copy?

You can change the default settings about copy. The selected settings are used as the default settings of the copy function.

What is the range for the number of copies?

1 to 999

What are the paper source options?

• Multi-Purpose Tray
• Drawer 1
• Drawer 2*
• Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)*

What are the density settings?

Nine Levels

What are the adjust background density settings?

• Auto
• Adjust (Manual) – Nine Levels

What are the density by color settings?

• Red: Nine Levels
• Green: Nine Levels
• Blue: Nine Levels

What are the copy ratio settings?

• Custom Ratio
• 100% Direct
• Auto
• 400% Max
• 200%
• 129% STMT->LTR
• 78% LGL->LTR
• 64% LTR->STMT
• 50%
• 25% Min

What are the 2-sided printing settings?

• Off
• 1-Sided->2-Sided
• 2-Sided->2-Sided *
• 2-Sided->1-Sided *

What are the Orig./Fin. Type settings?

• Non 1
• Off
• 2 on 1
• 4 on 1

What are the Layout settings?

• Original Type
  • Text/Photo/Map (Speed)
  • Text/Photo/Map
  • Text/Photo/Map (Quality)
• Printed Image
  • Text

What are the Collate settings?

• Off
• On

What are the Erase Frame settings?

• Off
• On

What are the Sharpness settings?

Seven Levels

What are the Color Balance settings?

• Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black
  • 17 Levels

What are the Fine Adjust settings?

• Yellow / Magenta / Cyan / Black
  • High: 17 Levels
  • Medium: 17 Levels
  • Low: 17 Levels

What are all the settings related to the printer?

All the settings related to the printer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

What do Asterisks (*) mean?

• Settings marked with “*1” may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items.
• Settings marked with “*2” may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country or region.
• Settings marked with “*3” cannot be imported or exported.

What is the priority of settings?

If a print setting is specified both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the specification from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specification from the operation panel becomes effective in some specific cases, such as when performing PS/PCL printing and printing from UNIX or other operating system that does not support printer drivers.

What are the printer settings?

Configure settings about printing and printer operations.

What is Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing?

Select whether printing is performed in accordance with the printer driver’s settings for paper size and type taking priority over the settings made for each paper source under <Paper Settings> in the Home screen. By selecting <On>, you can print from the paper source specified in the printer driver, regardless of the paper settings on the machine. An error message can be set to display if the loaded paper size is largely different from that set in the printer driver.

What are the Prioritize Driver Settings settings for Multi-Purpose Tray?

• Off
• On

What are the Action When Size Mismatch settings for Multi-Purpose Tray?

• Force Output
• Display Error

What are the Prioritize Driver Settings settings for Drawer 1?

• Off
• On

What are the Action When Size Mismatch settings for Drawer 1?

• Force Output
• Display Error

What are the Prioritize Driver Settings settings for Drawer 2?

• Off
• On

What are the Action When Size Mismatch settings for Drawer 2?

• Force Output
• Display Error

How do I change Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing
6. Select the paper source
7. Select <On> in <Prioritize Driver Settings>
8. Action When Size Mismatch
9. Select <Force Output> or <Display Error>
10. Apply

What is Force Output?

Continue printing even when the paper size setting in the printer driver and the loaded paper are largely different.

What is Display Error?

When the paper size setting in the printer driver and the loaded paper are largely different, an error message is displayed and printing is stopped.

What happens if the printer driver’s settings do not match the size and type of loaded paper with <On> selected?

A paper jam or printing error may occur.

What are the Copies settings?

Set the number of copies to print.

1 to 999

How do I change the Copies setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Copies
6. Set the number of copies to print
7. Apply

What are the 2-Sided Printing settings?

Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.

• Off
• On

How do I change the 2-Sided Printing settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. 2-Sided Printing
6. Select <Off> or <On>

What are the Default Paper settings?

Set the default paper size and type. Printing will be performed with paper of the size and type set here when you want to print from an OS not supporting printer drivers or from a mobile device or other device not supporting paper size and type settings.

How do I change the Default Paper settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Default Paper
6. Select the paper size
7. Select the paper type

What is Paper Size Override?

Select whether to switch between printing on A4 and Letter size paper if one of these paper sizes is loaded but the other is not. When you select <On>, if you specify A4 size paper to print from the computer but A4 size paper is not loaded in the machine, it will print your document on Letter size paper.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Paper Size Override setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Paper Size Override
6. Select <Off> or <On>

What print settings can I specify from an application or the printer driver?

You can specify print settings, such as the number of copies or 1-sided/2-sided printing, from an application or the printer driver. However, the <Paper Size Override> setting can only be specified on the machine.

What are the Print Quality settings?

You can change settings related to print quality.

What are the Density settings?

Adjust the toner density.

• Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black – 17 Levels

What are the Fine Adjust settings?

• Yellow / Magenta / Cyan / Black
  • High / Medium / Low – 17 Levels

How do I adjust the density of each color?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Density
7. Adjust the density of each color
8. Apply

What can I use <Fine Adjust> to adjust?

You can use <Fine Adjust> to adjust the toner density of each color to three density levels: high density, medium density, and low density.

Can I set <Fine Adjust> when <Toner Save> is set to <On>?

No, when <Toner Save> is set to <On>, you cannot set this item.

What are the Toner Save settings?

You can save toner consumption. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other appearance characteristics before proceeding to final printing of a large job.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Toner Save setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Toner Save
7. Select <Off> or <On>

What are the Gradation settings?

Specify the processing method used to reproduce gradation. <High 2> gives finer gradation than <High 1>.

• High 1
• High 2

How do I change the Gradation settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Gradation
7. Select <High 1> or <High 2>

When are the Gradation settings only available?

This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

What are the Density Fine Adjustment settings?

When fine lines or small text are faded, increase the density to give less faded print.

Five Levels

How do I adjust the Density Fine Adjustment value?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Density Fine Adjustment
7. Adjust the adjustment value
8. Apply

What does a change in the density affect?

A change in the density affects objects other than text or lines and the color balance.

When are the Density Fine Adjustment settings only available?

This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>.

What are the Resolution settings?

Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.

• 1200 dpi
• 600 dpi

How do I change the Resolution setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Resolution
7. Select <1200 dpi> or <600 dpi>

What are the Special Smoothing Mode settings?

Specify the mode to print data with a smooth finish. If the quality of the printout is not acceptable in <Mode 1> (default), try another mode.

• Mode 1
• Mode 2
• Mode 3
• Mode 4
• Mode 5
• Mode 6

How do I select the Special Smoothing Mode?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Special Smoothing Mode
7. Select the mode

What is Mode 1?

Prints an outline of dark text or a figure with a smooth finish. This is the optimal mode for various types of printing.

What is Mode 2?

Prints figure outline and internal halftones with a smooth finish.

What is Mode 3?

Prints dark text or lines on an area with a colored background with a smooth finish.

What is Mode 4?

Prints an image such as a photo or an outline of a figure or text with a smooth finish.

What is Mode 5?

Prints an image and halftones with an even balance.

What is Mode 6?

Prints the entire image with a smooth finish.

What happens when <Error Diffusion> is set to <On> in <Halftones>?

When <Error Diffusion> is set to <On> in <Halftones>, printing in modes other than <Mode 5> all produces the same results.

What happens when <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>?

When <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>, all settings other than <Mode 6> produce the same result.

What are the Toner Volume Correction settings?

When the toner volume for text or lines exceeds the limit value of the machine, make a correction so that the toner volume does not exceed the limit value.

• Standard
• Gradation Priority
• Text Priority

How do I change the Toner Volume Correction setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Toner Volume Correction
7. Select the item

What is Standard?

Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper resolution is ensured for text and lines, and that proper color tone is ensured for other types of print data.

What is Gradation Priority?

Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper color tone is ensured for all types of print data.

What is Text Priority?

Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper resolution is ensured for all types of print data.

What are the Line Control settings?

Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines.

• Resolution Priority
• Gradation Priority

How do I change the Line Control settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Line Control
7. Select <Resolution Priority> or <Gradation Priority>

What is Resolution Priority?

Draws lines with the same resolution as for text.

What is Gradation Priority?

Draws lines while maintaining color and gradation.

What are the Width Adjustment settings?

Configure a setting to print text or fine lines in bold.

• Off
• On
  • Text
  • Line
  • Text and Line

How do I change the Width Adjustment settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Width Adjustment
7. On
8. Select the target

What might happen if you set the Width Adjustment to <On>?

If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slower or image quality may be affected.

Might bold printing still not be possible with Width Adjustment set to <On>?

Yes, even if you set to <On>, bold printing may not be possible depending on the printing application.

What are the Advanced Smoothing settings?

Configure the smoothing setting to print the outline of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using applications) or text with a smooth finish.

What does Advanced Smoothing do?

Select whether to perform smoothing processing. <Level 2> prints an outline with a smoother finish than <Level 1>. First try with <Level 1>.

• Off
• Level 1
• Level 2

How do I change the Advanced Smoothing settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Advanced Smoothing
7. Advanced Smoothing
8. Select the item

What does Apply to Graphics do?

Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to graphics when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Level 1> or <Level 2>.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Apply to Graphics setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Advanced Smoothing
7. Apply to Graphics
8. Select <Off> or <On>

What does Apply to Text do?

Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to the text when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Level 1> or <Level 2>.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Apply to Text setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Advanced Smoothing
7. Apply to Text
8. Select <Off> or <On>

When are the settings of <Apply to Graphics> and <Apply to Text> only effective?

The settings of <Apply to Graphics> and <Apply to Text> are only effective when [Advanced Smoothing] is set to [Printer Default] in the printer driver.

What are the Gradation Smoothing settings?

Configure the smoothing setting to print the gradation (color density) of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using applications) or bit map images with a smooth finish.

What does Gradation Smoothing do?

Select whether to perform smoothing processing. <Level 2> prints an outline with a smoother finish than <Level 1>. First try with <Level 1>.

• Off
• Level 1
• Level 2

How do I change the Gradation Smoothing settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Gradation Smoothing
7. Gradation Smoothing
8. Select the item

What does Apply to Graphics do?

Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to graphics when <Gradation Smoothing> is set to <Level 1> or <Level 2>.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Apply to Graphics settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Gradation Smoothing
7. Apply to Graphics
8. Select <Off> or <On>

What does Apply to Images do?

Specify whether to apply smoothing processing to images when <Gradation Smoothing> is set to <Level 1> or <Level 2>.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Apply to Images setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Gradation Smoothing
7. Apply to Images
8. Select <Off> or <On>

What does [Gradation Smoothing] in the printer driver apply to?

[Gradation Smoothing] in the printer driver applies only to graphics data. The setting configured here applies to smoothing processing for image data.

What are the Enhance Text for B&W Printing settings?

When printing a color document in black and white, using this item adjusts the density of text to make it more legible. This is useful and effective for printing in black and white a color document containing light-colored text.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Enhance Text for B&W Printing setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Print Quality
6. Enhance Text for B&W Printing
7. Select <Off> or <On>

Does Enhance Text for B&W Printing apply to text drawn as graphics or images?

No, this item does not apply to text drawn as graphics or images.

Does Enhance Text for B&W Printing have an affect on PDF or PS print data?

No, this item has no effect on PDF or PS print data.

What might happen if you set Enhance Text for B&W Printing to <Off> when printing documents that contain light-colored text?

If you set this item to <Off> when printing documents that contain light-colored text, the text is printed thinner than when <On> is selected, so it may be more or less illegible.

Might the print result be such that the text looks emphasized even when this item is set to <Off>?

Yes, even when this item is set to <Off>, the print result may be such that text looks emphasized. If so, also set <Advanced Smoothing> to <Off>.

What are the Layout settings?

Specify the page layout settings such as binding position and margin values.

What is Binding Location?

If you are binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind on the long or short edge. Specify the setting of this item in combination with <Gutter>, which specifies the binding margin to apply to the binding position.

• Long Edge
• Short Edge

How do I change the Binding Location settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Layout
6. Binding Location
7. Select <Long Edge> or <Short Edge>

When do I specify Long Edge?

Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper.

When do I specify Short Edge?

Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper.

What does Gutter do?

Shift the print position to adjust the binding margin to apply to the binding edge specified by <Binding Location>. The value “0.00” exerts no effect on the binding margin.

-1.90 to 0.00 to +1.90 (inches) or -50.0 to 00.0 to +50.0 (mm)

How do I change the Gutter setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Layout
6. Gutter
7. Specify the binding margin
8. Apply

How do I enter the setting value for Gutter?

Specify the print position shift direction and shift width. Whether the setting value is a “+” or “-” value determines the binding edge along which to adjust the binding margin. The margin width can be adjusted in 0.01" (0.5 mm) increments.

What does a + sign setting value mean for Long Edge?

Left edge of paper

What does a – sign setting value mean for Long Edge?

Right edge of paper

What does a + sign setting value mean for Short Edge?

Top edge of paper

What does a – sign setting value mean for Short Edge?

Bottom edge of paper

What does Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge do?

Irrespective of the paper source, you can shift the print position in units of “0.01” (0.5 mm)" for all print jobs.

-2.00 to 0.00 to +2.00 (inches) or -50.0 to 00.0 to +50.0 (mm)

How do I change the Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Layout
6. Select the combination of adjustment direction and printing side
7. Specify the offset value
8. Apply

What does Offset Short Edge (Front)/Offset Long Edge (Front) do?

Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing up.

What does Offset Short Edge (Back)/Offset Long Edge (Back) do?

Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing down.

How do I enter the setting value for Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge?

For <Offset Short Edge (Front)>/<Offset Short Edge (Back)>, specify a value with a “+” sign to shift the print position in the left-to-right direction. For <Offset Long Edge (Front)>/<Offset Long Edge (Back)>, specify a value with a “+” sign to shift the print position in the up-to-down direction. To shift in the reverse direction, specify a value with a “-” sign.

What are the Auto Skip Error settings?

Printing stops if a certain error occurs in the process. However, if you set this item to <On>, the certain error will be skipped and printing can continue. Normally, set this item to <Off>.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Auto Skip Error setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Auto Skip Error
6. Select <Off> or <On>

What are the Timeout settings?

Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data reception interruption.

5 to 15 to 300 (sec.)

How do I change the Timeout settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Timeout
6. Set the time period
7. Apply

What are the Personality settings?

Specify the mode in which the machine should operate when the format of document data is unknown.

• Auto
• PS*1
• PCL*1
• PDF
• XPS
• Imaging

How do I change the Personality setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Personality
6. Select the Personality mode

What are the Color Mode settings?

Select whether to print data in color or black and white.

• Auto (Color/B&W)
• Black & White

How do I change the Color Mode settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Color Mode
6. Select <Auto (Color/B&W)> or <Black & White>

What are the Compressed Image Output settings?

Specify the operation that is to be performed when the image quality has degraded due to insufficient memory during printing.

• Output
• Display Error

How do I change the Compressed Image Output settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Compressed Image Output
6. Select <Output> or <Display Error>

What does Output do?

Continues printing regardless of how much the image quality has degraded.

What does Display Error do?

If the image quality has degraded significantly, an error message is displayed, and printing is stopped.

What are the Prioritize MP Tray settings?

Specify whether to feed paper from the multi-purpose tray when Auto Select Paper is enabled. If <On> is selected, paper is fed from the multi-purpose tray when paper of the same size and same type is loaded in both the multi-purpose tray and paper drawer.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Prioritize MP Tray settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. Prioritize MP Tray
6. Select <Off> or <On>

What are the UFR II settings?

You can change the settings that become effective when printing from the UFR II printer driver.

What are the Halftones settings?

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

What are the Error Diffusion settings?

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Error Diffusion setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. UFR II
6. Halftones
7. Error Diffusion
8. Select <Off> or <On>

When is this setting only available?

This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

What may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used?

The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

What are the Resolution/Gradation settings?

Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be specified for each image type in any one document.

• Text
  • Resolution
  • Gradation
• Graphics
  • Resolution
  • Gradation
• Image
  • Resolution
  • Gradation

How do I change the Resolution/Gradation settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. UFR II
6. Halftones
7. Resolution/Gradation
8. Select the type of image
9. Select <Resolution> or <Gradation>

What does the Type of image setting mean?

Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics> represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

What does the Resolution setting value mean?

Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.

What does the Gradation setting value mean?

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.

What are the Matching Method settings?

Specify the processing method used to correct the color.

• General
• Perceptual
• Colorimetric
• Vivid Photo

How do I change the Matching Method setting?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. UFR II
6. Matching Method
7. Select the item

What does General do?

Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.

What does Perceptual do?

Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.

What does Colorimetric do?

Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.

What does Vivid Photo do?

Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.

What are the Gray Compensation settings?

Configures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is “R = G = B” is printed using only the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can be specified for each image type in any one document.

• Text
  • Off
  • On
• Graphics
  • Off
  • On
• Image
  • Off
  • On

How do I change the Gray Compensation settings?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. UFR II
6. Gray Compensation
7. Select the type of image
8. Select <Off> or <On>

What are the Paper Save settings?

Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Paper Save settings for UFR II?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. UFR II
6. Paper Save
7. Select <Off> or <On>

What are the PCL settings?

Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.

What are the Paper Save settings?

Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.

• Off
• On

How do I change the Paper Save settings for PCL?

1. Menu
2. Function Settings
3. Printer
4. Printer Settings
5. PCL
6. Paper Save
7. Select <Off> or <On>

What are the Orientation settings?

Select <Portrait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.

• Portrait
• Landscape

How do I select the character code?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Character Code> to select the character code.

How do I set a custom paper size?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Custom Paper>, then select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension> and <Y dimension>. To disable custom paper size, select <Off>.

What are the units of measurement I can use to set a custom paper size?

You can select millimeters or inches by going to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Unit of Measure>.

How do I specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <X dimension>, specify the dimension, then click <Apply>. The dimension range is 3 to 8 1/2 (inches) or 77 to 216 (mm).

How do I specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Y dimension>, specify the dimension, then click <Apply>. The dimension range is 5 to 14 (inches) or 127 to 355 (mm).

How do I append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF)?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Append CR to LF>, then select <Yes>. Selecting this will move the print position to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If <No> is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.

How do I expand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of Letter size?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Enlarge A4 Print Width>, then select <On> to enable, or <Off> to disable this setting.

What are the printing methods used to reproduce halftones for optimal image quality in PCL?

There are two printing methods used to reproduce halftones for optimal image quality in PCL:

• Error Diffusion
• Resolution/Gradation

How do I use Error Diffusion?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Halftones> <Error Diffusion>, then select <On> to enable, or <Off> to disable this setting.

• This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
• The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

How do I use Resolution/Gradation?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation>. Then select the type of image from the following:

• Text
• Graphics
• Image

Then select <Resolution> or <Gradation>.

What are the Resolution/Gradation settings for PCL?

Type of image	Setting value
Text represents letters and characters	Resolution – Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
	Gradation – Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.
Graphics represents lines and figures	Resolution – Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
	Gradation – Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.
Image represents photos and images	Resolution – Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
	Gradation – Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.

How do I correct the color?

You can correct the color by going to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Matching Method> and select the item.

What are the Matching Method settings for PCL?

• General – Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.
• Perceptual – Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.
• Colorimetric – Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.
• Vivid Photo – Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.

How do I configure a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is “R = G = B” is printed using only the K (black) toner?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Gray Compensation> then select the type of image from the following:

• Text
• Graphics
• Image

Then select <Off> or <On>

How do I print barcodes?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <BarDIMM>, then select <Enable>. If <Enable> is selected, the machine will generate bar codes when it receives bar code commands from the host computer. If <Disable> is selected, bar codes will not be generated, even if bar code commands are sent from the host computer.

• To enable the BarDIMM menu, it is necessary to activate the Barcode Printing Kit. When you are not printing bar codes, make sure to disable the BarDIMM menu. Otherwise, the processing speed of regular print jobs may be reduced.
• The default setting is <Disable>. If you activate the Barcode Printing Kit, it changes to <Enable>.

How do I specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to be used for bar code commands when the host computer does not support the standard Escape Code?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <FreeScape>, then select an escape code. The following are available escape codes:

• Off

• ~

• "

• #

• $

• /

• \

• ?

• {

• }

• |

• This setting is available only when <BarDIMM> is enabled.

How do I specify the PS printing settings?

You can specify the PS printing settings, such as page layout and print quality, by going to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS>.

How do I specify the amount of time before a job times out?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Job Timeout>, specify the seconds for job timeout, then click <Apply>. If a job has not finished within the set time limit, the job automatically cancels. The timeout range is 0 to 3600 (sec.).

How do I determine whether an error page is printed when an error is encountered?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Print PS Errors>, then select <On> to enable, or <Off> to disable this setting.

How do I configure a setting so that black text of which color information is “R = G = B = 0%,” “C = M = Y = 100%,” or “C = M = Y = 0%/K = 100%” is printed using only the K (black) toner?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Pure Black Text>, then select <On> to enable, or <Off> to disable this setting. When <Off> is selected, text is printed based on the <Output Profile> setting.

How do I specify the printing method used when black text overlaps a colored background or figure?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Black Overprint>, then select <Off> or <On>. This option is not displayed when <Pure Black Text> is set to <Off>.

What are the Black Overprint settings?

• Off – Outlines black text from a colored background or figure first, then prints black text in the outlined part. Printouts may be faded much more than <On>, or text may be outlined.
• On – Prints all the colored backgrounds and figures, and overlaps black text on these backgrounds and figures using only the black (K) toner, then prints.

How do I select the profile for RGB data?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <RGB Source Profile>, then select the profile.

What are the RGB Source Profile settings?

• sRGB – Sets the image quality to the industry standard for general Windows computer monitors. If the monitor supports sRGB, data can be printed in the color tones closest to the displayed colors.
• Gamma 1.5 to Gamma 2.4 – Adjusts the brightness of the print result to prevent the image quality of the brightest and darkest parts from being degraded. The greater the gamma value is, the darker the printed text or image becomes.
• None – Carries out color separation from RGB data to CMYK data without applying an RGB source profile.

How do I select a simulation target to print the CMYK data?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <CMYK Simulation Profile>, then select the profile. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent CMYK color model based on the simulation.

What are the CMYK Simulation Profile settings?

• JapanColor(Canon) – Set a JapanColor profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the Japanese printing standard.

• U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon) – Set a U.S. Web Coated profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the U.S. printing standard.

• Euro Standard v1.00(Canon) – Set a Euro Standard profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the European printing standard.

• None – Prints CMYK data by using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying the CMYK simulation profile.

• When <None> is selected, the dark color gradation may become uneven depending on data.

How do I convert gray data to CMYK data using the grayscale profile of the machine?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Use Grayscale Profile>, then select <Off> to disable, or <On> to enable this setting.

• Even if <On> is selected, data is printed using only the K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output Profile> or <Pure Black Text>.

How do I select the appropriate profile for the print data?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Output Profile>, then select the type of image from the following:

• Text
• Graphics
• Image

Then select the profile.

What are the Output Profile settings for PS?

Type of image	Profile
Text represents letters and characters	Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.
	Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.
	TR Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
	TR Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
Graphics represents lines and figures	Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.
	Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.
	TR Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
	TR Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
Image represents photos and images	Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.
	Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.
	TR Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
	TR Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.

The setting of this item is unavailable when one of the following settings is selected.

• <RGB Source Profile> is set to <None>
• <CMYK Simulation Profile> is set to <None>
• <Use Grayscale Profile> is set to <Off>

How do I prioritize an element when carrying out color matching in <RGB Source Profile>?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Matching Method>, then select the item.

What are the Matching Method settings for PS?

• Perceptual – Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing photos or bit map images.

• Saturation – Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing artworks, graphs, and other images used for presentation materials.

• Colorimetric – Set this option when you want to reproduce the RGB color value in the color reproduction range of the machine as accurately as possible.

• The setting of this item is unavailable when <RGB Source Profile> is set to <None>.

What are the printing methods used to reproduce halftones for optimal image quality in PS?

There are two printing methods used to reproduce halftones for optimal image quality in PS:

• Error Diffusion
• Resolution/Gradation

How do I use Error Diffusion in PS?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Halftones> <Error Diffusion>, then select <On> to enable, or <Off> to disable this setting.

• This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
• The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

How do I use Resolution/Gradation in PS?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation>. Then select the type of image from the following:

• Text
• Graphics
• Image

Then select <Resolution> or <Gradation>.

What are the Resolution/Gradation settings for PS?

Type of image	Setting value
Text represents letters and characters	Resolution – Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
	Gradation – Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.
Graphics represents lines and figures	Resolution – Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
	Gradation – Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.
Image represents photos and images	Resolution – Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
	Gradation – Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.

How do I adjust the brightness of the entire image?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Brightness> and adjust the brightness. The lower the setting value is, the brighter the image or text becomes. The greater the setting value is, the darker the image or text becomes. The brightness range is 85 to 100 to 115 (%).

How do I overprint CMYK data, with overprint specified, as composite output?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Composite Overprint>, then select <On> to enable, or <Off> to disable this setting.

• Overprinting using special colors is not permitted.

How do I print color data in black and white?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Grayscale Conversion>, then select the type of grayscale conversion.

What are the Grayscale Conversion settings?

• sRGB – Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.
• NTSC – Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC system).
• Uniform RGB – Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only brightness as the reference.

How do I restrict the use of the control command prepared by the PS printer?

You can specify the password that restricts the use of the control command prepared by the PS printer by going to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <PS Password Settings>, then select <SystemParamsPassword> or <StartJobPassword>, enter the password, click <Apply>, enter the password again to confirm, click <Apply>, then click <OK>.

• <SystemParamsPassword> is a password that allows changes to the system parameter, and <StartJobPassword> is a password that allows startjob, exitserver operator to perform. For more information, check PostScript language specifications.
• If <StartJobPassword> is set but <SystemParamsPassword> is not set, password check will not be performed while performing startjob, exitserver operator.

How do I change the print settings that apply when printing image files (JPEG/TIFF)?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Imaging Settings>.

What are the printing methods used to reproduce halftones for optimal image quality in Imaging Settings?

There are two printing methods used to reproduce halftones for optimal image quality in Imaging Settings:

• Gradation
• Error Diffusion

How do I use Gradation?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Imaging Settings> <Halftones>, then select <Gradation>. This option prints images with fine gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth finish.

How do I use Error Diffusion in Imaging Settings?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Imaging Settings> <Halftones>, then select <Error Diffusion>.

• The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

How do I change settings for PDF files?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF>.

How do I enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>, then select <On> to enable, or <Off> to disable this setting. Note that size enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.

How do I extend the print range to the paper size?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Enlarge Print Area>, then select <On> to enable, or <Off> to disable this setting.

• If you specify <On>, it may occur that edge-adjacent portions of page are not printed or that printouts come out partially smudged depending on the original.

How do I shrink multiple pages and print them on one page?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <N on 1>, then select the number of pages to be combined. For example, to print 4 pages onto a single sheet, select <4 on 1>. The following are available options:

• Off
• 2 on 1
• 4 on 1
• 6 on 1
• 8 on 1
• 9 on 1
• 16 on 1

How do I print comments in PDF files?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Print Comments>, then select <Auto> to enable, or <Off> to disable this setting. If you specify <Auto>, comments in PDF files will be printed.

How do I configure a setting so that black text of which color information is “R = G = B = 0%,” “C = M = Y = 100%,” or “C = M = Y = 0%/K = 100%” is printed using only the K (black) toner in PDF?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Pure Black Text>, then select <On> to enable, or <Off> to disable this setting. When <Off> is selected, text is printed based on the <Output Profile> setting.

How do I specify the printing method used when black text overlaps a colored background or figure in PDF?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Black Overprint>, then select <Off> or <On>. This option is not displayed when <Pure Black Text> is set to <Off>.

What are the Black Overprint settings in PDF?

• Off – Outlines black text from a colored background or figure first, then prints black text in the outlined part. Printouts may be faded much more than <On>, or text may be outlined.
• On – Prints all the colored backgrounds and figures, and overlaps black text on these backgrounds and figures using only the black (K) toner, then prints.

How do I select the profile for RGB data in PDF?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <RGB Source Profile>, then select the profile.

What are the RGB Source Profile settings in PDF?

• sRGB – Sets the image quality to the industry standard for general Windows computer monitors. If the monitor supports sRGB, data can be printed in the color tones closest to the displayed colors.
• Gamma 1.5 to Gamma 2.4 – Adjusts the brightness of the print result to prevent the image quality of the brightest and darkest parts from being degraded. The greater the gamma value is, the darker the printed text or image becomes.
• None – Carries out color separation from RGB data to CMYK data without applying an RGB source profile.

How do I select a simulation target to print the CMYK data in PDF?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <CMYK Simulation Profile>, then select the profile. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent CMYK color model based on the simulation.

What are the CMYK Simulation Profile settings in PDF?

• JapanColor(Canon) – Set a JapanColor profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the Japanese printing standard.

• U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon) – Set a U.S. Web Coated profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the U.S. printing standard.

• Euro Standard v1.00(Canon) – Set a Euro Standard profile. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the European printing standard.

• None – Prints CMYK data by using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying the CMYK simulation profile.

• When <None> is selected, the dark color gradation may become uneven depending on data.

How do I convert gray data to CMYK data using the grayscale profile of the machine in PDF?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Use Grayscale Profile>, then select <Off> to disable, or <On> to enable this setting.

• Even if <On> is selected, data is printed using only the K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output Profile> or <Pure Black Text>.

How do I select the appropriate profile for the print data in PDF?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Output Profile>, then select the type of image from the following:

• Text
• Graphics
• Image

Then select the profile.

What are the Output Profile settings for PDF?

Type of image	Profile
Text represents letters and characters	Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.
	Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.
	TR Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
	TR Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
Graphics represents lines and figures	Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.
	Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.
	TR Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
	TR Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
Image represents photos and images	Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.
	Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.
	TR Normal – Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.
	TR Photo – Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.

The setting of this item is unavailable when one of the following settings is selected:

• <RGB Source Profile> is set to <None>
• <CMYK Simulation Profile> is set to <None>
• <Use Grayscale Profile> is set to <Off>

How do I prioritize an element when carrying out color matching in <RGB Source Profile> in PDF?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Matching Method>, then select the item.

What are the Matching Method settings for PDF?

• Perceptual – Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing photos or bit map images.

• Saturation – Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing artworks, graphs, and other images used for presentation materials.

• Colorimetric – Set this option when you want to reproduce the RGB color value in the color reproduction range of the machine as accurately as possible.

• The setting of this item is unavailable when <RGB Source Profile> is set to <None>.

What are the printing methods used to reproduce halftones for optimal image quality in PDF?

There are two printing methods used to reproduce halftones for optimal image quality in PDF:

• Error Diffusion
• Resolution/Gradation

How do I use Error Diffusion in PDF?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Halftones> <Error Diffusion>, then select <On> to enable, or <Off> to disable this setting.

• This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.
• The stability of the texture and fixed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

How do I use Resolution/Gradation in PDF?

Go to <Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation>. Then select the type of image from the following:

• Text
• Graphics
• Image

Then select <Resolution> or <Gradation>.

What are the Resolution/Gradation settings for PDF?

Type of image	Setting value
Text represents letters and characters	Resolution – Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
	Gradation – Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.
Graphics represents lines and figures	Resolution – Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
	Gradation – Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.
Image represents photos and images	Resolution – Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
	Gradation – Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.

How do you adjust the brightness?

Adjust the brightness of the entire image in increments of 5%. The lower the setting value is, the brighter the image or text becomes. The greater the setting value is, the darker the image or text becomes.

What does Composite Overprint do?

Specify whether to overprint CMYK data, with overprint specified, as composite output.

What are the Grayscale Conversion options and how do they work?

• sRGB: Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.
• NTSC: Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC system).
• Uniform RGB: Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only brightness as the reference.

What are the XPS Matching Method options and how do they work?

• General: Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.
• Perceptual: Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.
• Colorimetric: Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.
• Vivid Photo: Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.

What are the XPS Halftone options and how do they work?

• Error Diffusion: This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.
• Resolution/Gradation: Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be specified for each image type in any one document.

What are the Resolution/Gradation settings and how do they work?

• Resolution: Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
• Gradation: Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.

What does the XPS Gray Compensation setting do?

Configures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is “R = G = B” is printed using only the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can be specified for each image type in any one document.

What does the XPS Paper Save setting do?

Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.

What are the PDL Selection (Plug and Play) options and how do they work?

• FAX: Detects and connects the machine as a fax device.
• UFR II: Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer.
• UFR II (V4): Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specification (XPS).
• PCL6: Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.
• PCL6 (V4): Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.
• PS: Detects and connects the machine as a PS printer.

How do you restrict new destinations?

Select whether to limit the fax numbers and e-mail/I-Fax addresses that can be specified as destinations to those already registered in the Address Book.

How do you restrict resending from log?

Select whether to prevent a destination from being selected from the sent job logs.

How do you confirm when coded dial TX?

Select whether to display the details of an entered coded dial number when it is selected as a destination.

How do you confirm destination before sending?

Specify whether to display the destination confirmation screen when sending faxes, e-mails, or I-Faxes. If <Only for Sequential Broadcast> is selected, the confirmation screen is displayed only when multiple destinations are specified.

How do you register the unit name?

Register the sender name for e-mails and I-Faxes. The registered name is displayed in e-mails, along with the e-mail address. If the sender name is not registered, only the e-mail address is displayed.

What are the E-Mail settings options and how do they work?

• Scan Size: Options include LTR, LGL, STMT, EXEC, FOOLSCAP/FOLIO, OFICIO, LETTER (Government), LEGAL (Government), LEGAL (India), FOOLSCAP (Australia), OFICIO (Brazil), OFICIO (Mexico), A4, A5R, and B5.
• File Format: Options include PDF, PDF (Compact), PDF (Compact/OCR), PDF (OCR), JPEG, and TIFF.
• Encryption: Options include None, Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES, and Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES.
• Digital Signatures: Options include None and Top Left.
• Divide into Pages: Options include Off and On.
• Density: Nine levels.
• Original Orientation: Options include Portrait and Landscape.
• Original Type: Options include Text, Text/Photo, and Photo.
• 2-Sided Original: Options include Off, Book Type, and Calendar Type.
• Sharpness: Seven levels.
• Data Size: Options include Small: Memory Priority, Standard, and Large: Image Quality Priority.
• Subject/Message: Options include Subject, Message, and Reply To.
• Priority: Options include Low, Standard, and High.
• Link Mobile Device Addr. Book: Configure so that destinations registered in the address book of mobile devices can be specified as send destinations. When <Use Remote UI Access PIN> is set to <On>, a PIN is required for access to the machine. To set a PIN, use <Remote UI Access PIN>.
• Use Remote UI Access PIN: Options include Off and On.

How do you link a mobile device address book?

Select <On> in <Link Mobile Device Address Book> Select <Off> or <On> in <Use Remote UI Access PIN> <Apply>

What are the I-Fax Settings options and how do they work?

• Scan Size: Options include LTR, LGL, STMT, EXEC, FOOLSCAP/FOLIO, OFICIO, LETTER (Government), LEGAL (Government), LEGAL (India), FOOLSCAP (Australia), OFICIO (Brazil), OFICIO (Mexico), A4, A5R, and B5.
• Density: Nine levels.
• Original Type: Options include Text, Text/Photo, and Photo.
• 2-Sided Original: Options include Off, Book Type, and Calendar Type.
• Sharpness: Seven levels.
• Subject/Message: Options include Subject, Message, and Reply To.
• TX Terminal ID: Information such as the date and time of transmission and the e-mail address of the machine (sender information) can be added as a header in transmitted documents. This information tells the recipient when the I-Fax was sent and who sent it.
• Add TX Terminal ID: Options include Off and On.
• Print Position: Options include Inside Image Area and Outside Image Area.

How do you add a TX Terminal ID?

Select <On> in <Add TX Terminal ID> <Print Position> Select <Inside Image Area> or <Outside Image Area> <Apply>

What are the File Settings options and how do they work?

• Scan Size: Options include LTR, LGL, STMT, EXEC, FOOLSCAP/FOLIO, OFICIO, LETTER (Government), LEGAL (Government), LEGAL (India), FOOLSCAP (Australia), OFICIO (Brazil), OFICIO (Mexico), A4, A5R, and B5.
• File Format: Options include PDF, PDF (Compact), PDF (Compact/OCR), PDF (OCR), JPEG, and TIFF.
• Encryption: Options include None, Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES, Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES, and Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES.
• Digital Signatures: Options include None and Top Left.
• Divide into Pages: Options include Off and On.
• Density: Nine Levels.
• Original Orientation: Options include Portrait and Landscape.
• Original Type: Options include Text, Text/Photo, and Photo.
• 2-Sided Original: Options include Off, Book Type, and Calendar Type.
• Sharpness: Seven levels.
• Data Size: Options include Small: Memory Priority, Standard, and Large: Image Quality Priority.

What are the Fax Settings options and how do they work?

• Resolution: Options include 200 x 100 dpi (Normal), 200 x 200 dpi (Fine), 200 x 200 dpi (Photo), 200 x 400 dpi (Superfine), and 400 x 400 dpi (Ultrafine).
• Density: Nine levels.
• 2-Sided Original: Options include Off, Book Type, and Calendar Type.
• Sharpness: Seven levels.
• Off-Hook Alarm: Select whether the machine makes an alert sound when the handset of a telephone connected to the machine is not properly set on the cradle. You can also adjust the volume of the alert sound.
• ECM TX: Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce errors on received faxes, see <ECM RX> .
• Set Pause Time: For example, when you make calls by dialing “0 – (pause) – (telephone number),” 0 is dialed first and then a few seconds later, the telephone number. When sending faxes overseas, you need to specify destinations by dialing “(international access code) – (country code) – (area code) – (fax number)” but consecutive numbers that are input without pauses may not be recognized correctly. In this case, try adding a pause after the international access code or the fax number. If the code or the number is still not recognized correctly, change the duration of the pause. For instructions on how to enter a pause, see Basic Operations for Sending Faxes .
• Auto Redial: Specify settings for Auto Redial, a function that automatically redials the fax number after several minutes if the first attempt fails because the line is busy. You can specify how many times the machine redials and the interval between redials.
• Use Auto Redial: Options include Off and On.
• Number of Times to Redial: Specify how many times the machine redials. Enter a number, and select <Apply>.
• Redial Interval: Specify the interval between redials. Enter a number for the interval, and select <Apply>.
• Redial When Error Occurs: When set to <On>, specifies to redial when a transmission error occurs.
• Check Dial Tone Before Send: Select whether to check the dial tone before a fax number is dialed.
• Set Line: Specify a fax number, unit name, and line type.
• Register Unit Tel. Number: Register the fax number for the machine.
• Register Unit Name: Register the name of a company or person ( ). The registered name is sent as sender information to the destination ( <TX Terminal ID> ).
• Select Line Type: Select the telephone line type used for fax transmission.
• Pulse:
• Tone:
• TX Start Speed: If it takes a long time to start sending a fax, such as when there is a poor connection, you can adjust the communication start speed downward incrementally.
• Archive TX Document: In addition to the destination specified when the fax is sent, you can specify whether faxed documents are also sent to a preset storage address for archiving.
• Archive TX Document: Options include Off and On.
• Archive Address:
• File Name:
• Confirm Entered Fax Number: Select whether to display the details of an entered coded dial number when it is selected as a destination.
• Allow Fax Driver TX: Enable or disable PC faxing (sending faxes from a computer).
• Use Addr. Book When On-Hook: Make a setting so that you can perform fax transmission by entering a specific number before specifying a coded dial number or specifying a destination from the Address Book.
• Do Not Allow After Num. Key Use:
• Always Allow:
• Restrict Sequential Broadcast: Select whether to prohibit sequential broadcasting, a feature that sends faxes to multiple destinations in succession.
• Register Log Dest to Addr Book: Specify whether to disable registering destinations from fax send logs to the Address Book.
• Allow:
• Do Not Allow:
• TX Terminal ID: Specify settings for adding the sender information, including the fax number and the name of the machine, to the fax header. The recipient can check who sent the fax by looking at the added information.
• Add TX Terminal ID: Options include Off and On.
• Print Position: Specifies the position to print the terminal ID information in the sent fax. Select <Inside Image Area> to print the information inside the image area, or <Outside Image Area> to print the information outside the image area.
• Mark Number As: Adds the “Fax” or “Tel” mark in front of the fax number registered for the machine ( ). Select <Tel> to indicate that the notified number is a telephone number.
• Auto Adjust VoIP Comm. Speed: When you want to perform a successful fax communication with a partner device or on a line with which errors tend to occur easily, you can use this function to reduce communication errors.

How do you auto adjust VoIP comm. speed?

Select <Off> or <On>

How do you set fax/i-fax inbox settings?

Configure settings for receiving faxes in memory.

What are the Fax Memory Lock Settings options and how do they work?

• Use Memory Lock: Options include Off and On.
• Use Fax Preview: Options include Off and On.
• Report Print: Options include Off and On.
• Set Memory Lock Time: Options include Off and On.
• Memory Lock Time:
• Memory Lock Start Time:
• Memory Lock End Time:

How do you adjust the Off-Hook Alarm volume?

Select the volume of the alert sound <Apply>

How do you set the ECM TX to on?

<On>

How do you set the pause time?

Specify the duration of pause <Apply>

How do you set up Auto Redial?

Select <On> in <Use Auto Redial> Specify the settings <Apply>

How do you set the Check Dial Tone Before Send to on?

<On>

How do you set the TX Start Speed?

Select the communication start speed

How do you set the Use Addr. Book When On-Hook?

Select <Do Not Allow After Num. Key Use> or <Always Allow>

How do you set the TX Terminal ID settings?

Select <On> in <Add TX Terminal ID> Specify the settings <Apply>

What are the TX Start Speed options?

• 33600 bps
• 14400 bps
• 9600 bps
• 7200 bps
• 4800 bps
• 2400 bps

How do you change the default settings for E-Mail?

You can change the default settings used for scanning originals to send as e-mails. The selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning originals.

How do you change the default I-Fax settings?

You can change the default settings used for sending I-Fax. The selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning originals.

How do you change the default File settings?

You can change the default settings used when originals are saved to a shared folder or FTP server. The selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning.

How do you change the default Fax settings?

You can change the default settings used for sending faxes. The selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning originals.

What are the common settings for sending?

Configure the settings to restrict destinations at the time of sending faxes, e-mails, or I-Faxes, and specify the confirmation method to prevent transmission to wrong destinations.

What are the scan and send settings?

You can change and register the settings for sending faxes or scanned documents.

What are the fax settings for sending?

Specify the basic settings for using the machine as a fax device.

What are the common settings for receive/forward?

Specify operations that are to be performed when faxes are received in memory and when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low.

How can I enable the machine to continue printing faxes when the toner cartridges are low?

If receiving faxes when the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low, the machine holds them in memory instead of printing. However, if the Continue Print. When Cart. Low function is enabled, the machine continues printing. To enable this function, go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Common Settings>
• <Continue Print. When Cart. Low>
• <On>

What should I do if faxes are fading or blurring when this function is enabled?

When this function is enabled, faxes may fade or blur. Because received documents are not stored, you need to ask the sender to resend the document.

How do I configure settings to print received I-Fax documents?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <I-Fax Settings>

How do I specify settings for printing received I-Fax documents on both sides of paper?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <I-Fax Settings>
• <Print on Both Sides>
• <On>

What paper sizes can I specify to be used for printing I-Fax documents?

• <LTR>
• <LGL>
• <FOOLSCAP/FOLIO>
• <OFICIO>
• <LETTER (Government)>
• <LEGAL (Government)>
• <LEGAL (India)>
• <FOOLSCAP (Australia)>
• <OFICIO (Brazil)>
• <OFICIO (Mexico)>
• <A4>

How do I specify the paper size to be used for printing I-Fax documents?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <I-Fax Settings>
• <RX Print Size>
• Select the paper size.

How do I configure settings for receiving and forwarding faxes?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>

How do I specify settings for printing received faxes on both sides of the paper?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>
• <Print on Both Sides>
• <On>

What is ECM and how do I enable or disable it?

ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To enable ECM:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>
• <ECM RX>
• <On>

What should I keep in mind when using ECM?

• ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error check is performed on both the sending and receiving devices.
• Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions.
• It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error check and corrections are performed while the data is transmitted.

How do I specify settings for the incoming ring to notify me of incoming faxes?

This feature is only available when <Auto> or <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)> is selected for the receive mode.

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>
• <Incoming Ring>

How do I specify how many times the incoming call rings when the machine receives a fax?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>
• <Incoming Ring>
• Select <On> in <Use Incoming Ring>
• Enter the desired number in <Number of Rings>
• <Apply>

What should I keep in mind when specifying the number of rings for incoming faxes?

• When <On> is specified, you need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.
• When <Off> is specified, the machine does not enter sleep mode.

What is Remote Reception and how do I specify the settings for it?

When a fax is sent to the machine, you can receive it just by picking up the handset of the telephone and entering a specific ID number by using the telephone. This feature can save you the trouble of going all the way to the machine.

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>
• <Remote RX>

How do I enable Remote Reception and set the ID number?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>
• <Remote RX>
• Select <On> in <Use Remote RX>
• Enter the ID number in <Remote RX ID>
• <Apply>

What is the Switch to Auto RX setting and when is it available?

This feature is only available when <Manual> is selected for the receive mode. By using this feature, faxes can be received even when no one is available to pick up the handset.

How do I automatically receive a fax after the machine has rung for a specified time period?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>
• <Switch to Auto RX>
• Select <On> in <Use Switch to Auto RX>
• Enter the desired number of seconds in <Ring Time Until Auto RX>
• <Apply>

How can I adjust the communication start speed if it takes a long time to start receiving a fax?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>
• <RX Start Speed>
• Select the communication start speed.

What are the available communication start speeds?

• <33600 bps>
• <14400 bps>
• <9600 bps>
• <7200 bps>
• <4800 bps>
• <2400 bps>

How do I reduce the image size of a received document?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>
• <Use Reduce RX Size>

What are the available reduction ratios for received documents?

• <Auto>
• <97%>
• <95%>
• <90%>
• <75%>

How do I specify the reduction ratio and direction for a received document?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>
• <Use Reduce RX Size>
• Select <On> in <Use Reduce RX Size>
• Specify each setting item
• <Apply>

What are the options for reduction direction?

• <Vertical/Horizontal> – to reduce the image both vertically and horizontally.
• <Vertical Only> – to reduce only vertically.

How does the <Auto> reduction ratio work?

<Auto> reduces the image by a ratio that is based on the size of the loaded paper.

How do I enable printing of information on the bottom of received faxes?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Fax Settings>
• <Print RX Page Footer>
• <On>

What information is included in the page footer of received faxes?

Information including date and time of reception and page numbers will be printed.

How do I specify settings for forwarding faxes?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Forwarding Settings>

How do I forward all received faxes to a specified destination?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Forwarding Settings>
• <Forwarding Function>
• <Use Forwarding Function>
• <On>

What are the forwarding destination options?

You can specify a fax number, an e-mail address or a shared folder in a computer, etc.

How do I select whether to print forwarded fax documents?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Forwarding Settings>
• <Forwarding Function>
• <Print Images>

What are the print options for forwarded documents?

You can set the machine to print forwarded documents:

• <On> for all forwarded documents
• <Only When Error Occurs>

How do I select whether to store fax documents in memory when they are not successfully forwarded?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Receive/Forward>
• <Forwarding Settings>
• <Forwarding Function>
• <Store Images in Memory>

How do I change the settings for file saving or memory media print?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>

How do I configure settings for saving scanned documents to a USB memory device?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Scan and Store Settings>

How do I change the settings used when data is saved to a USB memory device?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <USB Memory Settings>

How do I change the default settings used for saving scanned originals to a USB memory device?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (USB Memory)>

What are the available scan sizes when saving to a USB?

• <LTR>
• <LGL>
• <STMT>
• <EXEC>
• <FOOLSCAP/FOLIO>
• <OFICIO>
• <LETTER (Government)>
• <LEGAL (Government)>
• <LEGAL (India)>
• <FOOLSCAP (Australia)>
• <OFICIO (Brazil)>
• <OFICIO (Mexico)>
• <A4>
• <A5R>
• <B5>

What are the available file formats when saving to a USB?

• <PDF>
• <PDF (Compact)>
• <PDF (Compact/OCR)>
• <PDF (OCR)>
• <JPEG>
• <TIFF>

How do I set PDF details when saving a scanned original as a PDF?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (USB Memory)>
• <File Format>
• <PDF>/<PDF (Compact)>/<PDF (Compact/OCR)>/<PDF (OCR)>
• <Set PDF Details>

What encryption options are available for PDF files?

• <None>
• <Acrobat 7.0 or Later/128-bit AES>
• <Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>
• <Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent/256-bit AES>

Where can digital signatures be placed on PDF files?

<Top Left>

How do I divide a PDF file into pages?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (USB Memory)>
• <File Format>
• <PDF>/<PDF (Compact)>/<PDF (Compact/OCR)>/<PDF (OCR)>
• <Divide into Pages>
• <On>

How do I set TIFF details when saving a scanned original as a TIFF?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (USB Memory)>
• <File Format>
• <TIFF>
• <Set TIFF Details>

How do I divide a TIFF file into pages?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (USB Memory)>
• <File Format>
• <TIFF>
• <Divide into Pages>
• <On>

How many levels of density are there when saving scanned originals?

Nine Levels

What are the options for original orientation when saving scanned originals?

• <Portrait>
• <Landscape>

What are the available original types when saving scanned originals?

• <Text>
• <Text/Photo>
• <Photo>

What are the available 2-sided original settings?

• <Off>
• <Book Type>
• <Calendar Type>

How many levels of sharpness are available when saving scanned originals?

Seven levels

What are the available options for data size when saving scanned originals?

• <Small: Memory Priority>
• <Standard>
• <Large: Image Quality Priority>

How do I change the settings to print files on a USB memory device and the method for displaying them?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Access Stored Files Settings>

How do I change the default settings associated with memory media print?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>

What paper sources are available for memory media print?

• <Multi-Purpose Tray>
• <Drawer 1>
• <Drawer 2>

What is the maximum number of copies that can be printed from memory media?

999

What 2-sided printing settings are available for memory media print?

• <Off>
• <Book Type>
• <Calendar Type>

How do I set JPEG/TIFF details for memory media print?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Set JPEG/TIFF Details>

How many levels of brightness are there for JPEG/TIFF memory media prints?

Five levels

What are the N-up printing options for JPEG/TIFF prints?

• <Off>
• <2 on 1>
• <4 on 1>

What are the available original types for memory media print?

• <Photo Priority>
• <Text Priority>

What halftone settings are available for JPEG/TIFF prints?

• <Gradation>
• <Error Diffusion>

How do I set PDF details for memory media print?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Set PDF Details>

How many levels of brightness are there for PDF memory media prints?

Seven levels

What are the N-up printing options for PDF prints?

• <Off>
• <2 on 1>
• <4 on 1>
• <6 on 1>
• <8 on 1>
• <9 on 1>
• <16 on 1>

What are the available print range options?

• <All Pages>
• <Specified Pages>

How can I enlarge/reduce the print to fit the paper size?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>
• <On>

How do I enable enlarge print area?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Enlarge Print Area>
• <On>

What are the options for printing comments on PDFs?

• <Off>
• <Auto>

What are the available halftone settings for memory media print?

• <Error Diffusion>
• <Off>
• <On>

How do I adjust resolution/gradation?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Other Settings>
• <Resolution/Gradation>

How do I set text resolution/gradation?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Other Settings>
• <Resolution/Gradation>
• <Text>

How do I set graphic resolution/gradation?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Other Settings>
• <Resolution/Gradation>
• <Graphics>

How do I set image resolution/gradation?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Other Settings>
• <Resolution/Gradation>
• <Image>

How do I enable or disable pure black text?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Other Settings>
• <Pure Black Text>
• <On>

How do I enable or disable black overprint?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Other Settings>
• <Black Overprint>
• <On>

What are the available RGB source profiles?

• <sRGB>
• <Gamma 1.5>
• <Gamma 1.8>
• <Gamma 2.4>
• <None>

What are the available CMYK simulation profiles?

• <JapanColor(Canon)>
• <U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>
• <Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)>
• <None>

How do I enable the use of a grayscale profile?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Other Settings>
• <Use Grayscale Profile>
• <On>

How do I set the text output profile?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Other Settings>
• <Output Profile>
• <Text>

What are the text output profile options?

• <Normal>
• <Photo>
• <TR Normal>
• <TR Photo>

How do I set the graphic output profile?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Other Settings>
• <Output Profile>
• <Graphics>

What are the graphic output profile options?

• <Normal>
• <Photo>
• <TR Normal>
• <TR Photo>

How do I set the image output profile?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Other Settings>
• <Output Profile>
• <Image>

What are the image output profile options?

• <Normal>
• <Photo>
• <TR Normal>
• <TR Photo>

What are the matching method options for memory media print?

• <Perceptual>
• <Saturation>
• <Colorimetric>

How do I enable composite overprint?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Other Settings>
• <Composite Overprint>
• <On>

What are the available grayscale conversion settings?

• <sRGB>
• <NTSC>
• <Uniform RGB>

How many levels of density are available?

17 levels for Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black

How do I fine adjust the print density?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Print Quality>
• <Fine Adjust>

What are the density fine adjustment options for each color?

• <High>
• <Medium>
• <Low> at 17 levels

How do I enable toner save?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Print Quality>
• <Toner Save>
• <On>

What are the available gradation settings?

• <High 1>
• <High 2>

How many levels of density fine adjustment are there?

Five levels

What are the available resolution settings?

• <1200 dpi>
• <600 dpi>

What special smoothing modes are available?

• <Mode 1>
• <Mode 2>
• <Mode 3>
• <Mode 4>
• <Mode 5>
• <Mode 6>

What are the available toner volume correction settings?

• <Standard>
• <Gradation Priority>
• <Text Priority>

What are the available line control settings?

• <Resolution Priority>
• <Gradation Priority>

How do I enable width adjustment?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Print Quality>
• <Line Control>
• <Width Adjustment>
• <On>

What are the options for width adjustment?

• <Text>
• <Line>
• <Text and Line>

What are the available advanced smoothing settings?

• <Off>
• <Level 1>
• <Level 2>

How do I apply advanced smoothing to graphics?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Print Quality>
• <Advanced Smoothing>
• <Apply to Graphics>
• <On>

How do I apply advanced smoothing to text?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Print Quality>
• <Advanced Smoothing>
• <Apply to Text>
• <On>

What are the available gradation smoothing settings?

• <Off>
• <Level 1>
• <Level 2>

How do I apply gradation smoothing to graphics?

Go to:

• <Menu>
• <Function Settings>
• <Store/Access Files>
• <Common Settings>
• <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)>
• <Print Quality>
• <Gradation Smoothing>
• <Apply to Graphics>
• <On>

How do you specify the settings for the Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)>.

How do you prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges from being displayed in the Remote UI?

Select <Off> in <Displ. Cnsmbls. Purch. Btn.(RUI)>.

How do you turn off the Toner Status?

Select <Off> in <Toner Status Settings>.

How do you prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges from being displayed in Toner Status?

Select <On>, and then <Off> in <Toner Status Settings>.

How do you allow scanning from a mobile device using the Canon PRINT Business application?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Scan w/ Canon PRINT Business> and select <On>. Then restart the machine.

How do you prevent scanning from a mobile device using the Canon PRINT Business application?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Scan w/ Canon PRINT Business> and select <Off>. Then restart the machine.

How do you make the machine display a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading the paper drawer into the machine?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Notify to Check Paper Settings> and select <On>. Then restart the machine.

How do you prevent the machine from displaying a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading the paper drawer into the machine?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Notify to Check Paper Settings> and select <Off>. Then restart the machine.

How do you turn on Canon Genuine Mode?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Canon Genuine Mode> and select <On>.

How do you turn off Canon Genuine Mode?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Canon Genuine Mode> and select <Off>.

What is Canon Genuine Mode?

Canon Genuine Mode is the mode used when Canon genuine toner cartridges are used.

What is the purpose of the <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> section?

It lists all the settings related to the software and system options available for the machine, as well as information about Register License, with descriptions.

What do the asterisks mean in the <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> section?

• Settings marked with “*1” cannot be imported or exported.
• Settings marked with “*2” may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items.

How do you register a license for a system option?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Register License> and enter the license key for the system option.

How do you configure settings for using the Remote UI?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI Settings>.

What is the Remote UI?

The Remote UI allows you to configure machine settings from a web browser.

How do you disable the Remote UI?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI> and select <Off> in <Use Remote UI>.

How do you enable TLS encrypted communication when using the Remote UI?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI>, select <On> in <Use Remote UI>, and then select <On> in <Use TLS>.

How do you disable TLS encrypted communication when using the Remote UI?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI>, select <On> in <Use Remote UI>, and then select <Off> in <Use TLS>.

How do you set a PIN for access to the Remote UI?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <License/Other>/<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI Settings> <Restrict Access>, select <On>, and then enter the PIN twice.

What are the specifications for the PIN for access to the Remote UI?

The PIN can be up to 7 digits long, and all users use a common PIN.

What are the options for installing the firmware update?

You can install the firmware update via PC or via the internet.

What is the purpose of the <Data Management> section?

It lists settings for utilizing the machine settings and initializing data with descriptions.

What do the asterisks mean in the <Data Management> section?

Settings marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be imported or exported.

How do you import data into the Address Book and various settings of the machine?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Import/Export> <Import>, select <Yes>, enter the password, and then select <Apply>.

How do you export data from the Address Book and various settings of the machine?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Import/Export> <Export>, enter the password twice, and then select <Apply>.

What should you do if the <Address Book PIN> screen appears during importing/exporting?

Enter the Address Book PIN and select <Apply>. You can also select <Skip> to cancel Address Book data importing/exporting.

What happens when import is executed?

The machine automatically restarts after the import process has finished.

How do you enable the Product Extended Survey Program?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Enable Prod. Ext’d Survey Prog.> and select <On>. Then restart the machine.

How do you disable the Product Extended Survey Program?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Enable Prod. Ext’d Survey Prog.> and select <Off>. Then restart the machine.

What is the Product Extended Survey Program?

It is a program for the machine usage survey.

How do you restore [Key and Certificate Settings] and [CA Certificate Settings] to the factory defaults?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Key and Certificate> and select to restore the settings.

How do you restore the Address Book settings to the factory defaults?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Address Book> and select to restore the settings.

Which settings can be restored to factory defaults through <Initialize Menu>?

• <Preferences>
• <Adjustment/Maintenance>
• <Function Settings>
• <Set Destination>
• <Management Settings>

How do you restore all the settings in <Initialize Menu> to factory defaults at once?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Menu> <Initialize All> and select to restore the settings.

What is the purpose of the <Security Settings> section?

It lists all the settings related to the authentication function and encryption, with descriptions.

How do you reinforce the security of the authentication function?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Authentication/Password Settings>.

How do you configure the security functions for user authentication?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Authentication/Password Settings> <Authentication Function Settings>.

How do you enable the lockout function for failed user authentication?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Authentication/Password Settings> <Authentication Function Settings> <Lockout>, select <On> in <Enable Lockout>, and then specify the <Lockout Threshold> and <Lockout Period>. Then, select <Apply>, <OK>, and restart the machine.

What is the lockout function?

When a user has failed user authentication, the lockout function disables the user from temporarily logging in to the machine.

What are the settings for the lockout function?

• <Enable Lockout>: Turns the lockout function on or off.
• <Lockout Threshold>: Specifies how many consecutive times failures are permitted before lockout is activated. The range is 1 to 10 times.
• <Lockout Period>: Specifies the time required before a user can log in again after lockout. The range is 1 to 60 minutes.

How do you disable a weak encryption or the key and certification using a weak encryption?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Encryption Settings> and select <On> in <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.>. Then select <Off> or <On> in <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.>, select <Apply>, <OK>, and restart the machine.

How do you enable the system verification at startup?

Go to <Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Verify System at Startup>, select <On>, select <Yes>, and then restart the machine automatically.

What is system verification at startup?

When the machine starts or when an application (in Application Library) is executed, verification is performed to determine that the system or application has not been tampered with. If tampering is detected, the machine enters a state to wait for a firmware update.

What should you do if nothing is displayed even after a while during system verification at startup?

System recovery may be impossible, so contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

What should you do if an application installed after shipping of the machine from the factory has been tampered with?

You need to reinstall the application on the machine.

What are the maintenance procedures for this machine?

• Regular Cleaning
• Cleaning the Exterior
• Cleaning the Platen Glass
• Cleaning the Feeder
• Cleaning the Fixing Assembly
• Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)
• Replacing the Toner Cartridge
• Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables
• Relocating the Machine
• Adjusting Image Quality
• Adjusting Gradation
• Correcting “Print Color Mismatch”
• Adjusting Values for Text Color Reproducibility
• Adjusting Print Position
• Viewing the Counter Value
• Printing Reports and Lists

What are the areas to clean regularly?

• Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots
• Feeder
• Internal fixing assembly and transfer belt
• Platen glass and the underside of the feeder or the platen glass cover

How do you clean the exterior of the machine?

1. Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
2. Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots with a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.
3. Wait for the exterior of the machine to dry completely.
4. Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

What happens when you turn OFF the machine?

Data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.

How do you clean the platen glass?

1. Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
2. Open the feeder or the platen glass cover.
3. Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder or the platen glass cover with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
4. Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.
5. Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.
6. Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

What happens when you turn the printer OFF?

Any queued print data is erased. Data such as documents received and held in memory, documents waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending or receiving faxes are not deleted.

When should you clean the feeder?

If graphite powder or dust on the rollers inside the feeder or on the document feed scanning area causes smudges to appear on printouts or if a paper jam occurs frequently, you should clean the feeder.

What are the two methods for cleaning the feeder?

• Cleaning the Feeder
• Automatic Feeder Cleaning

How do you clean the feeder?

1. Turn off the machine and unplug it from the power outlet.
2. Open the original supply tray.
3. Open the feeder cover.
4. Wipe the rollers in the feeder with a cloth that has been moistened with water and wrung out. Then wipe with a dry cloth. If the rollers and surrounding areas are very dirty, clean them out by wetting a cloth with water, wringing it out well, and then wiping the dirty areas. Afterwards, wipe the areas with a soft and dry cloth.
5. Close the feeder cover and original supply tray.
6. Open the feeder.
7. Wipe the document feed scanning area with a cloth that has been moistened with water and wrung out, and then wipe with a dry cloth.
8. Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.
9. Gently close the feeder.
10. Plug the machine back into the power outlet and switch it on.

What should you do before starting automatic feeder cleaning?

Set 10 sheets of plain A4 or US Letter size paper in the feeder.

How do you perform automatic feeder cleaning?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.
3. Select <Clean Feeder>.
4. Select <Start>.

What happens when you select <Start> for automatic feeder cleaning?

Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, press to return to the Home screen.

When should you clean the fixing assembly?

If the fixing assembly is dirty, the printout may get smudged.

When can’t you clean the fixing assembly?

You cannot clean the fixing assembly when the machine has documents waiting to be printed.

What do you need to do before cleaning the fixing assembly?

Set plain A4 or Letter size paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.

What should you ensure before performing cleaning of the fixing assembly for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw models?

Make sure that there remains a sufficient amount remaining in the toner cartridges.

What are the two ways of cleaning the fixing assembly for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw models?

• <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>
• <Clean Fixing Assembly>

How should you choose between the two ways of cleaning the fixing assembly for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw models?

To clean the fixing assembly, first perform <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>. If this results in no effect, then try <Clean Fixing Assembly>.

When is cleaning the fixing assembly most effective?

Cleaning will be more effective if it is performed about one hour after completion of the previous printing session.

How do you automatically perform cleaning of the fixing assembly in effective timing?

Configure <Auto Clean Fixing Assembly>.

How do you clean the fixing assembly using <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)> for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw models?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.
3. Select <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>.
4. Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK>.
5. Select <Start>.

What happens when you select <Start> for <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>?

Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, press to return to the Home screen.

What happens when <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)> is complete?

A sheet of blank paper is ejected.

What should you do if the symptom does not improve after performing <Clean Fixing Assembly (Reduce Paper Back Side Stain)>?

Perform <Clean Fixing Assembly>.

How do you clean the fixing assembly using <Clean Fixing Assembly> for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw models?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.
3. Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
4. Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK>.
5. Select <Start>.

What happens when you select <Start> for <Clean Fixing Assembly>?

Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, press to return to the Home screen.

What happens when <Clean Fixing Assembly> is complete?

A sheet of paper with a printed pattern is ejected.

How do you clean the fixing assembly for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw models?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.
3. Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
4. Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK>.
5. Select <Start>.

What happens when you select <Start> for <Clean Fixing Assembly> for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw models?

Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, press to return to the Home screen.

What happens when <Clean Fixing Assembly> is complete for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw models?

A sheet of paper with a printed pattern is ejected.

When should you clean the transfer belt (ITB)?

If dirt adheres to the transfer belt inside the machine and causes the print quality to deteriorate, you should clean the transfer belt.

When can’t you clean the transfer belt?

You cannot clean the transfer belt when the machine has documents waiting to be printed.

How do you clean the transfer belt (ITB)?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2. Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.
3. Select <Clean ITB>.
4. Select <Start>.

What happens when you select <Start> for cleaning the transfer belt?

Cleaning starts. When a message appears stating that cleaning is complete, press to return to the Home screen.

How do I replace the toner cartridge?

When a warning message appears in the display notifying that the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low or when printing is no longer possible due to toner depletion, you can replace the toner cartridge by following the procedure below:

1. Open the front cover.

2. Pull out the cartridge tray.

3. Pull the target toner cartridge straight up and out of the machine.

4. Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the packing material.

   1. Pull the tab of the packing material on a flat place.
   2. Pull out the toner cartridge.

5. Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge.

   • Do not touch the surface of the drum on the bottom of the toner cartridge.

6. Install the toner cartridge.

   • Each toner cartridge color has its own slot in the toner cartridge tray, indicated with a corresponding color label. Place the toner cartridge into the slot that corresponds to its color.
   • The bottom surface of the toner cartridge is exposed; therefore, be careful not to bump the toner cartridge against the slot frame when inserting it into the slot.

7. Push the toner cartridge tray back in, and close the front cover.

   • Immediately after the front cover is closed, the quick adjustment starts. To perform an adjustment for higher quality, perform a full adjustment.

What should I do when a message appears?

The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Depending on which message is displayed, prepare a new toner cartridge or replace the current toner cartridge with a new one.

What does the message “Prepare cartridge.” mean?

This message notifies you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print a large job.

What can I do when a message is displayed?

• When copying or printing, you can continue printing the original.
• If a message is displayed for the black toner cartridge when the machine is receiving a fax/I-Fax or automatic report output is set, received faxes/I-Faxes and reports will be stored in memory so that they do not appear faded after they are printed. To continue printing even if the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is running low, set <Continue Print. When Cart. Low> to <On>.

What does the message “Display Cartridge Replacement Steps” mean?

This message displays the procedure for replacing a toner cartridge. Follow the on-screen instructions to replace the toner cartridge.

What does the message “Continue Printing” mean?

This message allows you to end a printing stoppage state and continue copying/printing.

• If a message is displayed for the black toner cartridge when the machine is receiving a fax/I-Fax or automatic report output is set, received faxes/I-Faxes and reports will be stored in memory so that they do not appear faded after they are printed. To continue printing even if the amount remaining in toner cartridge is running low, set <Continue Print. When Cart. Low> to <On>.

When is a message displayed?

• You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers a message.

What does the message “Low Cartridge Level” mean?

This message notifies you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print a large job. This appears when <Action When Warning> is set to <Stop Printing>.

What does the message “End of Cartridge Lifetime” mean?

This message, which appears with the toner cartridge color(s), notifies you that a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that you replace the cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be guaranteed.

What does the message “Continue Printing (Quality Not Guaranteed)” mean?

This message allows you to continue printing, but the machine may malfunction.

What does the message “Cannot print. A non-Canon or counterfeit cartridge may be inserted.” mean?

This message notifies you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you replace this cartridge with a new one.

• When this message is displayed, you cannot continue printing.

What should I do when printouts are poor in quality?

If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is consumed. Replace the nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed.

• Streaks Appear/Printing is Uneven
• Partially faded
• Uneven density
• White Spots Appear
• Toner smudges and splatters appear
• Blank space of originals becomes grayish in printouts

How do I check the remaining amount of consumables?

Use the procedure below to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. It is particularly important to check whether you need to have a new toner cartridge ready before starting a large print job.

For the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw:

• Go to <Status Monitor> > <Device Information> > <Cartridge Information> to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.
  • The displayed amount remaining in a toner cartridge can be used only as a guide and may differ from the actual amount.

For the MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw / MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw:

• Go to <Status Monitor> > <Device Information> > <Check Counter> to check the number of pages printed.

What are the steps to relocate the machine?

The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedure below when moving the machine to avoid injury.

1. Turn OFF the machine and computer.

   • When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.

2. Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as illustrated below.

   • Whether the cables with “*” are connected depends on your environment.
     1. Power plug
     2. Power cord
     3. USB keyboard*
     4. USB cable*
     5. LAN cable*
     6. External telephone*
     7. Telephone cable*

3. When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridges.

4. Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.

5. Close all the open covers and the multi-purpose tray, and move the machine to a new location.

   • The machine is heavy. Make sure to move the machine with two or more people.
   • Hold the lift handles, and lift up the machine. If you have attached the optional cassette feeding module, leave the cassette feeding module on the floor and move it after moving the main unit of the machine.

6. Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.

   • For information about how to install the machine after relocating it, see “Getting Started.”

How do I adjust image quality?

If the print results or scanned images are not satisfactory such as low image quality, poor reproducibility, or print color mismatch, try the adjustments below.

• Auto Adjust Gradation: If the density or brightness of colors in printouts and originals are different, perform <Auto Adjust Gradation> to improve color reproducibility. There are three types of adjustments: <Full Adjust>, <Quick Adjust>, and <Adjust Copy Image>.
• Correct Print Color Mismatch: If the colors in printouts become blurry, perform <Correct Print Color Mismatch>. This problem may be caused by a color mismatch.
• Black Text Processing for Color: You can make an adjustment such that black or nearly black text is reproduced in a color closely matching with the original that was scanned in color.
• Adjust Print Position: You can adjust the print position when the printed image is skewed or part of the image is outside the print range.

How do I adjust gradation?

Gradation refers to the dark to light continuum of shades of a color. The more shades in the gradations of colors that are printed, the more natural printouts seem. If color reproducibility becomes poor and the density and brightness of printouts differ markedly from the originals, perform the appropriate adjustment (calibration). There are three types of adjustments: “Full Adjust” for accurate adjustment, “Quick Adjust” for simple adjustment, and “Adjust Copy Image” for gradation adjustment, especially for copying.

• Frequent calibration may affect the lifetime of toner cartridges.
• When the remaining amount of toner in cartridges is low, performing calibration may result in disruption of color balance. If this phenomenon actually occurs after calibration, it is recommended that you replace any toner cartridges with a low remaining amount.
• The machine performs automatic adjustment (automatic calibration) in accordance with changes in the usage condition or environmental conditions.

How do I perform a full adjust?

This adjustment optimizes reproducibility for color printing. When the machine performs a full adjustment, it obtains information to optimize color reproducibility. The machine maintains this information until the next time you perform a full adjustment. To make a full adjustment, repeat the operation, “print out the adjustment image and scan it,” multiple times. Note that you cannot perform this adjustment while performing some functions, including, scanning, and printing.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

2. Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> > <Adjust Image Quality> > <Auto Adjust Gradation>.

3. Select <Full Adjust>.

4. Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK>.

5. Confirm the procedure, and select <Start>.

   • An adjustment image is printed.

6. Open the feeder or the platen glass cover after the screen displayed during printing disappears.

7. Place the adjustment image on the platen glass.

   • Place the adjustment image with the print side facing down and the black stripe toward the back side of the machine.

8. Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.

9. Select <Start Scanning>.

   • The placed adjustment image is scanned, and then the second adjustment image is printed.

10. Open the feeder or the platen glass cover, remove the first adjustment image, and then place the second adjustment image on the platen glass with the print side face down.

    • In the same way as for the first adjustment image, place the adjustment image with the print side facing down and the black stripe toward the back side of the machine.

11. Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.

12. Select <Start Scanning>.

    • The adjustment image is scanned and adjustment starts.

13. When a message appears notifying that adjustment is complete, open the feeder or the platen glass cover, and remove the adjustment image.

14. Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.

What should I do if the “Could not perform correction.” message is displayed?

• Did you load the paper displayed in step 4 into the paper source?
• Did you place the adjustment image with the print side face down, with the black stripe toward the back side of the machine?
• Has a paper jam occurred?
• Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge sufficient? If the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low, it is recommended that you replace the toner cartridge.
• Is the transfer belt inside the machine dirty?

How do I perform a quick adjust?

This adjustment maintains the optimized status that was acquired by <Full Adjust>. If the result of this adjustment is not satisfactory, perform <Full Adjust>. This adjustment may be automatically performed after you replace a toner cartridge.

• Quick adjustment is not available while scanning or printing is performed.
• You can also configure it so that a quick adjustment is automatically performed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when a first print job is performed.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

2. Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> > <Adjust Image Quality> > <Auto Adjust Gradation>.

3. Select <Quick Adjust>.

4. Select <Start>.

   • The adjustment starts.

How do I adjust the copy image?

Use this adjustment when the appearance of the copy is extremely different from that of the original. The adjustment operation is to “print out the adjustment image and scan it.” Note that you cannot perform this adjustment while performing some functions such as scanning and printing.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

2. Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> > <Adjust Image Quality> > <Auto Adjust Gradation>.

3. Select <Adjust Copy Image>.

4. Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK>.

5. Confirm the procedure, and select <Start>.

   • An adjustment image is printed.

6. Open the feeder or the platen glass cover after the screen displayed during printing disappears.

7. Place the adjustment image on the platen glass.

   • Place the adjustment image with the print side facing down and the black stripe toward the back side of the machine.

8. Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.

9. Select <Start Scanning>.

   • The adjustment image is scanned and adjustment starts.

10. When a message appears notifying that adjustment is complete, open the feeder or the platen glass cover, and remove the adjustment image.

11. Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.

What should I do if the “Could not perform correction.” message is displayed?

• Did you load the paper displayed in step 4 into the paper source?
• Did you place the adjustment image with the print side face down, with the black stripe toward the back side of the machine?
• Has a paper jam occurred?
• Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge sufficient? If the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low, it is recommended that you replace the toner cartridge.
• Is the transfer belt inside the machine dirty?

How do I correct “Print Color Mismatch”?

Print color mismatch refers to a shift in the positions of colors that may occur when printing one image with multiple toner cartridges. Print color mismatch can cause printouts to appear blurry. If print color mismatch occurs, perform the following calibration procedure.

• Frequent calibration may affect the lifetime of toner cartridges.
• When the remaining amount of toner in cartridges is low, performing calibration may result in disruption of color balance. If this phenomenon actually occurs after calibration, it is recommended that you replace any toner cartridges with a low remaining amount.
• The machine performs automatic adjustment (automatic calibration) in accordance with changes in the usage condition or environmental conditions.
• You can set the machine to perform this adjustment automatically after the power is turned ON.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

2. Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> > <Adjust Image Quality>.

3. Select <Correct Print Color Mismatch>.

4. Select <Start>.

   • The adjustment starts.

How do I adjust values for text color reproducibility?

You can make an adjustment such that black or nearly black text is reproduced in a color closely matching with the original that was scanned in color.

• This function will apply when copy or scan is performed with <Original Type> set to other than <Printed Image>/<Photo>.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

2. Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> > <Adjust Image Quality>.

3. Select <Black Text Processing for Color>.

4. Adjust the value.

   • This adjustment value can be set independently in the feeder and the platen glass.
     • <Color Text Priority>: Reproduces black or nearly black text in a color closely matching with the original.
     • <Black Text Priority>: Reproduces black text with enhanced clarity.

5. Select <Apply>.

How do I adjust print position?

If a document is printed off-center or out of the printable range, adjust the print position. You can adjust the print position for each paper source. You can adjust the print position in the range -0.20" to +0.20" (-5.0 mm to +5.0 mm) in increments of 0.01" (0.1 mm).

How do I check the direction and distance to adjust?

When you adjust the print position, specify the direction using “+” and “-” and the distance using “mm.” For <Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>, specify a value with a “+” sign to shift the print position in the up-to-down direction. For <Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>, specify a value with a “+” sign to shift the print position in the left-to-right direction. To shift in the reverse direction, specify a value with a “-” sign.

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

2. Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> > <Adjust Image Quality>.

3. Select <Adjust Print Position>.

4. Select the paper source.

   • When the optional cassette feeding module is installed, its paper drawer is also displayed.

5. Select the combination of the adjustment direction and printing side.

6. Set an adjustment value.

7. Select <Apply>.

How do I adjust the print position for all print jobs?

You can use <Function Settings> in the setting menu of the operation panel to adjust the print position for all print jobs, irrespective of the paper source. The print position can be adjusted in 0.01" (0.5 mm) increments between -2.00" (-50.0 mm) and +2.00" (+50.0 mm).

How do I view the counter value?

You can check separate totals for the number of pages used for color printouts and black and white printouts. These totals include faxes, reports, and lists, in addition to copies and printouts of data from computers.

How do I check the counter value on the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw?

Go to <Check Counter> to check the number of pages printed:

• <101: Total 1>: Displays the total number of pages copied and printed.
• <108: Total (Black & White 1)>: Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white.
• <230: Copy (Full Color + Single Color/Small)>: Displays the total number of pages copied in color.
• <322: Print (Full Color + Single Color/Small)>: Displays the total number of pages printed in color.

How do I check the counter value on the MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw / MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

Go to <Status Monitor> > <Device Information> > <Check Counter> to check the number of pages printed:

• <101: Total 1>: Displays the total number of pages copied and printed.

What does <Monitoring Service> enable?

It enables communication with a remote monitoring server. Execution of this item enables information about the machine to be periodically sent to the remote monitoring server connected to the machine.

What does <Check Dev. Config.> enable?

It enables you to check the optional units installed on the machine.

How do you configure the print settings for reports and lists?

You can perform 2-sided printing of reports and lists.

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Report Settings>
• <Default Settings for Report Output>
• <On>
• <Apply>

How do you print a report on the total volume of printouts by department ID?

When Department ID Management is enabled, you can check the total volume of printouts for each Department ID by printing a Department ID Management Report. By checking the printout totals, you can better manage your paper and toner cartridge supplies.

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Print List>
• <Department ID Management Report>
• Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

How do you set reports on the communication results?

You can print reports on the results of sending/receiving by e-mail, fax, and I-Fax, as well as results of saving to a shared folder or FTP server. Some reports can be printed automatically while others are only printed when an error occurs.

• If “Result” in a printed list contains “NG,” you can check details of the error from a three-digit number prefixed with “#” displayed in the next to the result. For more information, see “Troubleshooting (FAQ)” on the online manual website.

Where can you check the fax and e-mail logs of sent and received documents?

You can check the fax and e-mail logs of sent and received documents by printing a Communication Management Report. The report can be printed automatically after every 40 transmissions, or you can print it manually.

How do you configure report settings for communication management reports?

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Report Settings>
• <Communication Management Report>
• Configure report settings
• <Apply>

How do you set the communication management report to auto print?

Select <On> to print the report automatically after every 40 transmissions, or <Off> if you do not want to print the report automatically.

How do you print sent and received communication management reports separately?

Select <On> to print sent and received reports separately, or <Off> to print both reports on one sheet.

How do you manually print a communication management report?

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Print List>
• <Communication Management Report>
• Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

How do you check the fax logs of sent documents?

You can check the fax logs of sent documents by printing a Fax TX Result Report. The report can be printed either every time a transmission is completed or only when a sending error occurs.

How do you configure the settings for a Fax TX Result Report?

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Report Settings>
• <Fax TX Result Report>
• Select <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>
• Select <Off> or <On>
• <Apply>

How do you include part of a sent document in the TX Result Report?

When you select <On>, a part of a sent document can be included in the TX Result Report.

How do you check the e-mail and I-Fax logs of sent documents as well as documents saved to a shared folder or FTP server?

You can check the e-mail and I-Fax logs of sent documents as well as documents saved to a shared folder or FTP server by printing an E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report. The report can be printed either every time a transmission is completed or only when a sending error occurs.

How do you configure the settings for an E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report?

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Report Settings>
• <E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report>
• Select <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>

If an error occurs during transmission by e-mail/I-Fax or saving to a shared folder/FTP server, does the report show the error code?

No. If an error occurs during transmission by e-mail/I-Fax or saving to a shared folder/FTP server, the report does not show the error code.

How do you check the error code if an error occurs during transmission by e-mail/I-Fax or saving to a shared folder/FTP server?

To check the error code, print a Communication Management Report.

How do you check the logs of received fax and I-Fax documents?

You can check the logs of received fax and I-Fax documents by printing an RX Result Report. The report can be printed either every time a transmission is completed or only when a receiving error occurs.

How do you configure the settings for an RX Result Report?

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Report Settings>
• <RX Result Report>
• Select <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>

How do you print information and settings registered in the machine as a list?

You can print information and settings registered in the machine as a list.

How do you check the list of destinations registered in the Address Book?

You can check the list of destinations registered in the Address Book as <Coded Dial>, <Favorites>, and <Group> by printing an Address Book List.

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Print List>
• <Address Book List>
• Select the setting you want to print out
• Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

How do you check the list of settings and content that has been registered in the machine?

You can check the list of the settings as well as the content that has been registered in the machine by printing a User Data List or a System Manager Data List. Both lists include the firmware version, the paper size and type registered in the machine, and the print settings of Communication Management Report, TX Result Report, and RX Result Report.

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Print List>
• Select <User Data List> or <System Manager Data List>
• Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

Does the User Data List include Network Settings and Management Settings?

No. The User Data List does not include certain settings such as Network Settings and Management Settings.

How do you check all of the setting items?

To check all the settings items, print the System Manager Data List.

How do you check the list of policy names and the IPSec settings registered in the machine?

You can check the list of policy names and the IPSec settings registered in the machine by printing an IPSec Policy List.

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Print List>
• <IPSec Policy List>
• Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

How do you print reports and lists on the usage status of the machine?

You can print the machine status report, the usage log of toner cartridges, and the list of fonts available in PCL or PS mode.

How do you check the monthly total volume of printouts and the power consumption?

You can check the monthly total volume of printouts and the power consumption with a report. This report includes tips that are useful for saving paper and power consumption based on the usage status.

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Print List>
• <Eco Report>
• Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

Does the amount of power consumption vary?

Yes. The amount of power consumption may vary depending on the environment and conditions where the machine is used.

How do you check the consumables status installed in the machine?

You can check the consumables status installed in the machine with a report.

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Print List>
• <Consumables Status Report>
• Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

How do you check the list of fonts available in PCL mode?

You can check the list of fonts available in PCL mode with a report.

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Print List>
• <PCL Font List>
• Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

How do you check the list of fonts available in PS mode?

You can check the list of fonts available in PS mode with a report.

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Print List>
• <PS Font List>
• Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

How do you check the usage logs of toner cartridges?

You can check the usage logs of toner cartridges with a report.

• <Menu>
• <Output Report>
• <Print List>
• <Cartridge Log Report>
• Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <Start>

What is the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in this machine?

The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in this machine. Purchase consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe safety and health precautions when storing and handling consumables. For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is recommended.

Where can you find precautions for handling and storing consumables?

To handle and store consumables, observe precautions in “Getting Started” provided for this product.

Do you need to replace consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime?

Yes. Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or original type, you may need to replace consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.

How does the machine maintain print quality?

To maintain print quality, the machine performs automatic calibration in accordance with changes in the environmental conditions. The machine may also perform automatic calibration when it is turned ON or recovers from sleep mode.

Does calibration use toner?

Yes. Calibration uses the toner, and accordingly, it may result in a decrease in the lifetime of the toner cartridges.

Are the color toner cartridges used even in black and white printing?

Yes. The color toner cartridges are used even in black and white printing.

Does the use of black and white printing decrease the number of printable pages for each color?

Yes. Therefore, much use of black and white printing may also result in a decrease in the remaining number of printable pages for each color.

What are the average yield and weight of the toner cartridges that come with the machine?

The average yield and weight of the toner cartridges that come with the machine are shown below. MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw

• Black
  • Average yield: 2,300 sheets
  • Weight: Approx. 4.9 lb (2.2 kg)
• Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan)
  • Average yield: 1,200 sheets
  • Weight: Approx. 4.9 lb (2.2 kg) MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw
• Black
  • Average yield: 1,500 sheets
  • Weight: Approx. 4.6 lb (2.1 kg)
• Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan)
  • Average yield: 680 sheets
  • Weight: Approx. 4.6 lb (2.1 kg)

What are the average yields and weights of the replacement toner cartridges?

For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended. MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw

• Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge | Average yield and weight of toner cartridge
• —|—
• Canon Cartridge 055 Black | Average yield: 2,300 sheets, Weight: Approx. 4.9 lb (2.2 kg)
• Canon Cartridge 055 Yellow, Canon Cartridge 055 Magenta, Canon Cartridge 055 Cyan | Average yield: 2,100 sheets, Weight: Approx. 4.9 lb (2.2 kg)
• Canon Cartridge 055 H Black | Average yield: 7,600 sheets, Weight: Approx. 5.7 lb (2.6 kg)
• Canon Cartridge 055 H Yellow, Canon Cartridge 055 H Magenta, Canon Cartridge 055 H Cyan | Average yield: 5,900 sheets, Weight: Approx. 5.7 lb (2.6 kg) MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw
• Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge | Average yield and weight of toner cartridge
• —|—
• Canon Cartridge 054 Black | Average yield: 1,500 sheets, Weight: Approx. 4.6 lb (2.1 kg)
• Canon Cartridge 054 Yellow, Canon Cartridge 054 Magenta, Canon Cartridge 054 Cyan | Average yield: 1,200 sheets, Weight: Approx. 4.6 lb (2.1 kg)
• Canon Cartridge 054 H Black | Average yield: 3,100 sheets, Weight: Approx. 4.9 lb (2.2 kg)
• Canon Cartridge 054 H Yellow, Canon Cartridge 054 H Magenta, Canon Cartridge 054 H Cyan | Average yield: 2,300 sheets, Weight: Approx. 4.9 lb (2.2 kg)

What is the average yield based on?

The average yield is based on “ISO/IEC 19798” (the global standard related to “Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer components” issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting.

What could the use of counterfeit toner cartridges result in?

Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner cartridges may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident, or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridges. For more information, see global.canon/ctc.

Where can you find information on replacing toner cartridges?

When replacing toner cartridges, see Replacing the Toner Cartridge.

What should you check when a problem occurs?

When a problem occurs, check this chapter to find out solutions before contacting Canon.

What are the machine specifications?

See the following section(s) when you want to check the specifications of the main unit and optional equipment, network environment, print function, and so on.

• Specifications

What options are available for using this machine more conveniently and effectively?

See the following section(s) when you want to check what options are available to use this machine more conveniently and more effectively.

• Options

Where can you find information about the kinds of manuals describing the functions of the machine and how to operate the machine?

See the first of the following sections when you want to be sure of the kinds of the manuals describing the functions of the machine and how to operate the machine.

• Manuals and Their Contents

Where can you find information about how to read and use the User’s Guide?

When you want to know how to read and use the User’s Guide (this manual), see the second section.

• Using User’s Guide

Where can you get useful information and check the disclaimers and copyright information?

See the following section(s) when you want to get useful information, and check the disclaimers and copyright information.

• Third-Party Software
• Feature Highlights
• Basic Windows Operations
• Menu Route Map
• Notice

Where can you find information related to third-party software?

Click the following icon(s).

• MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw
• MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw

How can you make use of the machine’s features?

This section describes tips for leveraging the features of the machine by category. You can make use of the features according to your intended purposes and operating environment.

• Going Green and Saving Money
• Improving Efficiency
• Going Digital
• So Much More

How do you cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses?

There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.

What are some ways to cut back on paper?

You can use 2-sided printing for copies, print jobs sent from your computer, and even incoming faxes. Because you’ll only be using half the paper you would otherwise, you can cut your paper costs in half. To save even more, combine 2-sided printing with N on 1 printing of multiple pages on one sheet of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single sheet, which is both economical and environmentally friendly.

• Basic Copy Operations
• Printing from a Computer
• <Receive/Forward>
  • <Fax Settings>
  • <Print on Both Sides>
• <Receive/Forward>
  • <I-Fax Settings>
  • <Print on Both Sides>

How can you save even more paper?

To really start saving paper, shrink multiple pages onto one side of a sheet – 2 or 4 pages for copies, and up to 16 pages for print jobs sent from your computer. This is even more effective when used together with 2-sided printing.

• Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)
• Printing from a Computer

How can you save energy and money?

For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that powers down a machine when nobody is using it has become an essential feature. This machine will enter sleep mode automatically and can also be put to sleep whenever you want.

How do you put the machine to sleep?

Press the power button once to put the machine to sleep. Press it again to instantly wake the machine back into action.

What are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more efficient?

Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more efficient.

How do you save time and energy when entering fax and e-mail addresses?

Entering fax and e-mail addresses in the Address Book saves you the inconvenience of entering them number-by-number, letter-by-letter every time you have something to send. Display the addresses you use most frequently with the <Favorites> feature to quickly and easily send what you need to the people who need it. You can save your Address Book data on your computer and feel secure knowing that your important contact information is backed up.

What are some actions you can perform with the address book?

• Registering Destinations
• Registering Destinations from Remote UI
• Basic Operations for Sending Faxes
• Basic Operations for Scanning Originals
• Importing/Exporting the Setting Data

How can you register frequently used settings to a shortcut button?

Always making 2-sided copies. Always scanning in the same format and to the same save destination. Frequently used settings like these can be registered to a single shortcut button. This is convenient by allowing you to specify involved operations all in a single touch.

• Registering Frequently Used Settings

How do you print images directly from a USB memory device?

Plug a USB memory device into the machine and you can print images and documents directly, without using a computer. You can even preview JPEG and other images before you print, so there is no wasted paper.

What kind of files can you preview from a USB memory device?

JPEG and other images.

How do you scan handwritten memos, etc., and save them directly to a USB memory device?

• Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)
• Basic Operations for Scanning Originals

What are the advantages of scanning handwritten memos, etc., and saving them directly to a USB memory device?

Convenient for carrying about.

What can you manage from your computer using Remote UI?

Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer, all without having to go over to the machine. Configure settings and keep an eye on the machine’s status with an intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface that you’ll master immediately.

How can you manage the machine from a computer?

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)

What can you save your time and energy for when using Remote UI?

Save your time and energy for things other than taking care of the machine.

How do you make print settings quickly?

You can easily specify the page layout as well as the binding position, switching between 1-sided and 2-sided printing, etc., intuitively on the preview image in the printer driver.

What does the simple click-operation allow you to do?

The simple click-operation allows you to conveniently make settings while viewing how settings are applied.

How do you learn about how to print from a computer?

Printing from a Computer

What displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white?

<108: Total (Black & White 1)> displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white.

What displays the total number of pages copied in color?

<230: Copy (Full Color + Single Color/Small)> displays the total number of pages copied in color.

What displays the total number of pages printed in color?

<322: Print (Full Color + Single Color/Small)> displays the total number of pages printed in color.

What are some things you can print reports and lists to check information on?

You can print reports and lists to check information such as the total volume of printouts for each Department ID and machine settings.

How can a document be digitalized?

Digitalizing a document enables editing using a computer as well as reducing cost and time by using e-mail.

How can scanned originals be emailed without turning on a computer?

Scanned originals can be emailed without turning on a computer by converting the scanned original into an email attachment right from the machine.

How can a paper copy of a report be shared with everyone in a company-wide meeting?

A paper copy of a report can be shared with everyone in a company-wide meeting by scanning it, converting it, and saving it directly in a shared folder on the network.

What is the benefit of scanning and saving a report to a shared folder?

There is no need to print out copies and pass them out.

What is ScanGear MF used for?

If you are only interested in a certain part of a document, you can use ScanGear MF to select what you want from a preview, and then have the scanner disregard the rest.

What should you do if you’re uncertain about the legality of scanning, printing, or reproducing a particular document?

Consult with a legal advisor for guidance.

What is a searchable PDF?

A searchable PDF is a PDF that allows you to search for text within the document.

How is a searchable PDF created?

By scanning an original with both text and images, text portions are converted by OCR into text data.

What are the benefits of a searchable PDF?

In addition to being able to search for text information, you can also copy required portions into an Excel spreadsheet or Word document in Microsoft Office.

What is the benefit of using OCR to convert text portions of a scanned document into text data?

It eliminates the need to type in customer data, addresses, etc. from scratch.

How can scanned images be imported into documents?

Some applications work with the machine to let you easily import scanned images directly into documents you’re working on.

What is the benefit of importing scanned images directly into documents?

You can skip the steps of opening a separate application just for receiving the scanned images and then exporting them to the application you’re really using.

What is the Application Library?

Application Library is a facility that makes it possible to register frequently used operations such as printing a usual document and checking the consumables information as well as convenient functions are registered in the form of applications.

How can the Application Library be used?

You can execute these applications in one-touch button operation from the Home screen.

What are the benefits of using the Application Library?

Make the best use of Application Library for time reduction and operational accuracy enhancement.

Where can more information about the Application Library be found?

For more information, see the manual on Application Library on the online manual website.

When is Canon PRINT Business useful?

At times such as when you want to quickly print out a proposal you completed on a tablet while traveling to a business destination, or scan materials handed out at a meeting using a smartphone, Canon PRINT Business comes in handy.

How does Canon PRINT Business work?

Even in environments without a wireless LAN router, you can connect to the machine with a mobile device wirelessly and directly.

What are the benefits of using Canon PRINT Business?

PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities for work/play with functionality made for this age of speed.

What is Google Cloud Print?

Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or cell phone, send your data, and out come your printed documents.

What are the benefits of using Google Cloud Print?

With this machine, Google Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever you want from wherever you want.

What is secure printing?

If you have sensitive documents, you can use secure printing.

How does secure printing work?

No one will be able to print your documents without entering your password on the machine’s operation panel.

What is the benefit of secure printing?

Don’t let your confidential documents lie exposed on the tray for everyone to see.

What are the benefits of using a wireless network?

No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance.

How can you bypass the settings process altogether when setting up a wireless network?

If you’ve got a WPS wireless LAN router, bypass the settings process altogether and be ready to go before you know it.

What are the benefits of using a wireless document system?

Enjoy the kind of clutter-free and easy-to-use document system that you can only get from wireless.

What wireless standards are supported?

Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n for stress-free wireless, and also supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for tighter security.

How can you avoid missing a fax when you are out of the office?

Set a forwarding destination and any fax that comes in on the machine will go right to you.

What is a good option for a forwarding destination?

Make the forwarding destination the email address for your tablet or mobile.

What is the toner replenishment service?

Through the toner replenishment service, new toner cartridges are automatically delivered to you before your existing toner cartridge is used up.

What is required to use the toner replenishment service?

Use of the toner replenishment service requires prior registration with select retailers. This service is only available in certain countries.

What is the type of the machine?

Desktop

Is color supported?

Full Color

What is the resolution for reading?

600 dpi x 600 dpi

What is the resolution for writing?

600 dpi x 600 dpi

What is the number of tones?

256

What size originals are acceptable?

Up to 8 1/2" x 11 3/4" (216.0 mm × 297 mm)

What is the maximum thickness of the original?

3/4" (20 mm) or less

What is the maximum copy size for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)

What is the minimum copy size when using the paper drawer for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

3 7/8" x 5 7/8" (98.0 mm x 148.0 mm)

What is the minimum copy size when using the Multi-Purpose Tray for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

3" x 5" (76.2 mm x 127.0 mm)

What is the maximum copy size for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)

What is the minimum copy size for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

3" x 5" (76.2 mm x 127.0 mm)

What is the top margin when copying via the platen glass?

1/4" ± 1/8" (5 mm ± 2.0 mm)

What is the top margin when copying via the feeder?

1/4" ± 1/8" (5 mm ± 3.0 mm)

What is the left or right margin when copying via the platen glass?

1/4" ± 1/8" (5 mm ± 2.0 mm)

What is the left or right margin when copying via the feeder?

1/4" ± 1/8" (5 mm ± 3.0 mm)

What is the paper weight range for the paper drawer?

16 lb Bond to 73 lb Cover (60 g/m² to 200 g/m²)

What is the paper weight range for the Multi-Purpose Tray?

16 lb Bond to 73 lb Cover (60 g/m² to 200 g/m²)

What is the warm-up time after powering on?

13.0 seconds or less

What is the time to return from sleep mode?

6.1 seconds or less

What is the first copy time for a letter size document in full color for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

Approx. 11.1 seconds

What is the first copy time for a letter size document in black-and-white for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

Approx. 9.5 seconds

What is the first copy time for a letter size document in full color for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

Approx. 13.1 seconds

What is the first copy time for a letter size document in black-and-white for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

Approx. 11.2 seconds

What is the copy speed for a letter size document in full color for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

28 sheets/minute

What is the copy speed for a letter size document in black-and-white for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

28 sheets/minute

What is the copy speed for a letter size document in full color for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw?

22 sheets/minute

What is the copy speed for a letter size document in black-and-white for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw?

22 sheets/minute

What is the copy speed for a letter size document in full color for the MF641Cw?

18 sheets/minute

What is the copy speed for a letter size document in black-and-white for the MF641Cw?

18 sheets/minute

What is the scanning speed for an A4 size document in full color?

3.62 seconds/sheet

What is the scanning speed for an A4 size document in black-and-white?

1.81 seconds/sheet

What is the magnification range?

25 % to 400 % (in 1 % increments)

What is the paper feeding system/capacity for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

• Paper Drawer: 250 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))/250 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²)) x 1
• Multi-Purpose Tray: 50 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))/50 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²)) x 1

What is the paper feeding system/capacity for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

• Paper Drawer: 250 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))/250 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²)) x 1
• Manual Feed Slot: 1 sheet

What is the paper output system/capacity for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

Output Tray: 150 sheets (20 lb Bond (75 g/m²))

What is the paper output system/capacity for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

Output Tray: 100 sheets (16 lb Bond to 24 lb Bond (60 g/m² to 90 g/m²))

What is the multiple copy capacity?

999 sheets

What is the power source for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

AC 120 V – 127 V, 6.5 A, 60 Hz

What is the power source for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

AC 120 V – 127 V, 4.5 A, 60 Hz

What is the maximum power consumption for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

1,470 W or less

What is the power consumption during sleep mode when connected via USB for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

Approx. 0.6 W

What is the power consumption during sleep mode when connected via a wired LAN for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

Approx. 0.6 W

What is the power consumption during sleep mode when connected via a wireless LAN for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

Approx. 0.6 W

What is the power consumption with the main power turned off for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

0.3 W or less

What is the maximum power consumption for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

900 W or less

What is the power consumption during sleep mode when connected via USB for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

Approx. 0.8 W

What is the power consumption during sleep mode when connected via a wired LAN for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

Approx. 0.8 W

What is the power consumption during sleep mode when connected via a wireless LAN for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

Approx. 0.8 W

What is the power consumption with the main power turned off for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw?

0.1 W or less

What are the dimensions (W x D x H) for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw?

18 1/2" x 18 1/2" x 18 1/8" (471 mm x 469 mm x 460 mm)

What are the dimensions (W x D x H) for the MF741Cdw?

17 3/4" x 18 1/2" x 18 1/8" (451 mm x 469 mm x 460 mm)

What are the dimensions (W x D x H) for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw?

17 3/4" x 18 1/8" x 16 1/4" (451 mm x 460 mm x 413 mm)

What are the dimensions (W x D x H) for the MF641Cw?

17 3/4" x 18 1/8" x 14 1/4" (451 mm x 460 mm x 360 mm)

What is the weight of the main unit for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw?

Approx. 54.0 lb (24.5 kg)

What is the weight of the main unit for the MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw?

Approx. 45.2 lb (20.5 kg)

What is the weight of the main unit for the MF641Cw?

Approx. 37.0 lb (16.8 kg)

What is the installation space (W x D)?

See “Getting Started” Manuals and Their Contents

What is the memory capacity?

RAM: 1 GB

What is the temperature range for environmental conditions?

50 °F to 86 °F (10 °C to 30 °C)

What is the humidity range for environmental conditions?

20 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)

How do environment and conditions affect the warm-up time and original scanning speed?

May vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.

How are copy/print speeds measured?

Copy/print speeds are measured based on internal testing using Letter size paper copied/printed with 100% copy/print ratio to original on one-sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously copying/printing the same one page of content on plain paper (copy speed is tested by copying on the platen glass).

What factors can affect copy/print speeds?

Copy/print speeds may vary depending on paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.

Why may the device automatically pause or slow down during continuous copying/printing?

The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous copying/printing.

What factors affect paper feeding system/capacity and the capacity of paper drawers?

May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.

Are the toner cartridges included?

The toner cartridges are not included.

What is the original feeding mechanism for the MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF644Cdw?

Automatic 2-Sided Document Feeder

What is the original feeding mechanism for the MF741Cdw / MF642Cdw?

Automatic Document Feeder

What is the maximum original size?

8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)

What is the minimum original size?

5 1/2" x 5" (139.7 mm x 128.0 mm)

What is the weight range for originals?

13 lb Bond to 28 lb Bond (50 g/m² to 105 g/m²)

What is the original tray capacity for letter size paper?

50 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))

What is the original scanning speed when copying (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Letter) with 1-sided scanning in full color?

14 pages/minute

What is the original scanning speed when copying (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Letter) with 1-sided scanning in black-and-white?

28 pages/minute

What is the original scanning speed when copying (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Letter) with 2-sided scanning in full color?

28 pages/minute

What is the original scanning speed when copying (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Letter) with 2-sided scanning in black-and-white?

48 pages/minute

What is the original scanning speed when copying (300 dpi x 300 dpi, Letter) with 1-sided scanning in full color?

28 pages/minute

What is the original scanning speed when copying (300 dpi x 300 dpi, Letter) with 1-sided scanning in black-and-white?

28 pages/minute

What is the original scanning speed when copying (300 dpi x 300 dpi, Letter) with 2-sided scanning in full color?

53 pages/minute

What is the original scanning speed when copying (300 dpi x 300 dpi, Letter) with 2-sided scanning in black-and-white?

53 pages/minute

Paper Sizes	Paper Drawer*¹	Multi-Purpose Tray	Automatic 2-Sided Printing*²
A4*³*⁴*⁵	✓	✓	✓
B5*³	✓	✓	✓
A5*³	✓	✓	✓
Legal (LGL)*³*⁴	✓	✓	–
Letter (LTR)*³*⁴*⁵	✓	✓	✓
Statement (STMT)*³	✓	✓	–
Executive	✓	✓	✓
Oficio*³*⁴	✓	✓	✓
Oficio (Brazil)*³*⁴	✓	✓	✓
Oficio (Mexico)*³*⁴	✓	✓	✓
Letter (Government)*³*⁴	✓	✓	✓
Legal (Government)*³*⁴	✓	✓	✓
Foolscap/Folio*³*⁴	✓	✓	✓
Foolscap (Australia)*³*⁴	✓	✓	✓
Legal (India)*⁴	✓	✓	–
3x5inch*⁶	–	✓	–
Envelope No.10 (COM10)*⁷	✓	✓	✓
Envelope Monarch*⁶*⁷	–	✓	–
Envelope C5*⁷	–	✓	–
Envelope DL*⁷	–	✓	–
Custom Paper Size*⁸*⁹*¹⁰	✓	✓	✓

*¹Includes the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AF.

*²Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.

*³Allows you to print received fax documents.

*⁴Allows you to print received I-Fax documents.

*⁵Allows you to print reports or lists.

*⁶For MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw only.

*⁷For MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw, it is recommended that you print from the paper drawer to obtain optimum print quality. Printing from the manual feed slot may produce skewed printouts.

*⁸The following custom sizes are available:

• MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw: 3 7/8" x 5 7/8" (98.0 mm x 148.0 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)
• MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw: 3" x 5" (76.2 mm x 127 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)

*⁹The custom size ranging from 3" x 5" (76.2 mm x 127 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm) is available.

*¹⁰The following custom sizes are available:

• MF746Cdw / MF745Cdw / MF743Cdw / MF741Cdw: 7" x 9 7/8" (176 mm x 250 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)
• MF644Cdw / MF642Cdw / MF641Cw: 7 1/8" x 10 1/8" (182 mm x 257 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)

Can chlorine-free paper be used with this machine?

Yes.

Paper Type	Paper Drawer*¹	Multi-Purpose Tray	Automatic 2-Sided Printing*²
Plain 1*³*⁴ 17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74 g/m²)	✓	✓	–
Plain 2*³*⁴ 20 lb Bond to 21 lb Bond (75 g/m² to 82 g/m²)	✓	✓	–
Plain 3*³*⁴ 22 lb Bond to 24 lb Bond (83 g/m² to 90 g/m²)	✓	✓	–
Plain 4 25 lb Bond to 28 lb Bond (91 g/m² to 105 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Heavy 1 29 lb Bond to 31 lb Bond (106 g/m² to 119 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Heavy 2 32 lb Bond to 34 lb Cover (120 g/m² to 128 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Heavy 3 35 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover (129 g/m² to 163 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Thin 1*³ 16 lb Bond (60 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Recycled 1*³*⁴ 17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Recycled 2*³*⁴ 20 lb Bond to 21 lb Bond (75 g/m² to 82 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Color*³*⁴ 17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Coated 1 27 lb Bond to 32 lb Bond (100 g/m² to 120 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Coated 2 33 lb Bond to 39 lb Bond (121 g/m² to 150 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Coated 3 56 lb Cover to 73 lb Cover (151 g/m² to 200 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Labels	–	✓	–
Envelope*⁵	✓	✓	–

*¹Includes the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AF.

*²Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.

*³Allows you to print received fax/I-Fax documents.

*⁴Allows you to print reports or lists.

*⁵When custom paper size is specified, <Envelope 1>/<Envelope 2> is displayed. If printing cannot be performed properly with <Envelope 1> selected, change the selection to <Envelope 2>.

Paper Type	Paper Drawer	Manual feed slot	Automatic 2-sided printing*¹
Plain 1*²*³ 17 lb Bond to 18 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 69 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Plain 2*²*³ 19 lb Bond to 21 lb Bond (70 g/m² to 82 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Plain 3*²*³ 22 lb Bond to 24 lb Bond (83 g/m² to 90 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Plain 4 25 lb Bond to 28 lb Bond (91 g/m² to 105 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Heavy 1 29 lb Bond to 32 lb Bond (106 g/m² to 120 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Heavy 2 33 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover (121 g/m² to 163 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Thin 1*² 16 lb Bond (60 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Recycled 1*²*³ 17 lb Bond to 18 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 69 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Recycled 2*²*³ 19 lb Bond to 21 lb Bond (70 g/m² to 82 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Color*²*³ 17 lb Bond to 18 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 69 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Coated 1 27 lb Bond to 32 lb Bond (100 g/m² to 120 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Coated 2 33 lb Bond to 39 lb Bond (121 g/m² to 150 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Coated 3 56 lb Cover to 73 lb Cover (151 g/m² to 200 g/m²)	✓	✓	✓
Labels	–	✓	–
Envelope*⁴	✓	–	–

*¹Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.

*²Allows you to print received fax/I-Fax documents.

*³Allows you to print reports or lists.

*⁴It is recommended that you print from the paper drawer to obtain optimum print quality. Printing from the manual feed slot may produce skewed printouts.

What are the maximum and minimum paper sizes for the Cassette Feeding Module-AF?

• Max: 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)
• Min: 3 7/8" x 5 7/8" (98.0 mm x 148.0 mm)

What is the paper weight range for the Cassette Feeding Module-AF?

16 lb Bond to 73 lb Cover (60 g/m² to 200 g/m²)

What is the capacity of the paper drawers in the Cassette Feeding Module-AF?

550 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))/640 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²)) x 1

What are the dimensions (W x D x H) of the Cassette Feeding Module-AF?

17 1/4" x 18 1/2" x 5 3/8" (437 mm x 469 mm x 136 mm)

What is the weight of the Cassette Feeding Module-AF?

Approx. 13.2 lb (6.0 kg)

What types of cards can be used with the Copy Card Reader-F?

Magnetic

What is the card readout method for the Copy Card Reader-F?

Magnetic readout

What is the magnetic card reading direction for the Copy Card Reader-F?

Face up

How can you utilize the functionality of the machine?

The functionality of the machine can be fully utilized by using the optional equipment described below. Optional equipment can be purchased from the retail outlet where you purchased the machine or from your local Canon dealer.

What is the Cassette Feeding Module-AF?

Installing this cassette feeding module enables you to load paper of a different size than that of paper loaded in the standard paper drawer. This surely reduces the time and labor for paper replacement.

How is the Cassette Feeding Module-AF installed?

See “Getting Started.”

What is the Copy Card Reader-F?

This is a card authentication system that enables you to perform the login process of Department ID Management by using a control card instead of entering a department ID. You can log in to the machine by inserting a control card and log off by removing it.

Where do you insert the control card?

Insert the control card into the card slot when the login screen is displayed. Remove the control card from the card slot after using the machine.

What type of control card can be used?

You can use the control card shown below. Hold the card the front side up and insert in the direction indicated on the card.

What is the Barcode Printing Kit?

This option enables you to generate barcodes in various formats. Note that if you want to print barcodes, PCL must be enabled. For information on using the Barcode Printing Kit, see the Barcode Printing Guide (PDF manual).

What is the Send PDF Security Feature Set?

You can enhance the security of PDF files with the Send PDF Security Feature Set. This option enables you to add a digital signature to PDF files or to create encrypted PDF files when scanning originals.

What is License Registration?

To activate certain system options, you need to obtain a license key and register the key to the machine.

How do you obtain a License Key?

You can obtain a license key by using a web browser. Access the License Management System (http:// http://www.canon.com/lms/license/) and follow the procedure. As a part of the procedure, you are required to enter the following numbers.

Where can you find the License Access Number?

Check the license access number provided on the License Access Number Certificate that is included in the package of the option.

Where can you check the serial number of the machine?

Check the serial number of the machine from the operation panel. <Status Monitor> <Device Information> <Serial Number>

How do you register a License Key?

1. Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 126)
2. Select <Management Settings>.
   • If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging in to the Machine(P. 137)
3. Select <License/Other> <Register License>.
4. Confirm the message on the screen, and select <OK>.
5. Enter the license key using the numeric keys, and select <Apply>.
   • Registration starts. Wait until the <Installation is complete. Changes will be effective after the main power is turned OFF and ON.> message is displayed.
   • If the <The feature required for installation is not present.> message is displayed, enable the functions that are required to activate the option and register the license key again.
6. Select <Close>.
7. Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 122)

What manuals are included with the machine?

• Getting Started: Read this manual first. It describes basic setup procedures, from removing the packing materials to setting up the machine.
• User’s Guide (This Manual): This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed using a Web browser. You can browse information by category or enter a keyword to search for pages on a specific topic. Using User’s Guide(P. 685)
• Send Setting Guide: This manual describes how to configure settings and prepare for sending scanned images by e-mail and saving scanned images to shared folders.

What is the User’s Guide?

The User’s Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly find the page you are looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User’s Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify how the appearance of the User’s Guide looks.

What does the screen layout section of the User’s Guide describe?

This section describes the screens configuring the User’s Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons.

What is described in the viewing section of the User’s Guide?

This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User’s Guide, how the keys on the operation panel and the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information contained in the User’s Guide.

What can you specify about the appearance of the User’s Guide?

You can change the character size used in the User’s Guide, and switch the screen layout to fit to the device you use to view the User’s Guide.

How can you find the topic you are looking for in the User’s Guide?

• Search the contents: You can find the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the “Contents” on the left side of the screen.
• Search by keyword: Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as “envelope” or “toner cartridge,” and the pages containing the keyword are displayed. You can find the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter phrases such as “connecting to a network.” The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see Search(P. 688).

What are the different screens in the User’s Guide?

The User’s Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.

• Top Page: Appears when User’s Guide is started.

What is the function of the following button on the Top Page: ?

Click to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click to return to the previous display.

What is the function of the following button on the Top Page: ?

Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each click on switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each click on switches between hiding and showing the display.

What is the function of the following button on the Top Page: ?

Click to set parameters to determine how the User’s Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout.

What is the function of the following button on the Top Page: ?

Click to display information on how to view the User’s Guide, how to perform a search, and other information.

What is the function of the following button on the Top Page: ?

Click to display the previous or following topic.

What is the function of the following button on the Top Page: [Notice]?

Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.

What is included on the Topic Page of the User’s Guide?

Contains information about how to configure and use the machine.

What is the function of the Navigation section of the Topic Page?

See what chapter topic you are currently viewing. Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click “Back” on your Web browser.

• When you click the icon, the current page may go dark and a pop-up window may appear. To return to the page, click [Close] in the pop-up window.

What is the function of the following button on the Topic Page: ?

Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.

What is the function of the following button on the Topic Page: ?

Click to return to the page top.

What is the function of the Search section of the Topic Page?

Click to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and find the page you are looking for.

How do you use the Search section of the Topic Page?

Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. You can search for pages containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.

What does the Search Result section display?

Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specified keywords. From the results, locate the page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.

• The specified keyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.

What are the marks used in the User’s Guide and what do they mean?

Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and other information are indicated using the marks below.

• (S) IMPORTANT: Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully, and make sure not to perform the described operations.
• NOTE: Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.
• ►: Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure.
• TIPS: Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.

How are the keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display represented in the User’s Guide?

• Keys on the operation panel: Settings displayed on the operation panel <Timer/Energy Settings> <Paper jammed.>
• Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display: [Preferences]

What computer displays are used in the User’s Guide?

Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the User’s Guide are those for the MF746Cdw. Depending on the model or operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from the actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version.

What illustrations are used in the User’s Guide?

Unless otherwise noted, illustrations used in the User’s Guide are those for the MF746Cdw. When differences are significant, multiple illustrations are used with the model names, such as “MFXXX / MFXXX.” The illustrations of the toner cartridge are those for the Canon Cartridge 055.

How do you display the printer folder in Windows Vista?

[Start] select [Control Panel] [Printer].

How do you display the printer folder in Windows 7/Server 2008 R2?

[Start] select [Devices and Printers].

How do you display the printer folder in Windows 8/Server 2012?

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

How do you display the printer folder in Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2?

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

How do you display the printer folder in Windows 10?

[ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and Printers].

How do you display the printer folder in Windows Server 2008?

[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].

How do you display the printer folder in Windows Server 2016?

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [Hardware] [Devices and Printers].

Why should you enable [Network discovery]?

Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network.

How do you enable [Network discovery] in Windows Vista?

[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

How do you enable [Network discovery] in Windows 7/Server 2008 R2?

[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

How do you enable [Network discovery] in Windows 8/Server 2012?

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

How do you enable [Network discovery] in Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2?

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

How do you enable [Network discovery] in Windows 10?

[ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

How do you enable [Network discovery] in Windows Server 2008?

[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

How do you enable [Network discovery] in Windows Server 2016?

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

How do you display shared printers in the print server?

1. Open Windows Explorer.
2. Select the printer server in [Network] or [My Network Places].
   • To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for computers.

How do you open Windows Explorer in Windows Vista/7/Server 2008?

[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].

How do you open Windows Explorer in Windows 8/Server 2012?

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer].

How do you open Windows Explorer in Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2?

Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer].

How do you open Windows Explorer in Windows 10/Server 2016?

Right-click [ ] select [File Explorer].

How do you display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen?

If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, follow the procedure below. The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as “D:” in this manual. The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer you are using.

How do you display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen in Windows Vista/7/Server 2008?

[Start] enter “D:\MInst.exe” in [Search programs and files] or [Start Search] press the [ENTER] key.

How do you display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen in Windows 8/Server 2012?

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] Enter “D:\MInst.exe” click [OK]

How do you display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen in Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2?

Right-click [Start] [Run] Enter “D:\MInst.exe” click [OK]

How do you display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen in Windows 10?

Enter “D:\MInst.exe” in the search box click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.

How do you display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen in Windows Server 2016?

Click [ ] enter “D:\MInst.exe” click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.

How do you print a test page in Windows?

You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.

1. Load Letter size paper in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 145)
2. Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 690)
3. Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].

What are the supported protocols for TCP/IP?

LPD, Port9100, WSD

What are the available print sizes?

Available Paper(P. 664)

What is the print speed?

Same as “Copy Speed” in “Main Unit” Main Unit(P. 659)

What is the resolution for data processing?

1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi (only for PCL6), 600 dpi x 600 dpi

What Page Description Languages (PDL) are supported?

PCL6, PCL5

What is the supported character encoding used when text data is transmitted between the machine and an LDAP server?

UTF-8

How many IP addresses can be specified for both IPv4 and IPv6 for firewall settings?

Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses)

What communications do the packet filters described in this section control?

Communications over TCP, UDP, and ICMP

How many MAC addresses can be specified for Firewall Settings?

Up to 32

What RFCs does the machine’s IPSec conform to?

RFC2401, RFC2402, RFC2406, and RFC4305

What operating systems are supported for IPSec?

• Windows Vista
• Windows 7
• Windows 8
• Windows 8.1
• Windows 10

What connection mode is supported for IPSec?

Transport mode

What is the key exchange protocol for IPSec?

IKEv1 (main mode)

What authentication methods are available for IPSec?

• Pre-shared key
• Digital signature

What are the available hash algorithms (and key lengths) for IPSec?

• HMAC-SHA1-96
• HMAC-SHA2 (256 bits or 384 bits)

What are the available encryption algorithms (and key lengths) for IPSec?

• 3DES-CBC
• AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)

What are the available key exchange algorithm/group (and key length) for IPSec?

Diffie-Hellman (DH)

• Group 1 (768 bits)
• Group 2 (1024 bits)
• Group 14 (2048 bits)

What is the ESP hash algorithm for IPSec?

HMAC-SHA1-96

What are the available ESP encryption algorithms (and key lengths) for IPSec?

• 3DES-CBC
• AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)

What are the available hash algorithm/encryption algorithm (and key length) for IPSec?

AES-GCM (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)

What is the AH hash algorithm for IPSec?

HMAC-SHA1-96

What type of address does IPSec support communication to?

A unicast address (or a single device).

Can the machine use both IPSec and DHCPv6 at the same time?

No, the machine cannot use both IPSec and DHCPv6 at the same time.

What are the format and file extension requirements for keys and CA certificates when registering keys and certificates?

• Key:
  • Format: PKCS#12*1
  • File extension: “.p12” or “.pfx”
• CA certificate:
  • Format: X.509 DER/PEM
  • File extension: “.cer” or “.pem”

What are the available public key algorithms (and key lengths) for registering keys and certificates?

• RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)
• DSA (1024 bits, 2048 bits, 3072 bits)
• ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)

What are the certificate signature algorithms for registering keys and certificates?

• RSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384*2, SHA-512*2, MD2, MD5
• DSA: SHA-1
• ECDSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512

What is the certificate thumbprint algorithm for registering keys and certificates?

SHA1

Does the machine support use of a certificate revocation list (CRL)?

No

What algorithms are prohibited when <Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.> is set to <On>?

• Hash: MD4, MD5, SHA-1
• HMAC: HMAC-MD5
• Common key cryptosystem: RC2, RC4, DES
• Public key cryptosystem: RSA encryption (512 bits/1024 bits), RSA signature (512 bits/1024 bits), DSA (512 bits/1024 bits), DH (512 bits/1024 bits)

Can the hash algorithm SHA-1 be used when <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.> is set to <On>?

Yes, even when <Prohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.> is set to <On>, the hash algorithm SHA-1, which is used for signing a root certificate, can be used.

What are the system requirements for WSD Scan?

• Windows 8.1
• Windows 10

What are the system requirements for the Remote UI?

• Windows:
  • Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10: Internet Explorer 11 or later
  • Windows 10: Edge
• macOS:
  • Mac OS X 10.5 or later
  • Safari 5.0.6 or later
• Android:
  • Chrome
  • UC Browser
• iOS:
  • Safari
  • UC Browser

What are the supported E-mail/I-Fax Forwarding Server Software?

• Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 SP3
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2010
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2013
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2016
• Lotus Domino R7.0
• Sendmail 8.14.4

What are the supported E-mail/I-Fax Receiving Server Software?

• Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 SP3
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2010
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2013
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2016
• Lotus Domino R7.0
• Qpopper 4.0.19

What are the File Servers Available as Destinations for File Transmission for SMB?

• Windows Vista SP2 / 7 / 8 / 8.1 / 10
• Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 / Server 2008 / Server 2008 R2 SP1 / Server 2012 / Server 2012 R2 / Server 2016
• Red Hat Linux 9
• OS X 10.9 / 10.10 / 10.11 / 10.12

What are the File Servers Available as Destinations for File Transmission for FTP?

• Windows Vista SP2 / 7 / Server 2008 SP2 / Server 2008 R2 SP1: Internet Information Services 7.5
• Windows 8 / 10 / Server 2012: Internet Information Services 8.0
• Windows 8.1 / Server 2012 R2: Internet Information Services 8.5
• Windows 10 / Server 2016: Internet Information Services 10.0
• OS X 10.9 / 10.10 / 10.11 / 10.12
• Solaris 10
• Red Hat Linux 9

What are the types of LDAP servers?

• Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 with Active Directory
• Windows Server 2008 SP2 with Active Directory
• Windows Server 2012 with Active Directory
• Windows Server 2012 R2 with Active Directory
• Windows Server 2016 with Active Directory
• eDirectory V8.8 SP7 or later
• Lotus Domino R8.5 or later

What are the System Requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool?

• Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10: Internet Explorer 11 or later
• Windows 10: Edge

What are the System Requirements for the User’s Guide?

• Windows:
  • Internet Explorer 9 and later
  • Microsoft Edge
  • Firefox
  • Firefox ESR
  • Chrome*2
• macOS:
  • Safari
  • Firefox
  • Chrome*2
• Linux:
  • Firefox
• iOS:
  • Safari*2
• Android:
  • Chrome*2

What are the System Requirements for NFC Function?

Android 5.0 or later

What should you do before changing the settings of the machine?

Set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.

What are the Common Specifications for the Network Environment?

• Protocol Supported: TCP/IP
  • Frame type: Ethernet II
  • Print applications: LPD, Raw, IPP, IPPS, WSD, Mopria, Google Cloud Print, AirPrint, Windows10 Mobile Print

What are the Wired LAN Specifications?

Interface: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T (RJ-45)

What is the standard for the Wireless LAN Specifications?

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

What is the transmission scheme for Wireless LAN?

• IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)
• IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)
• IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)

What is the frequency range for Wireless LAN?

2.412 GHz to 2.462 GHz

What is the maximum radio-frequency power transmitted for Wireless LAN?

15.9 dBm

What are the communication modes for Wireless LAN?

• Infrastructure Mode
• Access Point Mode

What are the security (encryption method) options for Infrastructure Mode for Wireless LAN?

• 128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP
• WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
• WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

What are the security (encryption method) options for Access Point Mode for Wireless LAN?

WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)

What are the connection methods for Wireless LAN?

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup

What does installing options on the machine enable you to do?

Installing options on the machine enables you to use more features.

Where can you find information about the types of options available?

• Optional Equipment(P. 680)
• System Options(P. 682)

How can you find optional equipment by purpose?

• Adding a Paper Drawer: Cassette Feeding Module-AF(P. 680)
• Using the Authentication Function to Manage Users by Department: Copy Card Reader-F(P. 680)

How do I print a test page?

Click [Print Test Page] in the [General] tab. The test page will print.

How do I check the bit architecture if I am unsure whether my computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows?

1. Display [Control Panel]. For Windows Vista/7/Server 2008, click [Start] and select [Control Panel]. For Windows 8/Server 2012, right-click the lower-left corner of the screen and select [Control Panel]. For Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2, right-click [Start] and select [Control Panel]. For Windows 10/Server 2016, proceed to step 2.
2. Display [System]. For Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012, click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] then [System]. For Windows 10/Server 2016, click [] then [Settings] then [System] then select [About]. For Windows Server 2008, double-click [System].
3. Check the bit architecture. For 32-bit versions, [32-bit Operating System] is displayed. For 64-bit versions, [64-bit Operating System] is displayed.

How do I check the computer name?

1. Display [Control Panel]. For Windows Vista/7/Server 2008, click [Start] and select [Control Panel]. For Windows 8/Server 2012, right-click the lower-left corner of the screen and select [Control Panel]. For Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2, right-click [Start] and select [Control Panel]. For Windows 10, click [] then select [Windows System] then [Control Panel]. For Windows Server 2016, right-click [] then select [Control Panel].
2. Display [System]. For Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012/Server 2016 click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] then [System]. For Windows Server 2008, double-click [System].
3. Check the computer name.

How do I check the printer port?

1. Open the printer folder.
2. Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3. In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly.

What do I do if I am using a network connection and I have changed the machine’s IP address?

If [Description] for the selected port is [Canon MFNP Port] and the machine and the computer are on the same subnet, then the connection will be maintained and you do not need to add a new port. If it is [Standard TCP/IP Port], you need to add a new port.

How do I check bidirectional communication?

1. Open the printer folder.
2. Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3. In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is selected.

How do I check the SSID to which my computer is connected?

If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click , , or in the system tray to display the SSID of the connected wireless LAN router.

How do I print or send from the Windows Store App?

For Windows 8/Server 2012, display the charms on the right side of the screen, tap or click [Devices], select the driver that you use, then [Print]. For Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2, display the charms on the right side of the screen, tap or click [Devices], select [Print], select the driver that you use, then [Print]. For Windows 10, tap or click [Print] on the application, select the driver that you use, then [Print].

What are the limitations to printing a document or sending a fax using the above method?

Only a limited number of functions are available.

What should I do if the message “The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it” is displayed?

Go to the desktop and perform the required operations. This message appears when the machine is set to display the user name when printing documents, sending faxes, or similar instances.

Where can I see the settings on the machine’s display?

See the Menu Route Map (PDF manual).

What is the ENERGY STAR® Program?

The ENERGY STAR Program is an international program that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment. The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily.

What does the IPv6 Ready Logo mean?

The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2 established by the IPv6 Forum.

What are the disclaimers for this document?

• The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
• CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
• If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.

What are the trademarks mentioned?

• Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
• Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X, Safari, AirPrint, and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word, and Excel are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
• Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome, and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
• This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc. UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. UFST: Copyright © 1989-1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
• Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
• Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
• Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
• The PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.

What is PostScript?

All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems’ implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.

What is a “PostScript printing device”, “PostScript display device” or similar item?

Any reference to a “PostScript printing device,” “PostScript display device,” or similar item refers to a printing device, display device, or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript language.

What are the terms of imageWARE Remote Service?

If your Canon imageCLASS product is enabled with embedded functions for the imageWARE Remote Diagnostic Service (“iWR”), or your product is not iWR enabled but it interacts with the iWR Remote Diagnostic System (“RDS”) Plug-In program of imageWARE Enterprise Management Console (“EMC”) software, then Canon USA, Canon Canada, or their respective authorized independent Canon retail dealers can access Product meter readings and receive notifications of certain automated meter information, device error monitoring, and supply replenishment notices automatically via the internet. You can read more about iWR in Canon-published materials available from your dealer or on the websites of Canon USA (www.usa.canon.com) or Canon Canada (www.canon.ca). iWR will only collect and transmit Product-specific meter readings and service data, and will not access, collect, or transmit your image content data in the Product.

What does my instruction to Canon USA, Canon Canada, or my dealer to activate iWR (embedded or Plug-In) for a Product mean?

Your instruction to Canon USA, Canon Canada or your dealer to activate iWR (embedded or Plug-In) for a Product shall be considered:

(i) a representation that you have an internal IP network and internet access available on a generally continuous basis;

(ii) authorization by you to establish, and perform during the period of iWR activation, HTTPS communications using your network bandwidth for transmissions over the internet of use and service data accumulated by the Product and send iWR notice emails to Canon USA, Canon Canada, or your dealer, and

(iii) authorization by you to store, analyze and use this data for purposes related to servicing the Product and for Product and iWR improvement.

What am I acknowledging by instructing Canon USA, Canon Canada or my dealer to activate iWR?

By so instructing Canon USA, Canon Canada, or your dealer, you shall also be considered to acknowledge that (A) the iWR software (embedded or Plug-In) is the confidential property of Canon USA and its licensor; (B) you have no rights in such iWR software (except as the Product executes the limited data collection and transmission functions for which it is configured when delivered and you obtain the benefits of iWR as outlined in Canon-published materials), © you shall not disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer, disclose or attempt to copy such iWR software, allow any third party to do any of the foregoing or transfer your limited rights to any other party without the prior written approval of Canon USA or Canon Canada; and (D) there are many factors outside the control of Canon USA, Canon Canada or their respective dealers that could affect the accuracy or timing of meter readings or service data harvested by iWR and, except as expressly provided in the limited warranty statement for the Product or End-User License Agreement for EMC software, in the case of the iWR RDS Plug-In program, neither Canon USA, Canon Canada nor their respective dealers shall be responsible for alleged deficiencies in, or your dissatisfaction with, iWR or any software used to provide iWR.

What happens if my dealer ceases to be an authorized Canon USA dealer?

If your dealer ceases to be an authorized Canon USA dealer, it will no longer have access to the use and service data accumulated by iWR for your Product. In that case, you may request or instruct Canon USA to recommend to you an alternative service provider who will have access to this data in order to maintain Product service utilizing iWR functionality.

What is the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1?

This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. This license is copied below, and is also available with an FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL

What is the preamble of the SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE?

The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide development of collaborative font projects, to support the font creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in partnership with others. The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives, however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.

What are the definitions of terms used in the SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE?

• “Font Software” refers to the set of files released by the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may include source files, build scripts, and documentation.
• “Reserved Font Name” refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement(s).
• “Original Version” refers to the collection of Font Software components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
• “Modified Version” refers to any derivative made by adding to, deleting, or substituting–in part or in whole–any of the components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font Software to a new environment.
• “Author” refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.

What permissions and conditions are stipulated in the SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE?

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed, modify, redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the Font Software, subject to the following conditions:

1. Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself.
2. Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled, redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields within text or binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user.
3. No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the primary font name as presented to the users.
4. The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any Modified Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written permission.
5. The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole, must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the Font Software.

When does the SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE become null and void?

This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are not met.

What is the disclaimer for the SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE?

THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

What are the conditions if I use third-party services through the product?

When you access and/or obtain some third-party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or software) through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by applicable law, you may not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content, or keep cached copies longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify, create a derivative work of, sell, lease, lend, convey, distribute, publicly display, or sublicense to any third party; © misrepresent the source or ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright, trademark or other proprietary rights notices, falsify or delete any author attributions, legal notices or other labels of the origin or source of material.

Where can I find more details on the license conditions of the Software Subjected to Other License Conditions?

Please refer to the Table of Software and respective License terms below for more detail and corresponding license conditions.

What software is included in the Table of Software and what are the terms and conditions of their licenses?

Names of Software	Terms and Conditions of the License: See Page
Adobe PostScript 3	3
Adobe PDF Scan Library	10
expat	13
HarfBuzz	14
libjingle	15
Lua	16
LuaSocket	17
Lune	18
MD4	19
Net-SNMP	20
OpenSSL	28

What is the copyright for Adobe PostScript 3?

Copyright 2007-2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors. All rights reserved. Portions include software under the following terms:

• This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
• Portions of Pool.c_Copyright 1987 – NeXT, Inc., and portions of Graphics.c_Copyright 1988 NeXT, Inc. as an unpublished work. All Rights Reserved.
• The Apache Software License, Version 1.1 This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/). Portions Copyright © 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.

What are the conditions for redistribution and use of Adobe PostScript 3 in source and binary forms, with or without modification?

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).” Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names “Xerces” and “Apache Software Foundation” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “Apache”, nor may “Apache” appear in their name, without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.

What is the disclaimer for the Apache Software License, Version 1.1?

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

What is the origin of the software included in the Apache Software License, Version 1.1?

This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation and was originally based on software copyright © 1999, International Business Machines, Inc., http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please see http://www.apache.org/.

What are the conditions for redistribution and use of software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors?

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

What is the disclaimer for software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors?

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

What are the conditions for redistribution and use in source and binary forms of code derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original work by Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost?

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

What is the disclaimer for redistribution and use in source and binary forms of code derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original work by Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost?

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS’’ AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

What are the conditions under which permission is granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so?

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

What is the disclaimer for the above permission?

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Can the name of the X Consortium be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software?

Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consortium.

What is the NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON?

Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the “Sablotron XSLT Processor”. The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the “License”). You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ Software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.

What is the Original Code and who is the Initial Developer?

The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are Copyright © 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Where can I download the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated and the Original Code?

Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from: http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from: https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/

What are the conditions for redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, of the software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors?

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

What is the disclaimer for software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors?

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

What is the permission granted for the use of code that accompanies the book “Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied”?

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Welsey Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.

What are the terms of use for software developed by Unicode, Inc?

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and associated documentation (the “Data Files”) or Unicode software and associated documentation (the “Software”) to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and © there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been modified.

What is the disclaimer for software developed by Unicode, Inc?

THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.

Can the name of a copyright holder of software developed by Unicode, Inc. be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software?

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

What are the trademarks associated with software developed by Unicode, Inc?

Unicode and the Unicode logo are trademarks of Unicode, Inc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions. All other trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.

What copyright notice is Adobe required to retain and reproduce?

Adobe shall retain and reproduce, and require its Sublicensees to retain and reproduce JIM’s following copyright notice within each copy of the licensed programs in any form, in whole or in part: “© 1981, 1990 JMI Consultants, Inc. All rights reserved.”

What are the conditions for redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, of software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors?

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

What is the disclaimer for software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors?

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

What is the permission granted for the use of code included in the Loki Library?

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.

Where can I find updated information and additional third-party code information?

Updated Information/Additional Third-Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty.